Paradyne Network Card 3920PLUS User Manual

COMSPHERE  
392xPLUS MODEMS  
MODELS 3920PLUS AND  
3921PLUS  
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION  
MANUAL  
Document No. 3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Instructions  
Important Safety Instructions  
1. Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or  
included in the manual.  
2. This product is intended to be used with a three-wire grounding type plug – a plug  
which has a grounding pin. This is a safety feature. Equipment grounding is vital to  
ensure safe operation. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by  
modifying the plug or using an adapter.  
Prior to installation, use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for  
the presence of earth ground. If the receptacle is not properly grounded, the  
installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem.  
If a three-wire grounding type power source is not available, consult a qualified  
electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment.  
3. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable  
operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings  
must not be blocked or covered.  
4. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where  
persons will walk on the power cord.  
5. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may  
expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing to  
qualified service personnel.  
6. General purpose cables are provided with this product. Special cables, which may be  
required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site, are the  
responsibility of the customer.  
7. When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with the applicable  
Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed. If  
necessary, consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection  
authorities to ensure compliance.  
8. A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two  
or more buildings. If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected, the  
voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical  
consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary,  
implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products.  
In addition, if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits, take the  
following precautions:  
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed  
for wet locations.  
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has  
been disconnected at the network interface.  
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.  
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm.  
There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.  
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Notices  
WARNING  
THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE  
,
PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE  
PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL  
ENVIRONMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES, USES, AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND, IF NOT  
INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL, MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE  
TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS. OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE  
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT  
HIS OWN EXPENSE.  
THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO  
MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY  
APPROVED BY PARADYNE.  
WARNING  
TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA:  
THIS CLASS [A] DIGITAL APPARATUS MEETS ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE CANADIAN INTERFACEĆCAUSING  
EQUIPMENT REGULATIONS.  
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE DE LA CLASSE [A] RESPECTE TOUTES LES EXIGENCES DU REGLEMENT SUR LE  
MATERIEL BROUILLEUR DU CANADA.  
C
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
392xPlus Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
392xPlus Singleport Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
392xPlus Multiport Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
392xPlus Modem Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Model 3920Plus Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Connecting Cables to the Model 3920Plus Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
392xPlus Modem Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Diagnostic Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Status Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Poll List Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30  
Test Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54  
Sub-Network Health and Status Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64  
Call Setup Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65  
Talk/Data Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Database Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
Appendices  
F. Default Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1  
ii  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures  
Figure  
Page  
1-1  
1-2  
1-3  
2-1  
2-2  
2-3  
2-4  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
3-8  
3-9  
Model 3921Plus Singleport Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Circuit Pack Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Model 3920Plus DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Optional SDCP and Model 3921Plus Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Local Digital Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60  
G-6 Sample Configuration — Carrier with Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
List of Tables  
Table  
Page  
1-1  
1-2  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
3-8  
3-9  
4-1  
4-2  
4-3  
4-4  
4-5  
4-6  
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
Technical Specifications for 392xPlus Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Multiport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Multiport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
4-10 Dial Line Configuration Options — Singleport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
4-14 Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Singleport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66  
5-1  
5-2  
5-3  
6-1  
6-2  
6-3  
6-4  
6-5  
6-6  
6-7  
392xPlus AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Set Answer Security Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Set Originate Security Group Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Security Database Table Using VF-Side Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
B-1 Modem Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
B-2 Leased-Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
B-3 Dial Backup Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
B-4 Modem — DTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
B-5 Modem — VF Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
iv  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Objectives and Reader Assumptions  
This manual describes how to install and operate the COMSPHEREr Model 3920Plus standalone  
and Model 3921Plus carrier-mounted modems. Users of this manual must have a basic  
understanding of modems and their operation.  
How to Use This Manual  
Chapter 1 provides technical specifications, information about the four 392xPlus models, the  
modem features, and the government requirements for using these modems.  
Chapter 2 provides instructions for installing the 392xPlus modems.  
Chapter 3 provides the information required to operate the Model 3920Plus using the diagnostic  
control panel and the Model 3921Plus using the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier’s shared  
diagnostic control panel (SDCP).  
Chapter 4 provides the information required to set configuration options in the 392xPlus modems  
using the modem’s diagnostic control panel.  
Chapter 5 provides instructions for using AT commands and S-Registers.  
Chapter 6 provides instructions for using the Dial Access Security feature.  
Appendix A provides a menu tree for the 392xPlus modems.  
Appendix B provides instructions for performing diagnostic tests when data communication  
problems occur.  
Appendix C provides EIA-232-D and VF TELCO pin assignments.  
Appendix D provides V.25bis dialing information.  
Appendix E provides an ASCII translation chart.  
Appendix F provides a list of all default configuration options available for the factory preset  
configurations.  
Appendix G provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 392xPlus modems.  
Appendix H provides an equipment list for the 392xPlus modems.  
The Glossary provides a description of terms used throughout this manual.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Related Documents  
3000-A2-GA31  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual  
3610-A2-GZ45  
3920-A2-GK41  
3920-A2-GK40  
3600 Hubbing Device, Feature Number 3600-F3-300, Installation  
Instructions  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems, Models 3920Plus and 3921Plus,  
Installation Instructions  
COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems, Model 3921Plus, Ferrite Choke  
Installation Instructions  
Call your sales representative to order additional product documentation.  
viii  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
1
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Model 3920Plus Standalone Singleport Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Model 3921Plus Carrier-Mounted Singleport Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Model 3921Plus Carrier-Mounted Multiport Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
392xPlus Operational Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Multipoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
MSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Digital Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
V.34 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Multiport Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Overview  
The COMSPHEREr 392xPlus modems are full-feature, high-speed leased modems, providing  
reliable asynchronous and synchronous operation over leased or dial lines networks with data rates  
as high as 33,600 bps.  
Through downloading capability, any 392xPlus modem is upgradable to the latest firmware,  
requiring no new hardware investment or on-site personnel, with little or no downtime (refer to  
Chapter 3, DCP Operations, for more information regarding downloading options). The 392xPlus  
modems support a wide range of modulation schemes and offer control using either AT commands,  
the diagnostic control panel (DCP) or the optional COMSPHERE 6700 and 6800 Series Network  
Management Systems (NMS). The NMS performs extensive monitoring, testing, reporting, and  
restoral functions to assist in managing your network.  
The 392xPlus modems are compatible with a number of dialing methods and protocols, such as  
asynchronous AT commands, CCITT V.25bis dialing, and the DCP. The DCP allows you to use the  
392xPlus modem in a variety of applications and environments while also providing control over  
modem configuration, dialing, and diagnostics. The 392xPlus modems come with preset factory  
configurations that are the most often used modem settings.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Models  
The COMSPHERE 392xPlus modem is available in the following four models:  
Model 3920Plus standalone singleport modem (model no. 3920-A1-41x).  
Model 3920Plus standalone multiport modem (model no. 3920-A1-40x).  
Model 3921Plus carrier-mounted singleport modem (model no. 3921-B1-01x).  
Model 3921Plus carrier-mounted multiport modem (model no. 3921-B1-00x).  
The last digit in the model number (x) varies, depending on whether the modem is equipped with  
fixed Data Access Arrangement (DAA) or configurable DAA.  
NOTE  
Throughout this manual, reference to the 392xPlus modem  
represents all four models.  
Model 3920Plus Standalone Singleport Modem  
The Model 3920Plus singleport is a standalone modem (Figure 1-1) capable of either  
4-wire/2-wire leased-line or dial operation. This modem is controlled using either AT commands  
or the DCP. The DCP consists of a liquid crystal display (LCD), three function keys, four  
directional keys, and a row of 13 LED status indicators. For a better understanding of DCP  
operation, refer to Chapter 3, DCP Operation  
.
Model 3920Plus Standalone Multiport Modem  
The Model 3920Plus multiport is a standalone modem (Figure 1-1), with an integral time division  
multiplexer (TDM) and a modem sharing device (MSD) as standard equipment. The TDM  
provides time division multiplexing of up to four independent ports over point-to-point lines using  
the V.34 family or V.32 family modulation. The MSD allows multiple physical ports on a tributary  
modem to share a single communication channel using the V.34 family, V.32 family, or TMp  
modulation. The TDM/MSD multiplexer (commonly referred to as “mux” can be enabled or  
disabled to allow a greater degree of application flexibility.  
The 3920Plus multiport modem also operates over a 4-wire/2-wire leased or dial network and is  
controlled using the same DCP employed on the Model 3920Plus singleport standalone modem.  
1-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
Model 3920Plus Singleport and  
Multiport Housing  
DIAGNOSTIC  
CONTROL  
PANEL  
LCD AND  
KEYPAD  
SPEAKER  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
STATUS  
INDICATORS  
POWER  
CORD  
Singleport Modem  
Back Panel  
Multiport Modem  
Back Panel  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DTE 4  
POWER  
ON/OFF  
DTE 3  
POWER IN  
DTE 2  
POWER IN  
NMS  
DTE 1  
NMS  
DTE 1  
DIAL  
LEASED  
DIAL  
LEASED  
496-14684-01  
Figure 1-1. Model 3920Plus Standalone Singleport and Multiport Modems  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Model 3921Plus Carrier-Mounted Singleport Modem  
The Model 3921Plus is a carrier-mounted singleport modem (Figure 1-2) capable of either  
4-wire/2-wire leased-line or dial operation. The modem installs into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series  
Carrier, occupying a single slot. The modem’s faceplate has sixteen (16) LED status indicators for  
displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for the carrier’s optional speaker  
.
The modem’s back panel has two edge card connectors that mount into a connector plate. This  
connector plate has two DB-25-S connectors, one providing an EIA-232-D DTE interface and one  
for future functionality.  
Model 3921Plus Carrier-Mounted Multiport Modem  
The Model 3921Plus is a carrier-mounted multiport modem (Figure 1-3) equipped with an integral  
time division multiplexer (TDM) with a modem sharing device (MSD). The modem installs into  
the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, occupying two slots. The modem’s faceplate covers two  
slots in the carrier. It has twenty (20) LED status indicators for displaying modem activity and an  
audio speaker jack for the carrier’s optional speaker  
.
The modem’s back panel has four edge card connectors that mount into two connector plates. Each  
connector plate has two DB-25-S connectors providing four EIA-232-DTE interfaces.  
Both the singleport and multiport Model 3921Plus modems derive ac power from the  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier’s backplane, which is a common bus to all devices installed in  
the carrier. The user interface to any Model 3921Plus modem is through the shared diagnostic  
control panel (SDCP), an optional feature which operates in a manner similar to the DCP on the  
Model 3920Plus modems. For a better understanding of DCP operation, refer to Chapter 3, DCP  
Operation.  
1-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction  
FACEPLATE  
Status  
Pwr  
Alrm  
Test  
Dial  
RI  
142  
125  
BACK  
CONNECTOR  
PLATE  
Busy  
Serv  
SQ  
EIA232/V.24  
CONNECTOR  
EIA232/V.24  
EDGE CARD  
CONNECTOR  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
DTR  
LSD  
GROUNDING  
TAB  
FUTURE  
USE  
Front Panel  
Spkr  
FUTURE  
USE  
3921Plus  
496-14178a-04  
Figure 1-2. Model 3921Plus Singleport Modem  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
FACEPLATE  
Status  
Pwr  
Alrm  
EDGE CARD  
CONNECTORS  
142  
125  
Test  
Dial  
RI  
Busy  
Serv  
BACK  
CONNECTOR  
PLATES  
SQ  
3
1
Port  
2
4
PORT  
1
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
DTR  
LSD  
PORT  
3
Front Panel  
Spkr  
PORT  
2
PORT  
4
3921Plus  
49614423a-03  
Figure 1-3. Model 3921Plus Multiport Modem  
1-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
392xPlus Operational Modes  
The 392xPlus operational modes determine how your modem performs in various applications.  
These operational modes are determined by your modem model and the selected configuration  
options.  
There are two operational modes:  
Singleport mode. Operates on both the singleport and multiport modems. Singleport mode is  
the only operational mode for the singleport modem. For the multiport modem, it is in effect  
when the MUX mode configuration option is set to Disable. The Singleport mode only  
supports one port (DTE 1).  
Multiport operational mode. Operates only on the multiport modems. Multiport mode is in  
effect when the MUX mode configuration option is set to TDM/MSD or DTE_Bridge. It  
supports from one to four ports (DTE 1–4), depending on how the modem is further  
configured.  
Using Table 1-1, identify your modem’s operational mode based on the 392xPlus modem model  
and its selected MUX mode configuration option.  
Table 1-1  
392xPlus Operational Modes  
MUX Mode  
Configuration Option  
392xPlus Modem  
Operational Mode  
Singleport  
Multiport  
n/a  
Singleport  
MUX Mode: Disabled  
MUX Mode set to:  
TDM/MSD  
Singleport  
Multiport  
Multiport  
DTE_Bridge  
Use the identified operational mode (Singleport or Multiport) to choose the configuration options  
that are appropriate for your application. Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration for more  
information on configuration options.  
392xPlus Features  
The 392xPlus modems share a wide variety of features.  
Additional VF parameters under the V.32 family modulations in 4-wire mode.  
International Support to correctly detect the call progress signals (dial tone, busy, fast busy  
ringback) for a variety of countries.  
,
Channel adaptive Trellis-Coded Modulation – Paradyne’s advanced Trellis-Coded  
transparent forward error correction for Trellis multipoint and high-speed point-to-point  
applications.  
Convenient migration to new or optional features through software downloading.  
Extended data circuits with diagnostic capabilities.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Network management system (NMS) support through the COMSPHERE 6800 or  
6700 Series NMS using Advanced Diagnostic protocol (ADp).  
Automatic and manual backup with standby capabilities for 4-wire/2-wire leased-line  
applications. (The backup facility may be either a 2-wire dial line or a 2-wire leased line.)  
392xPlus Singleport Features  
Features specific to 392xPlus singleport modems are:  
Four-wire/two-wire leased-line modulations.  
Dial-line modulations.  
Refer to Table 1-2 in the Technical Specifications section of this chapter for leased- and dial-line  
modulations information.  
392xPlus Multiport Features  
Features specific to 392xPlus multiport modems are:  
Four-port time division multiplexer (TDM) operation.  
Modem Sharing Device (MSD).  
Digital Bridging.  
Mux enabled, four-wire/two-wire leased-line modulations: V.34 family (33,600, 28,800,  
24,000, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, and 2400 bps), V.32 terbo  
(19,200 and 16,800 bps), V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, and 4800 bps), V.32 (9600  
and 4800 bps), and Trellis Multipoint (TMp) (19,200, 14,400, 9600, 7200, 4800, and  
2400 bps).  
Mux enabled, dial-line modulations: V.34 family (33,600, 28,800, 24,000, 19,200, 16,800,  
14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, and 2400 bps), V.32 terbo (19,200 and 16,800 bps),  
V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, and 4800 bps), V.32 (9600 and 4800 bps).  
Applications  
Multipoint  
Multipoint is available in all 392xPlus modems. It utilizes leased-line circuits for time sharing the  
same front-end processor (FEP) port with multiple remote locations. The FEP (via the control  
modem) regulates traffic on the line by continuously polling the tributary DTE(s) in a predefined  
sequence. Only one tributary can communicate with the control modem at a given time. Modems  
configured for Trellis Multipoint (TMp) cannot be used in a point-to-point, constant carrier  
application. (Refer to the Multiport Mode — Leased Line or the Singleport Mode — Leased Line  
section in Chapter 4 for configuration options.)  
1-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Dual-Leased Backup  
Dual-Leased Backup is available in all 392xPlus modems. It enables a 2-wire leased line to be  
used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2-wire dial line. Plug the leased line into the jack  
labeled DIAL on the back panel of the modem (see Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2), and enable the  
Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option. (Refer to the Multiport Mode — Leased Line or the  
Singleport Mode — Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options.) Except for  
dialing, ring indication, and call progression functions, you control the backup function as if it  
were a normal dial backup.  
MSD  
The Modem Sharing Device (MSD) is only available in 392xPlus multiport modems. It allows  
from 2 to 4 physical ports to share a communication channel. When the MUX mode option is set to  
TDM/MSD on a tributary, and at least one port has the MSD mode setting enabled, then MSD is  
enabled. For more information, refer to the Multiport Mode section of Chapter 4 for configuration  
options or the Point-to-Point MSD and Multipoint MSD sample configurations in Appendix G.  
When MSD mode is enabled:  
The MSD Control configuration option is added at the end of the Mux Sub-Group.  
The EIA Port Sub-group includes the RTS Antistream configuration option.  
Digital Bridge  
The Digital (DTE) Bridge application is only available in 392xPlus multiport modems. It provides  
the ability for dial backup of a multipoint configuration by bridging the signal on the digital side of  
the FEP-end modems. In this configuration, only two ports (both on the FEP side) are used on the  
control and backup modems. Data received on Port 1 is transmitted across the communication link,  
as well as looped back out of Port 2. Data received across the communication link and on Port 2 is  
sent out of Port 1. For more information, refer to the Multiport Mode section of Chapter 4 or the  
Digital Bridging sample configuration in Appendix G for sample configurations.  
When the Digital Bridge is enabled, a new menu is present with the following conditions:  
TDM capability is disabled when DTE Bridge mode is enabled, therefore the rate of Port 1  
is forced to run at the line rate.  
Configuration options are provided for Port 1 only; Port 2 cannot be configured.  
Ports 3 and 4 are not available.  
Port-related tests, such as digital loopbacks and Pattern tests, are available for Port 1.  
DTE Status, Health and Status, and LED control are available for both Ports 1 and 2.  
V.34 Modulation  
The .34 modulation capability is available in all 392xPlus modems. In Singleport mode the V.34  
V
modulation is compatible with other vendors’ modems that support the CCITT V.34 modulation.  
The two top rates of 31,200 and 33,600 bps (Paradyne), however, only function with other  
392xPlus modems. In Multiport mode, the V.34 modulation will not operate at line rates of 31,200,  
26,400, and 21,600 bps, and is only compatible with other 392xPlus modems.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
The CCITT standard for V.34 modulation includes dial- or leased-line operation. For proper  
leased-line operation, one modem must be designated as the answer modem while the other  
modem must be designated as the originate modem.  
The V.34 standard also includes asymmetric rates, automatic adjustment of the transmit power  
level, and automatic adjustment of the symbol (baud) rate for optimal data throughput. These  
automatic adjustments are made during the training, or modem synchronization, phase via special  
line-probing techniques that establish the top-most viable rate of operation. Due to these  
techniques, true fixed-rate operation of the modems using V.34 modulation is not possible, since  
the line condition may not be capable of supporting the selected rate. Thus, using CT111 and  
CT112 for rate control of extended data circuits cannot be used.  
When operating in V.34 modulation, you can use the top line of the Quick Configuration screen to  
view the current modem transmit rate, the symbol or baud rate, and the transmit level. The  
392xPlus modems offer separate options for leased and dial lines to override the asymmetric rate  
function, since this can cause problems for certain DTE equipment, Also, each symbol rate  
supports a subset of data rates, which make up the whole of the V.34 standard.  
Symbol Rate  
Supported Data Rates  
3429  
3200  
3000  
2800  
2743  
2400  
4800 – 33.6K  
4800 – 31.2K  
4800 – 28.8K  
4800 – 31.2K  
4800 – 31.2K  
2400 – 24.0K  
When using the V.34 modulation on leased lines with a 2-wire leased backup facility, the backup  
line check feature, which tests the backup leased lines for connectivity, cannot be used.  
NOTE  
When a 2400 V.34 modulation connection occurs on one end of a  
modem pair with configuration options set for Asymmetric rates, the  
other modem is 24K due to the 2400 symbol rate it uses.  
Multiport Backup  
When the 392xPlus multiport modem has the MUX mode configuration option set to either  
TDM/MSD or Digital Bridge, it is in Multiport mode, and either dial lines or a 2-wire leased line  
can be used to back up the primary 4-wire leased line. Backup can be performed automatically  
upon loss of the primary leased line, and automatic dial standby also can be used to automatically  
return the modems to the primary leased line when restored.  
When you use backup functions while in Multiport mode, the modems automode feature is forced  
to Disable. This ensures that the mux is not accidentally disabled by answering a call, which is  
using modulation where Multiport mode is not supported. It is important that both modems  
participating in the backup are in Multiport mode with the same dial-line modulation.  
1-10  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Government Requirements and Equipment Return  
Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to modem connection to the public  
switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual. Specific  
instructions are listed in the following sections.  
United States  
NOTICE TO USERS OF THE PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK  
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the equipment is a label that  
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence  
number (REN) for this equipment. The label is located on the bottom of the  
Model 3920Plus modem and on the modem’s circuit card assembly on the  
Model 3921Plus. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone  
company.  
2. Page A of this manual contains the Universal Service Order Codes (USOC) associated with  
the services on which the equipment is to be connected.  
3. An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This  
equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a  
compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. See Installation Instructions for  
details.  
4. The ringer equivalence (REN) is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be  
connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the  
devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of  
the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be  
connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to  
determine the maximum RENs for the calling area.  
5. If the 392xPlus modem cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will  
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if  
advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as  
possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you  
believe it is necessary  
.
6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or  
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone  
company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications  
in order to maintain uninterrupted service.  
7. The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment.  
8. This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company.  
Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility  
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.)  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
9. If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact your sales or service  
representative (as appropriate) for repair or warranty information. If the product needs to  
be returned to the company service center for repair, contact them directly for return  
instructions using one of the following methods:  
Via the Internet: Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http://www.paradyne.com  
Via Telephone: Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or  
to speak with a company representative.  
— Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-870-2221  
— International, call 727-530-2340  
If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may  
request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.  
Canada  
NOTICE TO THE USERS OF THE CANADIAN PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK  
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This  
certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,  
operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will  
operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the  
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an  
acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a  
single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly  
(telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility  
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or  
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power  
utility, telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together.  
This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
CAUTION  
Users should not attempt to make such connections  
themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric  
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
The Load Number is labeled on the equipment. The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal  
device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used  
by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of  
devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not  
exceed 100.  
If your equipment is in need of repair, refer to the procedure in the Government Requirements  
and Equipment Return section.  
1-12  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Technical Specifications  
Table 1-2 shows the technical specifications for the 392xPlus modems.  
Table 1-2  
(1 of 2)  
Technical Specifications for 392xPlus Modems  
Specifications  
Description  
APPROVALS  
Model 3920Plus, 3921Plus, and  
Refer to the product labeling or contact your service representative.  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier  
COMPATIBILITY  
Leased-Line Modulations:  
Paradyne V.34 (33,600, 31,200 bps)  
CCITT V.34 (28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400,  
12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps)  
Paradyne V.32 terbo (19,200, 16,800 bps)  
CCITT V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps)  
CCITT V.32 (9600, 4800 bps)  
Paradyne Trellis Multipoint (19,200, 14,400, 9600, 7200, 4800,  
2400 bps)  
CCITT V.22bis (2400 bps)  
CCITT V.27bis (4800, 2400 bps)  
CCITT V.33 (14,400, 12,000 bps)  
CCITT V.29 (9600, 7200, 4800 bps)  
Paradyne Point-to-Point Diagnostic (2400 bps)  
Dial-Line Modulations:  
Paradyne V.34 (33,600, 31,200 bps)  
CCITT V.34 (28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400,  
12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps)  
Paradyne V.32 terbo (19,200, 16,800 bps)  
CCITT V.32bis (14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800 bps)  
CCITT V.32 (9600, 4800 bps)  
CCITT V.22bis (2400 bps)  
CCITT V.22 (1200 bps)  
CCITT V.23 (1200, 600 bps)  
CCITT V.21 (300 bps)  
Bell 212A (1200 bps)  
Bell 103J (300 bps)  
Paradyne Point-to-Point Diagnostic (2400 bps)  
ENVIRONMENT  
Operating Temperature  
Relative Humidity  
32°F (0°C) to 122°F (50°C)  
5% to 90% (noncondensing)  
Withstands normal shipping  
4°F (–20°C) to 158°F (70°C)  
Shock and Vibration  
Storage Temperature  
DTE INTERFACE  
25-pin D-subminiature connector  
EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24  
MODEL 3920Plus POWER SUPPLY  
AC POWER REQUIREMENTS  
100 to 250 Vac, 50 to 60 Hz  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 1-2  
(2 of 2)  
Technical Specifications for 392xPlus Modems  
Specifications  
POWER CONSUMPTION  
Model 3920Plus Singleport  
Model 3921Plus Singleport  
Description  
6 watts (typical, including power supply, speaker off)  
4 watts (typical, each card) (Speaker consumption is approximately  
1 watt at high volume.)  
Model 3920Plus Multiport  
Model 3921Plus Multiport  
8 watts (typical, including power supply, speaker off)  
6 watts (typical, each card) (Speaker consumption is approximately  
1 watt at high volume.)  
DIMENSIONS  
Weight  
2.5 pounds (1.14 kg) Model 3920Plus (without power supply)  
1.0 pounds (0.45 kg) Model 3921Plus  
Height  
Width  
2.1 inches (5.4 cm) Model 3920Plus  
7.1 inches (18.1 cm) Model 3921Plus  
Singleport  
7.6 inches (19.4 cm) Model 3920Plus  
0.9 inches (2.3 cm) Model 3921Plus  
Multiport  
7.6 inches (19.4 cm) Model 3920Plus  
1.8 inches (4.6 cm) Model 3921Plus  
Depth  
12.1 inches (30.8 cm) Model 3920Plus  
13.4 inches (34.0 cm) Model 3921Plus  
TRANSMIT LEVEL  
Leased Line (North America)  
0 through –15 dBm (in 1 dBm decrements)  
Factory default is 0 dBm  
Leased Line (All Other Countries)  
Dial Line (North America)  
–1 through –15 dBm (in 1 dBm decrements)  
Factory default is country dependent  
–10 through –32 dBm (in 1 dBm decrements)  
Factory default is Permissive (–9 dBm)  
Dial Line (All Other Countries)  
Level setting is not accessible to the user  
Factory default is country dependent  
TELEPHONE INTERFACE  
Leased-Line Connectivity  
JM8 (Model 3920Plus )  
50-pin mass termination (Model 3921Plus )  
Dial-Line Connectivity  
RJ11C Permissive  
RJ21X Permissive 50-pin connector (Model 3921Plus )  
DATA RATES  
Leased Line  
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800,  
14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps  
Dial Line  
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800,  
14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300 bps  
ERROR CONTROL  
DATA COMPRESSION  
CCITT V.42  
MNP 4–2  
CCITT V.42bis  
MNP Class 5  
1-14  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Modem Installation  
2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
392xPlus Modem Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Overview  
This chapter provides a list of equipment supplied with 392xPlus modems, as well as a list of  
customer supplied equipment. In addition, it describes how to install and remove the 392xPlus  
modems, and how to select a factory preset configuration using the DCP.  
392xPlus Modem Package  
After opening the modem’s package, check for damage and verify that the following items are  
present:  
For the standalone models  
Installation instructions  
Model 3920Plus modem  
Power supply with power cord  
One 6-position, 4-wire modular cord  
One 8-position, 8-wire modular cord  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
For the carrier-mounted models  
Installation instructions  
Model 3921Plus modem  
One (singleport) or two (multiport) connector plates with two DB-25-S edge card connectors  
on each plate  
If any hardware components are damaged, notify your service representative. Return equipment  
using the procedures described in the Government Requirements and Equipment Return section of  
Chapter 1.  
Customer-Supplied Equipment  
The following customer-supplied equipment is required to complete a data communications system  
using the Model 3920Plus modem:  
One (singleport) or four (multiport) DTEs with available EIA-232-D serial port(s).  
Standard EIA-232-D cables with one (singleport) or four (multiport) DB-25-P connectors at  
one end to attach to the modem.  
One or more of the following modular leased or dial network interfaces:  
— JM8 for leased-line configurations.  
— RJ11C for dial permissive configurations.  
— One 8-position, 8-wire modular cord (for leased backup purposes).  
The following customer-supplied equipment is required for the installation of a Model 3921Plus  
modem:  
A COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier.  
A 50-pin mass termination cable.  
One or more of the following modular or 50-pin leased or dial network interfaces:  
— RJ11C for single-line dial permissive configurations.  
— RJ21X for multiple-line dial permissive configurations.  
— 66 punchdown block.  
One Network Interface Module (NIM) for modems installed in Slots 1–8 and one NIM for  
modems installed in Slots 9–16 (required for dial-line configurations).  
For installation of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier into a cabinet, refer to the COMSPHERE  
3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual.  
2-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modem Installation  
Model 3920Plus Modem Installation  
Before installing your standalone modem, make sure your installation site is clean and  
well-ventilated. Allow space around the modem for installing cables and telephone cords, and  
make sure the modem is located within reach of the ac power outlet. The distance between your  
modem and DTE should be minimized if DTE data rates exceed 19,200 bps. Also, low capacitance  
cables may be necessary for speeds greater than 19,200 bps or distances greater than 50 feet.  
The back panel of the Model 3920Plus modem (Figure 2-1) has the following switches and  
connectors:  
An ON/OFF power switch.  
An 8-pin DIN type power receptacle (PWR) for the dc power supply.  
An 8-pin modular keyed jack (LEASED) for 4-wire/2-wire leased lines.  
An 8-pin modular keyed jack (DIAL) for backup lines (2-wire dial or 2-wire leased).  
A 4-pin modular jack (NMS) for the Network Management System connection.  
One (singleport) or four (multiport) 25-pin DB-25-S receptacles for the DTE interfaces.  
Connecting Cables to the Model 3920Plus Modem  
Instructions for connecting cables to the TELCO jack types using the appropriate cables apply to  
both singleport and multiport Model 3920Plus modems. Figure 2-1 illustrates the Model 3920Plus  
multiport modem. For pin assignments, refer to Appendix C.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
DB-25-S CONNECTORS  
DTE  
2
DTE 3  
DTE 1  
DTE 4  
LEASED DIAL  
NMS PWR ON OFF  
8-POSITION,  
8-CONDUCTOR  
PLUG FOR  
LEASED-LINE  
NETWORK  
DB-25-P  
CONNECTOR  
FOR DATA  
OPERATION  
TERMINAL  
EQUIPMENT  
OPERATION  
6-POSITION,  
SUB-MINIATURE,  
4-POSITION,  
4-CONDUCTOR  
PLUG FOR  
NETWORK  
MANAGEMENT  
SYSTEM  
4-CONDUCTOR  
PLUG FOR  
PERMISSIVE  
DIAL  
NETWORK  
OPERATION  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
OPERATION  
POWER  
CORD  
NOTE: THE DIAL JACK IS ALSO USED  
FOR 2-WIRE LEASED BACKUP.  
Figure 2-1. Model 3920Plus Multiport Back Panel and Power Supply  
DTE Connection  
Use the following steps to connect an EIA-232-D cable from the modem to a DTE:  
1. Make sure the modem is powered OFF  
.
2. Connect the DB-25-P (plug) connector on the cable to a DB-25-S (socket) connector  
(Figure 2-1) on the modem’s back panel, labeled DTE 1—DTE 4. Use a small screwdriver  
to secure the cable to the modem.  
3. For each port, connect the DB-25-P connector on the cable to the DB-25-S connector on  
the DTE. Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the DTE(s).  
2-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modem Installation  
Power Supply Connection  
Use the following steps to connect the modem to an ac power outlet:  
1. Make sure the modem is powered OFF  
.
2. Insert the power supply’s 8-pin DIN connector into the modem’s back panel dc power  
receptacle, labeled PWR (Figure 2-1).  
3. Connect the power cord to the power supply.  
4. Connect the power cord to a grounded ac power outlet.  
Leased-Line Connection  
Use the following steps to connect the leased-line network interface:  
1. Insert the 8-position, 8-conductor modular plug into the jack labeled LEASED  
(Figure 2-1).  
2. Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased-line network interface.  
3. If the Model 3920Plus has a backup line, follow the steps listed in the Dial Backup  
Connection section.  
Dial Connection  
The telephone company provides the line termination jacks for the permissive service you request.  
Advance coordination with the telephone company is suggested when connecting the modem to  
telephone dial lines (PSTN).  
In the Permissive mode, the modem’s transmit output level is fixed at –9 dBm. The telephone  
company assumes that the line loss is 3 dB and no compensation is provided for additional losses.  
A Permissive mode telephone line is usually terminated with a USOC RJ11C jack.  
Leased Backup Connection  
Use the following steps to connect the modem to the 2-wire leased backup network interface:  
1. Insert the 8-position, 8-conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL (Figure 2-1).  
2. Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased-line network interface.  
Dial Backup Connection  
Use the following steps to connect the modem to the dial network interface:  
1. Insert the 6-position, 4-conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL (Figure 2-1).  
2. Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Network Management System Connection  
Use the following steps to connect the modem to the network management system (NMS)  
interface:  
1. Insert the sub-miniature, 4-conductor modular plug of the 3600 Hubbing Device into the  
jack labeled NMS (Figure 2-1). Refer to Document Number, 3610-A2-GZ45,  
3600 Hubbing Device, Feature Number 3600-F3-300, Installation Instructions, for a  
description of the 3600 Hubbing Device. Installation for the 3920Plus is the same as for the  
3610 DSU.  
2. Connect the 3600 Hubbing Device to the network management system (Figure G-4 in  
Appendix G).  
Removing and Replacing the Model 3920Plus Modem  
To remove and replace the Model 3920Plus modem, perform the following steps:  
1. Make sure the modem is offline. Press the modem’s back panel power switch to OFF  
.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the ac power outlet.  
3. Disconnect the dc power cable from the connector on the back of the modem.  
4. Disconnect the leased-line and dial modular cord(s) from the modems back panel.  
5. Disconnect the DTE interface cable(s) from the modems back panel.  
If the modem is to be removed for service, return it to the company using the procedures  
described in Government Requirements and Equipment Return in Chapter 1.  
6. Install the replacement modem as described in the Model 3920Plus Modem Installation  
section of this chapter, and configure it the same way as the modem being replaced.  
Model 3921Plus Modem Installation  
CAUTION  
When removing the Model 3921Plus from the carrier, always  
use a ground strap when handling the modem. Always store  
the Model 3921Plus in an antistatic bag when it is removed  
from the carrier.  
The Model 3921Plus modems are designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier,  
which supplies both the operating power and the leased and/or dial network connections. For  
additional information about the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, refer to the COMSPHERE  
3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual.  
The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has 17 slots that hold up to 8 Model 3921Plus multiport  
modems or 16 Model 3921Plus singleport modems, and one shared diagnostic unit (SDU). The  
2-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modem Installation  
SDU is required when the modems in the carrier are controlled by an NMS, or when multiple  
carriers in a cabinet configuration are to be controlled by a single shared diagnostic control panel  
(SDCP). The SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier is the user interface to the  
Model 3921Plus modem. A single SDCP can control up to eight carriers.  
The installation of a Model 3921Plus modem varies slightly if an SDCP is installed on the front of  
the carrier. To install a Model 3921Plus modem into the carrier without an SDCP, perform the  
following steps:  
1. At the back of the carrier, install the connector plates (Figure 2-2). Make sure the plate(s)  
use the same slot positions as that intended for the modem.  
Loosely fasten the plate(s). This allows for slight adjustments later when installing the  
modem.  
2. At the front of the carrier, hold the modem vertically, with the latch on its faceplate in the  
open position, and insert it into the top and bottom card guides of one of the slots  
numbered 1–15 (Figure 2-3).  
Slide the modem into the slot, aligning the modem with the connector plates, until the  
backplane connector and DTE connector seat firmly into the back of the carrier. The  
faceplate latch automatically closes as you push the modem into the carrier. To lock the  
modem into the carrier, press the faceplate latch until a “click” is heard.  
3. If the carrier is ON, the Power LED on the faceplate of the Model 3921Plus lights. After  
several seconds the modem completes its power-up self-test, in which all faceplate LEDs  
light.  
Return to the back of the carrier and tighten the connector plate(s).  
SINGLEPORT  
BACK  
MULTIPORT  
BACK  
CONNECTOR PLATE  
CONNECTOR PLATES  
EIA232/V.24  
CONNECTOR  
FUTURE USE  
495-14696  
Figure 2-2. Modem’s Back Connector Plates  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
3000 SERIES  
CARRIER  
SDU  
MODEL 3921Plus  
SINGLEPORT  
MODEM  
LATCH  
CIRCUIT CARD  
GUIDES  
3000 SERIES  
CARRIER  
SDU  
MODEL 3921Plus  
MULTIPORT  
MODEM  
LATCH  
CIRCUIT CARD  
GUIDES  
495-14708  
Figure 2-3. Installing the Model 3921Plus Modem  
2-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modem Installation  
If the Model 3921Plus modem is to communicate with an installed SDCP, install the modem as  
described above and perform the following steps:  
1. Press the  
key on the SDCP. The Carr:Slot screen appears with the cursor on the  
Select  
slot selection position (01 on the first LCD line in following screen example).  
Carr:Slot:  
1:01A  
1:01A  
F3  
F1  
F2  
2. Press the F1 ( " ) or F2 ( # ) key until the slot number you want appears.  
3. If you have more than one carrier, press the  
key to move the cursor to the carrier  
selection position (1: on the first LCD line in the following screen example).  
Carr:Slot:  
1:01A  
1:01A  
F3  
F1  
F2  
4. Press the F1 (  
"
) or F2 (  
#
) key until the carrier number you want appears.  
The carrier number selection has a range of 1 to 8 since a single SDCP can control a  
configuration of up to eight carriers. (This is only possible if the SDU is installed.)  
5. Press the  
modem.  
key to place the SDCP in direct communication with the selected  
Select  
The LCD displays the Top-Level menu for the selected modem. In addition, the Front  
Panel LED on the modem’s faceplate and the OK LED on the SDCP light.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
6. Once you have determined that the modem is installed properly and completed its  
power-up self-test, rotate the circuit pack lock until it covers the faceplate latch  
(Figure 2-4) and tighten the retention screw on the circuit pack lock. This prevents the  
modem from accidently being removed once it is installed in a carrier.  
7. Configure the modem as described in the Selecting Factory Configuration Options section  
earlier in this chapter.  
CIRCUIT  
PACK  
LOCK  
LATCH  
OPEN  
CLOSED  
RELEASE TAB  
495-14425-02  
Figure 2-4. Circuit Pack Lock  
2-10  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modem Installation  
Removing and Replacing the Model 3921Plus Modem  
CAUTION  
When removing the Model 3921Plus modem from the carrier,  
always use a ground strap when handling the modem. Always  
store the Model 3921Plus modems in an antistatic bag when it  
is removed from the carrier.  
It is not necessary to power down the carrier to remove and replace the Model 3921Plus modem.  
Perform the following steps:  
1. Rotate the circuit pack lock until the release tab is exposed (Figure 2-4).  
2. Press down on the release tab and pull the modem away from the carrier’s backplane.  
392xPlus Modem Power-Up  
Once your modem is properly connected to the power supply, leased and/or dial lines, and the  
DTE, press the modem’s back panel power switch to the ON position. The modem begins a  
power-up self-test, in which all DCP LEDs light. This test takes several seconds to perform, and  
verifies the operation of most hardware components within the modem. If successful, the LCD  
displays Power on Selftst Passed and continues to the Top-Level menu screen.  
Power On Selftst  
Passed  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If a failure occurs during the self-test, the LCD displays Power On Selftst Failed for several  
seconds. The LCD then displays the Top-Level menu screen with the message Power on Fail  
appearing on the top line of the LCD. Although a failure has occurred, the modem will attempt to  
operate. This allows you to activate a more thorough self-test using the Test branch. Refer to the  
Test section in Chapter 3.  
Selecting Factory Configuration Options for 392xPlus  
After the modem passes the power-up self-test, configure it for operation using one of the six  
factory preset configurations.  
The 392xPlus modems have six factory preset templates that contain the most commonly used  
configuration options (straps) for Synchronous Leased (Answer or Originate), Asynchronous  
Leased (Answer or Originate), Trellis Multipoint (Control or Tributary), Asynchronous Dial,  
Synchronous Dial, and UNIX Dial hardware network configurations. Your modem ships from the  
factory with the Synchronous Leased (Answer) default configuration options stored in memory. If  
Synchronous Leased (Originate), Asynchronous Leased (Answer or Originate), Trellis Multipoint  
(TMp) (Control or Tributary), Async Dial, Sync Dial, or UNIX Dial is more appropriate for your  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
configuration, then you must change the factory setting using either the modems DCP (as  
described in the following sections) or the AT command set.  
The purpose of having preset configurations is so that you can have a “head start” in getting your  
modem operating and reducing the amount of time required to configure your modem. For a better  
understanding of DCP operation and factory preset configuration options, refer to Chapter 4,  
DCP Configuration  
.
Using the Diagnostic Control Panel (DCP)  
The DCP’s liquid crystal display (LCD) consists of two 16-character lines which display modem  
status, control functions, and configuration options as well as indicating your location in the  
Top-Level menu tree (Appendix A).  
To change a factory template from the Sync Leased preset configuration using the DCP, perform  
the following steps:  
1. Press the function key below Configure to select the Configure branch.  
The LCD now displays Ld EditArea frm.  
2. Press the  
key until Factory comes into view, then press the F1 key to display the  
factory preset configurations.  
Factory preset configurations are Sync Leased Async Leased, TMp (Trellis Multipoint),  
,
Async Dial, Sync Dial, and UNIX Dial. If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected, you  
must choose either Answer or Originate mode. If TMp is selected, you must choose either  
Control or Trib (Tributary) mode.  
3. Press the  
key until the appropriate factory preset appears on the LCD, and press the  
corresponding function key to select your choice. (For certain factory presets you will also  
need to choose the appropriate mode.)  
4. Choose Function appears and displays the Edit and Save functions.  
5. Press the F3 key (Save) to save the new factory preset configuration to one of three  
configuration areas, Active (Saved), Customer 1, or Customer 2.  
(These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations. Active (Saved)  
contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options. In the event of  
power loss, the modem retrieves these configuration options. Customer 1 and Customer 2  
are user-defined configuration areas.)  
The LCD now displays Sav EditArea to.  
6. Press the  
key until the appropriate configuration area appears on the LCD, then press  
the corresponding function key to select your choice. (Saving configuration options to the  
Active (Saved) configuration area automatically saves them to the Active (Operating)  
configuration area.) The LCD displays Command Complete.  
7. The modem is now configured with the selected factory template. Press the  
return to the Top-Level menu.  
key to  
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for more information regarding default factory  
configuration options.  
2-12  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Diagnostic Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Device Health and Status (DeviceHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
EIA LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39  
Service Line/Disconnect Service Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41  
Clone Remote in Point-to-Point Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43  
Automatic Firmware Download Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Rem Digital Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58  
Directory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71  
Talk/Data Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73  
Auto-Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74  
Manual Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75  
Overview  
This chapter describes how to use the diagnostic control panel (DCP) of the 392xPlus modem. It  
also describes how to select and use each branch of the Top-Level menu tree.  
Diagnostic Control Panels  
There are two types of diagnostic control panels (DCP), the DCP on the standalone  
Model 3920Plus modems and the shared diagnostic control panel (SDCP), an optional feature,  
used with the Model 3921Plus installed into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. Both DCPs have  
a two-line, 32-character liquid crystal display (LCD) and keypad through which Top-Level menu  
branches are accessed to perform the following:  
Check modem status  
Set up configuration options  
Initiate diagnostic tests  
Initiate and disconnect dial operations  
Access remote modems through the local modems DCP  
The LCD displays the result of any command initiated using the DCP.  
3-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Model 3920Plus Diagnostic Control Panel  
The diagnostic control panel (DCP) of the Model 3920Plus modem (Figure 3-1) contains status  
indicators, pushbutton-type keys, an LCD, and speaker grill.  
F3  
F1  
F2  
DIAG DTR  
108  
PWR  
ALRM  
RTS CTS TXD LSD RXD SQ TEST  
RATE DIAL  
COMSPHERE 3920Plus  
103  
109  
104  
142  
106  
105  
496-14412-02  
Figure 3-1. Model 3920Plus DCP  
Model 3921Plus Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel (SDCP)  
The shared diagnostic control panel (SDCP), Figure 3-2, is used to manage carrier-mounted  
Model 3921Plus modems.  
The faceplate of the Model 3921Plus contains LED status indicators that monitor the operation of  
the modem. After the SDCP is connected to the modem, the Front Panel indicator of the selected  
modem lights to show that the modem is connected.  
Status Indicators  
The 392xPlus modem status indicators continuously provide information on the modems  
operating condition. All of the status indicators on the Model 3920Plus appear on the DCP  
(Figure 3-1), whereas the status indicators for the carrier-mounted Model 3921Plus are located on  
the Model 3921Plus modem’s faceplate and the SDCP faceplate (Figure 3-2).  
The standalone Model 3920Plus modem’s DCP has 13 light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and the  
carrier-mounted Model 3921Plus has 20 LEDs. These LEDs are listed and described in Table 3-1.  
LEDs specific to one model type have the appropriate model number shown in the table.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
MULTIPORT  
SINGLEPORT  
Status  
Status  
Status  
OK  
Pwr  
Pwr  
Alrm  
Test  
Dial  
RI  
Alrm  
In  
Alrm  
Test  
Dial  
RI  
Diag  
Diag  
142  
125  
142  
125  
Out  
Busy  
Busy  
Serv  
SQ  
Serv  
SQ  
3
1
Port  
2
4
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
DTR  
LSD  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
DTR  
LSD  
Front Panel  
Spkr  
Front Panel  
Spkr  
SDU  
3921Plus  
3921Plus  
CARRIER SLOTS 1–16  
SDU  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Select  
OK Alarm BckUp Test EC  
COMSPHERE 3000  
F1  
F2  
F3  
496-14676-01  
SELECT  
KEY  
LCD  
STATUS  
INDICATORS  
KEYPAD  
OK Alarm BckUp Test EC  
ERROR  
NETWORK  
DEVICE  
ALARM  
CORRECTION  
TEST  
MODE  
DIAL  
BACKUP  
Figure 3-2. Optional SDCP and Model 3921Plus Faceplates  
3-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Table 3-1  
(1 of 2)  
392xPlus DCP LEDs  
Label  
Color  
green  
red  
Indicates  
Pwr  
Power has been applied to the modem.  
Alrm  
Flashing – A major alarm has been detected in a remote 392xPlus modem.  
ON – A major alarm has been detected in the local modem. (For Health and Status  
alarm conditions, refer to Table 3-6 in the Device Health and Status section of this  
chapter.)  
Diag  
(3920Plus  
only)  
green  
yellow  
The modem is receiving diagnostic communications (either a command or a status poll).  
Test/142  
Flashing – The modem is involved in a firmware upgrade. Normal operation is not  
possible.  
ON – The modem is involved in a test. Normal operation is not possible.  
OFF – The modem is not involved in a test or firmware upgrade.  
Dial  
yellow  
Flashing – The modem is attempting to establish a call over the dial network, or the  
modem is in Dial Standby mode.  
ON – The modem has established a dial connection.  
OFF – A dial connection does not exist.  
RI/125  
(3921Plus  
only)  
green  
yellow  
yellow  
A ringing signal is being received.  
Busy  
(3921Plus  
only)  
The modem is placed in a forced busy condition and is off-hook.  
Serv  
(3921Plus  
only)  
The modem’s dial line is connected to the carrier service line rather than the normally  
assigned dial network.  
SQ  
yellow  
yellow  
The receive telephone line signal is degraded or the modem’s data path has been  
blocked (SQ flashes).  
Rate  
(3920Plus  
only)  
ON – The modem is connected at a data rate lower than the data rate it is configured for.  
OFF – The modem is connected at its configured data rate.  
Front Panel  
(3921Plus  
only)  
yellow  
The modem is connected to the carrier’s SDCP.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 3-1  
(2 of 2)  
392xPlus DCP LEDs  
Label  
Color  
Indicates  
Port* 1,2,3,4  
(3921Plus  
multiport only)  
green  
ON – The selected port* is one of the mux ports (either 1, 2, 3, or 4).  
OFF – The port* is not selected.  
TXD/103*  
RXD/104*  
RTS/105*  
CTS/106*  
green  
green  
green  
green  
green  
The modem is receiving data from the selected port* to transmit. (ON equals space.)  
Data is being transferred to the selected port*. (ON equals space.)  
RTS signal is ON for the selected port*.  
CTS signal is ON for the selected port*.  
DSR/107*  
(3921Plus  
only)  
DSR signal is ON for the selected port*.  
DTR/108*  
LSD/109*  
green  
green  
The selected port* has turned ON DTR.  
The modem has detected a valid carrier signal and is capable of transferring data to the  
selected port*.  
* The selected port is one of the mux ports (1, 2, 3, or 4) or the Network Management System (NMS) diagnostic interface  
(3920Plus only). For example, when the selected port is Port 1 of the mux, the EIA indicators for TXD, RXD, RTS, CTS,  
DSR, DTR, and LSD will indicate the status of the EIA signals on the Port 1 interface of the multiplexer. For information  
about making this selection, refer to the Control Branch section of this chapter. To display the port which has been  
selected, refer to the Quick Configuration Display section of this chapter.  
The SDCP LEDs are listed and described in Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2  
SDCP LEDs  
Label  
Color  
green  
red  
Indicates  
OK  
Power is ON and the modem is capable of operating.  
Alarm  
The selected modem detects a problem with its operation. For example, the modem  
failed a self-test.  
BckUp  
Test  
EC  
yellow  
yellow  
green  
The selected modem is operating on the backup network (dial or dual leased).  
The selected modem is involved in a test. Normal operation is not possible.  
The selected modem is in V.42/MNP Error Control mode.  
3-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Diagnostic Control Panel Operation  
The 392xPlus modem’s diagnostic control panel (DCP) is the user interface to all functions used to  
configure and control the modem. In addition to the status LEDs, this interface includes the liquid  
crystal display (LCD) and keypad (Figure 3-3).  
LCD  
T
O
P LINE  
HIDDEN CHOICE  
INDICATOR  
MOVES  
UP ONE  
LEVEL FROM  
CURRENT  
DISPLAY  
RETURNS  
DISPLAY T  
O
Leased:28.8  
TOP-LEVEL  
MENU  
Status  
Configure  
F3  
F1  
F2  
LEFT  
SCROLL  
KEY  
RIGHT  
SCROLL  
KEY  
FUNCTION KEYS  
LCD BOTTOM LINE  
Figure 3-3. 392xPlus LCD and Keypad  
LCD Display  
The LCD consists of a top line and bottom line, with each displaying a maximum of 16 characters  
at a time. If more information is available on the LCD than what is currently displayed, a hidden  
choice indicator ( < , , or > ) appears in the upper right-hand corner of the LCD. Use the  
key to scroll in the indicated direction to display more selections onto the LCD.  
or  
Hidden Choice Indicators  
The Hidden Choice Indicators serve as an alert that other selections are available besides what is  
currently displayed on the LCD. These indicators appear as one of the following symbols:  
Right Scroll Indicator >  
The right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the right of what is  
currently displayed on the LCD.  
Left/Right Scroll Indicator  
The left/right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left and right  
of what is currently displayed on the LCD.  
Left Scroll Indicator <  
The left scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left of what is  
currently displayed on the LCD.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Other Indicators  
Other indicators may turn on depending on existing conditions, such as error detection,  
informational alerts, and warnings. These indicators appear on the top or bottom line of the LCD.  
Remote Mode Indicator  
If the local 392xPlus modem establishes a connection with the remote 392xPlus modem via the  
Remote branch, then  
appears in the upper right corner of the LCD top line on both modems.  
For more information on the Remote Mode indicator, refer to Remote Branch in this chapter.  
Out of Range Indicator  
If an invalid threshold (out of range) is selected in the VF Threshold update process, then  
appears in the lower right corner of the LCD bottom line. For more information on the Out of  
Range indicator, refer to VF Thresholds Update in this chapter.  
Keypad  
The DCP on the Model 3920Plus has seven keys while the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE  
3000 Series Carrier has eight keys. The additional key on the carrier is the  
connect the SDCP to a specific slot in the carrier.  
key, used to  
Select  
Key  
The  
key returns you to the Top-Level menu display from anywhere in the menu tree.  
while changing configuration options displays the message Save Straps?  
Pressing  
Yes No. If No is selected, changes made to configuration options are not saved and the  
Top-Level menu appears. If Yes is selected, then changes are saved to either Active  
(Saved), Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration areas.  
Key  
and  
The  
key moves you up one level in the menu tree.  
Keys  
Use the  
and  
keys to move the viewing window left or right and to scroll the  
remaining branches and selections into view. A maximum of three selections can be  
displayed at one time.  
These keys also allow you to move the cursor one character to the left or right on data  
entry displays; for example, to allow entry of one digit at a time.  
3-8  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
DCP Operation  
Keys  
Function keys F1, F2, and F3 select the LCD choice that appears above the function key  
F1  
F2  
F3  
.
Refer to the Summary section in Chapter 4 for the exception.  
If the displayed LCD choice spans more than one function key, then any of the function  
keys select that choice.  
NOTE  
In the screen examples, the F1 key is highlighted where multiple  
function keys select the choice.  
Key (Model 3921Plus only)  
Select  
The  
key appears on the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series  
Select  
Carrier. It is used to connect the SDCP to a modem in a specific slot in the carrier.  
Menu Structure  
The menu tree is a hierarchical structure used to display functions that configure and control local  
and remote 392xPlus modems. It is accessed via the DCP and is shown in Appendix A.  
Displays the current status of the modem along  
with the data rate and the error control mode.  
“Status”  
Status  
PList  
Test  
Call_Setup  
Security  
Configure  
Control  
SubHS  
Tlk/Data  
Remote  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
The menu tree contains the following branches:  
Status  
Used to monitor the current status of the VF line and DTE interface as well  
as view the identity of the modem.  
Configure  
PList  
Used to change and save the modem’s configuration options.  
(Poll List) Used to identify downstream modems in order to support  
multipoint health and status polling and multipoint link download  
broadcasting.  
Control  
Used to control the modem’s hardware and software functions.  
Used to begin and end various modem tests.  
Test  
SubHS  
(Sub-Network Health and Status) Used to display alarm conditions in  
downstream modems.  
Call Setup  
Talk/Data  
Used to dial, disconnect, and answer telephone calls as well as store up to 24  
telephone numbers in directory locations.  
Used to switch the modem between Talk mode (the modem is disconnected  
from the VF line) and Data mode (the modem is connected to the VF line)  
when dialing via either the DCP or a telephone.  
Security  
Remote  
Used to control the modem’s dial access security. (The Security branch only  
appears in Singleport mode.)  
Used to access and control a remote 392xPlus modem.  
All menu tree branches are discussed later in Chapter 3 except for Configure, which is discussed in  
Chapter 4, and Security, which is discussed in Chapter 6. Functions that appear on the LCD vary  
depending upon the type of model installed, its operating mode, and software configuration.  
3-10  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
Top-Level Menu Status and Operational Messages  
Access to all menu tree branches from the DCP begins at the Top-Level menu, the head of the  
menu hierarchy. The LCD’s top line identifies the modem status, as listed in Table 3-3, while the  
bottom line displays the main menu tree branches as well as operational and security messages, as  
listed in Table 3-4 and Table 3-5.  
Table 3-3  
(1 of 3)  
Top-Level Menu Status  
Status  
Message  
Indicates  
Normal Operation  
Leased:MR*  
The modem is operating on leased lines and receiving at the displayed data  
rate.  
Idle:MR*  
The modem is configured for dial network operation and is on-hook.  
OnLine:MR* EC**  
The modem is online, in Data mode, and operating at the displayed data  
rate. EC (error control) appears if error control is operational.  
Ring Indicate  
Test:MR*  
The local modem is receiving an incoming ring.  
The modem is in test mode operating at the displayed data rate.  
The modem is in a Make Busy condition.  
Alarm***  
Make Busy  
Power On Fail  
SelfHealth Fail  
Off Hook  
The modem has failed its Power-On Self-test.  
A failure has occurred in the modem’s hardware components.  
The modem is off-hook and waiting to dial a telephone number.  
Call Setup  
Dialing  
The originating modem is dialing a telephone number.  
Remote Ring  
Training****  
EC Negotiating  
The remote modem is ringing.  
The modem is training or retraining.  
The local and remote modems are negotiating the highest possible level of  
error control compatible between both modems. Once a level is selected,  
this LCD message disappears.  
Dial Backup or  
Leased Backup  
Stndby:MR*  
The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode.  
DialBckUp:MR*  
The modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode at the displayed data rate  
and is configured for Direct mode.  
Backup:MR*  
EC**  
The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode and is configured for error  
control and data compression on leased lines.  
Stndby:MR* EC**  
The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode and is configured for error  
control and data compression on leased lines.  
* MR. Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using. One of the following values appears: 300, 1200,  
2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12.0 (12,000), 14.4 (14,400), 16.8 (16,800), 19.2 (19,200) 21.6 (21,600), 24.0 (24,000),  
26.4 (26,400), 28.8 (28,800), 31.2 (31,200), or 33.6 (33,600) bps.  
** EC. Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V.42 or MNP error control. One of the following values  
appears after the modem rates listed above: MNP2, MNP3, MNP4, MNP5, V42, V42b, or NoEC. (NoEC indicates  
the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control. If an EC value does not appear, then the modem  
is in Direct mode.)  
*** The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages appear; the LCD alternates  
between the two message sets.  
**** The Training message may also appear in normal Trellis Multipoint (TMp) operation.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 3-3  
(2 of 3)  
Top-Level Menu Status  
Status  
Message  
Indicates  
Call Failure  
Busy Signal  
The answering modem is busy.  
Delayed  
As a result of failed call attempts, this number can not be called at this time.  
Please try again later.  
Number{  
Dial Line in Use  
The modem is operating on dial networks when another call attempt is  
issued.  
Forbidden  
As a result of failed call attempts, this number can not be called again.  
Number{  
Invalid Number  
The modem has dialed a telephone number not stored in a directory  
location.  
Line Occupied{{  
The line is being used by the associated telephone.  
No Answer Tone  
The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified by the  
No Answer Timeout configuration option. The network tones (if any) could  
not be interpreted by the modem.  
No Dial-DTR  
No Dial-Test  
The modem cannot dial because DTR is OFF.  
The modem cannot dial because it is running a Test.  
The modem has aborted the call because it cannot detect a dial tone.  
No Dial Tone  
No Quiet Answer  
The modem has detected No Quiet Answer (@) before the time-out setting  
of the No Answer Disconnect configuration option.  
Ringback  
Timeout  
The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified by the  
No Answer Timeout configuration option. A ringback signal was detected.  
Trunk Busy  
Wrong Call  
The modem is receiving a fast (trunk) busy.  
The call was answered, but not by a modem. No answer tone.  
{ The Delayed Number and Forbidden Number messages appear only in countries where the number of repeat call  
attempts are restricted. The regulations vary in each country. If the number is delayed, the value of the delay  
(in minutes) can be displayed by entering Directory Status (see Call Setup Branch).  
{{ The Line Occupied message appears only in countries where the Offhook Detector is enabled. The purpose of the  
Offhook Detector is to detect whether the telephone associated with the modem is off-hook. It is enabled on a per  
country basis, and this setting can not be changed by a command. The Offhook Detector is enabled in Austria,  
Germany, and Switzerland.  
3-12  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
Table 3-3  
(3 of 3)  
Top-Level Menu Status  
Status  
Message  
ATH Disconnect  
Bad Lines Disc  
Indicates  
Call Disconnect  
The modem has disconnected due to an ATH command.  
The modem has disconnected because the lines do not support the  
modulation and/or data rate selected.  
No Carrier Disc  
The modem disconnects due to the loss of carrier signal from the remote  
modem.  
DTR Disconnect  
EC Disconnect  
The modem has disconnected due to the loss of DTR from the DTE.  
The modem has disconnected due to failure to negotiate Error Control  
mode.  
Inv Rate Disc  
When using V.32bis modulation, the remote modem does not support the  
data rate used by the local modem.  
LnCurrnt Disc  
LongSpace Disc  
NoData Disc  
The modem has disconnected due to the loss of line current.  
The modem has disconnected due to the detection of a long space.  
The modem has disconnected due to a lack of transmitted and received  
data.  
Disconnecting  
The modem has begun the disconnect sequence.  
RmtCmnded Disc  
The modem has disconnected due to a V.32 Cleardown received from the  
remote modem.  
Talk Mode  
The modem is in Talk mode.  
Firmware  
Download Result  
DownldOnly  
Mode  
A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware has failed.  
The modem is currently in a Download Only mode in which only another  
download attempt is possible.  
Frmware  
Upgrade  
A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware was  
successful.  
RemClone Failed  
A remote cloning of firmware has failed. This message appears on the local  
modem’s LCD.  
Remote Clone  
OK  
A remote cloning of firmware was successful. This message appears on the  
local modem’s LCD.  
Bcast Clone  
Done  
A broadcast cloning of firmware is complete. Look under the Control branch  
for multipoint cloning results. This message appears on the local modem’s  
LCD.  
AT Command  
Reset  
Reset by AT  
command  
The modem has performed a reset in response to an ATZ command.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Messages listed in Table 3-4 are common operational messages that occur during modem  
operation. These messages normally appear on the second line of the LCD.  
Table 3-4  
Common Operational Messages  
Common  
Operational Message  
Indicates  
Please Wait...  
A command to a local device takes more than two seconds to complete.  
A command is sent to a remote modem.  
Command Sent...  
No Rem Response or  
Remote Modem Fail  
A remote modem does not respond to a command within 5 seconds.  
Command Complete  
Invalid Command  
A command, issued to a local or remote modem, is completed.  
The modem cannot complete a command.  
Messages listed in Table 3-5 are dial access security messages.  
Table 3-5  
Dial Access Security Messages  
Dial Access  
Security Message  
Indicates  
Get VF PsWd  
The answering modem is waiting for the originating caller to transmit a VF password.  
The answering modem is waiting to receive a valid DTE password from the remote DTE.  
Get DTE PsWd  
VF PsWd Timeout  
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the allowed time limit  
was exceeded before the modem received a VF password from the originating dialer.  
Unknown DTEpswd  
No Orig PsWd  
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the DTE passwords  
received from the remote DTE were invalid.  
The modem did not attempt to establish a call as requested because the AT dial  
command did not contain an originate access password.  
Unknown VF PsWd  
DTEpswd Timeout  
Inval Orig PsWd  
DTR Dial Blocked  
SecurityBlocked  
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the modem received  
an invalid VF password.  
The modem did not finish answering a call (disconnected) because the allowed time limit  
was exceeded before the modem received a DTE password from the remote DTE.  
The modem did not attempt to establish the call as requested because the originate  
password in the AT dial command was not valid.  
DTR dialing is not permitted when security is enabled. This message appears if DTR  
dialing is used and Answer Access or Originate Access security is enabled.  
The access verification capabilities are not available and the modem does not pass data  
to the DTE under any circumstances. This message appears only when the modem is in  
base mode (a mode that occurs during a firmware download) and Answer Access  
Security is enabled.  
3-14  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
The Top-Level menu’s main branches appear on the LCD in the order of Status, Configure,  
Control, Test, Call Setup, Talk/Data, Security, and Remote. These branches are discussed in this  
chapter except for the Configure branch which is reserved for Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, and  
the Security branch which is reserved for Chapter 6, Dial Access Security  
.
Quick Configuration Display  
The Quick Configuration display indicates the basic operational characteristics of the modem.  
Leased:28.8  
Status  
Configure  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The modem’s Quick Configuration information appears on the LCDs bottom line.  
To access the Quick Configuration display from the Top-Level display, press the  
on the configuration of the modem, one of two screens appear.  
key. Based  
If the modem is not operating with V.34 modulation, the following screen appears.  
Leased:19.2  
>
abbb cdd ee f f f f  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the modem is operating with V.34 modulation, the following screen appears.  
xxxx yyyyy zz  
abbb cdd ee f f f f  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
The .34 modulation Quick Configuration information appears on the LCDs top line.  
V
NOTE  
In Dial mode, where Automode automatically adapts to the  
modulation scheme of the remote modem, the V.34 Quick  
Configuration display may not necessarily indicate the actual (V.34)  
online modulation.  
For more information on V.34, refer to the V.34 section in this chapter  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
The following provides information about the Quick Configuration LCD display.  
a
Displays the network position of the modem. The letter C indicates this is a  
control modem, and T indicates this is a tributary modem.  
bbb  
c
Displays the network management address of the modem. The valid address field  
range is from 001 to 256.  
Displays the DTE mode. The letter A indicates the currently selected port is in  
Asynchronous mode, and S indicates the currently selected port is in Synchronous  
mode. If the NMS channel is selected, the letter in this location (A or S) will  
indicate the status of Port 1. (The NMS channel is always in Asynchronous  
mode.)  
dd  
ee  
Displays the line mode. The letters LA indicate Leased Answer mode, LO  
indicate Leased Originate mode, and D indicates Dial mode.  
Displays the modem DTE port that currently appears by the EIA status indicators  
on the DCP  
.
CC  
DC  
P1  
indicates Control Channel.  
indicates Diagnostic Channel.  
indicates Port 1 in Singleport mode.  
The following only appear on the 392x multiport modem:  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
B1  
indicates Port 1 when TDM/MSD is enabled.  
indicates Port 2 when TDM/MSD is enabled.  
indicates Port 3 when TDM/MSD is enabled.  
indicates Port 4 when TDM/MSD is enabled.  
indicates Port 1 when DTE Bridge is enabled.  
indicates Port 2 when DTE Bridge is enabled.  
B2  
ffff  
Displays the modem’s modulation scheme as shown below:  
V34  
indicates V.34 family modulation.  
indicates V.32 terbo modulation.  
indicates V.32bis modulation.  
indicates V.32 modulation.  
V32t  
V32b  
V32  
TMp  
V22b  
V27b  
V33  
indicates Trellis Multipoint modulation.  
indicates V.22bis modulation.  
indicates V.27bis modulation.  
indicates V.33 modulation.  
V29  
indicates V.29 modulation.  
V22  
indicates V.22 modulation.  
V23  
V21  
indicates V.23 modulation.  
indicates V.21 modulation.  
212A  
103J  
indicates Bell 212A modulation.  
indicates Bell 103J modulation.  
xxxx  
Modem Transmit Rate indicates the rate at which the modem is transmitting data.  
Possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12.0 (12,000), 14.4 (14,400),  
16.8 (16,800), 19.2 (19,200), 21.6 (21,600), 24.0 (24,000), 26.4 (26,400),  
28.8 (28,800), 31.2 (31,200), or 33.6 (33,600) bps.  
yyyyy  
zz  
Symbol Rate indicates the baud rate used by V.34 modulation. Refer to CCITT  
specifications. Possible values are 3429, 3200L, 3200H, 3000L, 3000H, 2800L,  
2800H, 2743L, 2743H, 2400L, 2400H.  
Transmit Level indicates the power level at which the modem is transmitting  
when running V.34 modulation. Possible values are 0164 dBm.  
To exit the Quick Configuration function and return to the Top-Level menu, press the  
or key  
,
,
.
3-16  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
DCP Operation  
Status Branch  
The Status branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to view the current status of the leased-line  
or dial connection, the identity (for example, serial number and model number) of your equipment,  
and the DTE interface.  
“Status”  
Configure  
PList  
Control  
Test  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Status  
Port  
Select  
V.34  
Backup  
DeviceHS  
VF  
Identity  
DTE  
Options  
Record  
Service_Log  
Display  
SigQual  
RcvLevel  
Sig/Noise  
NrEchLvl  
FarEchLv  
FarEchDel  
Clear  
Major  
Minor  
Status  
Dial  
Thresh  
Security  
Port1  
Port2  
Port3  
Port4  
LSD  
DTR  
DSR  
Tst  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
Line = Pri 4W APL  
Line = Pri 2W APL  
Line = Bkup 2W APL  
Line = Dial Backup  
Display  
Clear  
Ser#  
TxRate  
RxRate  
SymbolRate  
Tx Level  
AsymRate  
Mod#  
FRev  
HPt#  
FPt#  
Country  
Line = Dial ONL  
Y
Line = No Sync  
EchoFreqOff  
Phase  
ts  
H
Impul Hts  
DropOuts  
Retrains  
Phas Jtr  
NonLinear  
FreqOffset  
Gain Hts  
To access Status from the Top-Level menu, select Status.  
Leased:28.8  
Status  
Configure  
F3  
F1  
F2  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Device Health and Status (DeviceHS)  
DeviceHS provides a ‘‘snapshot” of current modem alarms which are active at the time the  
DeviceHS function is selected.  
To access DeviceHS from the Status branch, make the following selection:  
Status:  
DeviceHS  
>
VF  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select DeviceHS.  
Device HS:  
Major  
>
Minor  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If alarms are present, press the appropriate function key to view the messages associated with these  
alarms (Table 3-6). If needed, press the key to scroll to additional alarm types. If no alarms are  
present, the word Normal appears on the LCD.  
Table 3-6  
(1 of 3)  
Health and Status Messages  
Type  
Message  
Indicates  
Major  
Device Failure  
A device/self test has failed. The probable cause is a modem hardware problem  
or diagnostic memory failure.  
Facility Fault  
A severe data transport problem is occurring due to poor line conditions. No  
signal or a very poor signal is being received.  
Streaming DTE  
The modem is in an antistreaming condition. The RTS input to the modem was  
held ON for a period exceeding the time selected by the RTS Antistream  
configuration option. (Refer to the DTE Interface section in Chapter 4 for a  
description of the RTS Antistream configuration option.)  
Access Security  
VF Threshold  
A dial access security alarm is active. (Refer to the Security section of this table  
for dial access security conditions.)  
Minor  
One or more of the analog parameter thresholds have been exceeded. The  
probable cause is poor line conditions or improper threshold settings.  
Thresholds may be set through the DCP or NMS commands.  
DTE Alarm  
One or more of the DTE signals on one or more of the DTE ports are in alarm  
mode. (Refer to the Port 1, 2, 3, 4 section of this table for DTE alarm  
conditions.)  
Rate Fallback  
Due to poor line conditions, the modem’s transmit rate is below the configured  
rate. (Refer to the Leased Line and Dial Line sections in Chapter 4 for a  
description of configuration options affecting rate.)  
3-18  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
DCP Operation  
Table 3-6  
(2 of 3)  
Health and Status Messages  
Type  
Message  
Indicates  
Status  
Subtree Truncate  
Downstream health and status information has been truncated because it  
overflowed system limits. There is a large amount of health and status  
information in the subnetwork.  
Test Mode  
The modem or an upstream device is running a disruptive test.  
The modem’s DTE port has been disabled.  
The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode.  
A firmware download is in progress.  
Disabled  
On Dial Backup  
FW Downloading  
Primary Line Good  
The modem is currently operating on the 2-wire backup facility, the Lease  
Lookback option is enabled, and the modem detects continuity on the primary  
4-wire leased lines.  
Backup Line Bad  
The modem is currently operating on the primary 4-wire leased facility with  
2-wire leased lines selected as the backup facility, the BackupLineCheck  
configuration option is enabled, and the modem detects continuity on the 2-wire  
backup leased lines.  
Data Blocked  
The modem’s data path is blocked.  
On Lease Backup  
PSTN Test Fail  
The modem is operating in 2-wire Leased Backup mode.  
The modem failed either the Dial Tone Detection or the Ring Tone Detection  
portion of the Call Test command.  
Dial  
Make Busy Mode  
Service Line  
The modem is in a Make Busy condition.  
(Model 3921Plus only) The modem installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series  
Carrier has been switched to a service line.  
Short Hold Time  
Non-Answering  
RSL High Threshd  
RSL Low Threshld  
SNR Threshold  
Non-linear Dist  
Retrains  
The modem’s dial hold time has been shortened.  
The modem is in a non-answering mode.  
Thresh*  
The received signal level (RSL) has exceeded the upper threshold.  
The RSL is less than the lower threshold.  
The signal-to-noise ratio has exceeded the threshold.  
The non-linear distortion exceeded the threshold.  
The number of retrains exceeded the threshold.  
The signal quality is less than the threshold.  
Signal Quality  
Far Echo Threshd  
Near Echo Thresh  
Phase Jitter  
The far end echo level exceeded the threshold.  
The near end echo level exceeded the threshold.  
The phase jitter level exceeded the threshold.  
The number of phase hits has exceeded the threshold.  
The number of impulse hits exceeded the threshold.  
The number of gain hits exceeded the threshold.  
The number of drop outs exceeded the threshold.  
The frequency offset level exceeded the threshold.  
Phase Hit Thresh  
Impulses Hit  
Gain Hit Threshld  
Drop Outs Thresh  
Frequency Offset  
* Not supported in every modulation.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-19  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 3-6  
(3 of 3)  
Health and Status Messages  
Type  
Message  
Indicates  
Security  
Database Reset  
Password Protect  
Mode Change  
The security database has been reset (passwords erased).  
Security password protection is enabled.  
There has been a change in security mode. (Refer to Chapter 6, Dial Access  
Security.)  
Password Change  
Database Change  
Rx Data Alarm  
Tx Data Alarm  
DTR Alarm  
A security password has been changed.  
The security database containing passwords has been changed.  
The alarming DTE port’s RXD signal is in an alarm condition.  
The alarming DTE port’s TXD signal is in an alarm condition.  
The alarming DTE port’s DTR signal is in an alarm condition.  
The alarming DTE port’s CTS signal is in an alarm condition.  
The alarming DTE port’s RTS signal is in an alarm condition.  
The alarming DTE port’s DSR signal is in an alarm condition.  
The alarming DTE port’s LSD signal is in an alarm condition.  
Ports 1  
Ports 2  
Ports 3  
Ports 4  
CTS Alarm  
RTS Alarm  
DSR Alarm  
LSD Alarm  
Auto Stream Dis  
The port is disabled due to an antistreaming condition. (Refer to the Streaming  
DTE message in the Major Alarm section of this table.)  
Disabled  
The modem’s alarming DTE port has been disabled.  
To exit DeviceHS and remain in the Status Branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
.
VF  
VF enables you to display the condition of the leased or dial connection. VF also allows you to  
clear the VF counters.  
To access VF from the Status branch, make the following selection:  
Status:  
DeviceHS  
VF  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select VF. The selections Display or Clear appear on the LCDs bottom line.  
3-20  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Displaying VF Conditions  
Status:VF  
Display  
Clear  
F3  
F1  
F2  
To display VF conditions, select Display from the Status:VF screen.  
Status:VF  
>
SigQual=Excelent  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the modem is receiving a signal, the signal quality appears on the LCDs bottom line. If the  
modem is not receiving a signal, the message No Signal appears.  
Press the  
key to scroll and view the VF conditions.  
NOTE  
Not all conditions are available at 4800 bps.  
SigQual  
Signal Quality displays the condition of the VF line. Possible values are  
Excelent (Excellent), Good, Fair, Poor, or No Signal. These parameters appear  
for V.34, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations.  
RcvLevel  
Sig/Noise  
NrEchLvl  
Receive Signal Level displays, in decibels referenced to one milliwatt (dBm),  
the actual strength of the incoming signal. This parameter appears for V.34,  
V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32, and Trellis Multipoint modulations.  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio displays, in decibels, the receive signal strength relative to  
noise on the line. This parameter appears for V.34, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32,  
and Trellis Multipoint modulations.  
Near End Echo Level displays the signal level, in decibels referenced to one  
milliwatt (dBm), of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed  
back by the local line termination. This parameter appears for V.34, V.32 terbo,  
V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in 2-wire only).  
FarEchLvl  
FarEchDel  
Far End Echo Level displays the signal level, in decibels referenced to one  
milliwatt (dBm), of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed  
back by the remote line termination. This parameter appears for V.34,  
V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in 2-wire only).  
Far End Echo Delay displays the roundtrip delay in milliseconds of the far end  
echo. This parameter appears for V.34, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32  
modulations (in 2-wire only).  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-21  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
EchoFreqOff Echo Frequency Offset displays the frequency offset of the far end echo. This  
parameter appears for V.34, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in  
2-wire only).  
Phase Hts  
Impul Hts  
Phase Hits reports the total hit count of sudden uncontrolled changes in the  
phase of the receive signal for the past 15 minutes. This parameter appears for  
V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in 4-wire only).  
Impulse Hits reports the total hit count of large burst or spikes that are larger  
than normal peaks of random white noise for the past 15 minutes. This  
parameter appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in 4-wire  
only).  
DropOuts  
Retrains  
Drop Outs reports the total number of large reductions in channel gain for the  
past 15 minutes. This parameter appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32  
modulations (in 4-wire only).  
Retrains displays the number of retrains over the last 15 minutes of operation.  
The total 15-minute accumulation is updated every minute. This parameter  
appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32, and Trellis Multipoint modulations (in  
4-wire only).  
Phas Jtr  
Phase Jitter is the non-constant variation in the phase of the receive signal  
carrier. The jitter is typically introduced by analog power supplies and is  
predominantly sign waves with a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. This parameter  
appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in 4-wire only).  
NonLinear  
Non-Linear Distortion displays distortion which is usually associated with  
pulse-code modulation (PCM) compandor noise on the phone line. This  
parameter appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32, and Trellis Multipoint  
modulations (in 4-wire only).  
FreqOffset  
Gain Hts  
Frequency Offset reports the variation in all frequencies in the voice band. This  
parameter appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and V.32 modulations (in 4-wire  
only).  
Gain Hit reports the total number of rapid changes in the receiver power level  
for the past 15 minutes. This parameter appears for V.32 terbo, V.32bis, and  
V.32 modulations (in 4-wire only).  
Clearing VF Counters  
The Clear command resets the retrain, impulse hits, gain hits, phase hits, and drop outs.  
Status:VF  
Display  
Clear  
F3  
F1  
F2  
To clear the VF counters, select Clear  
.
3-22  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
VF Counter Clear  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The message Command Complete appears on the LCD’s bottom line indicating the VF Counters  
are cleared.  
To exit VF and remain in the Status Branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level  
menu, press the key  
.
Identity  
Identity displays the modem’s serial number, model number, firmware revision level, hardware  
revision number and firmware part number. Retrieval of this information is useful if you are  
purchasing additional or replacement modems and/or making firmware upgrades.  
To access Identity from the Status branch, make the following selection:  
Status:  
VF  
Identity  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Identity appears. Select Identity.  
Status:Identity  
>
Ser#=00000000  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The modem’s serial number appears on the LCDs bottom line. Press the  
key to scroll and  
view the model number, firmware revision level, hardware part number, and firmware part number.  
Ser #  
Serial number is an 8-digit number that identifies the modem.  
Mod #  
Model number is an alphanumeric number that identifies the modem as  
either a Model 3920Plus or Model 3921Plus modem.  
FRev  
Firmware revision level is an alphanumeric number that identifies the level  
of firmware loaded in the modem.  
HPt #  
FPt #  
Hardware part number is an 11-digit number that identifies the circuit card in  
the modem.  
Firmware part number is an 11-digit number that identifies to service  
personnel the firmware release number.  
Country  
Country code is a 7-text character that identifies the current country code.  
To exit the Identity function and remain in the Status branch, press the  
to the Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
DTE  
DTE displays the state and/or activity of the following interface leads: LSD, DTR, DSR, TST,  
TXD, RXD, RTS, and CTS. The interface leads status is updated every 5 seconds.  
To access DTE from the Status branch, make the following selections:  
Status:  
Identity  
DTE  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until DTE appears. Select DTE.  
Select DTE Port  
>
Port1  
Port2  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding function key. Press the  
key to scroll  
other ports into view. Only Ports 1 and 2 appear when the the DTE Bridge configuration option is  
enabled.  
This screen does not appear in Singleport mode.  
LSD DTR DSR Tst>  
_
*
_
F3  
F1  
F2  
The activity and state of the modem’s DTE signal appear on the LCD’s bottom line. Press the  
key to scroll other signals into view  
.
The LCD’s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for each interface lead. The first symbol  
indicates the signal’s activity since entering the DTE status display. An * (asterisk) indicates at  
least one transition while a blank space indicates no transitions.  
The second symbol indicates the state of the interface lead at the sampling time. A  
(solid block)  
indicates a Space or ON condition while an underscore ( _ ) indicates a Mark or OFF condition.  
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
3-24  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
DCP Operation  
V.34  
When running V.34 modulation, this function displays information about the modems receiving  
and transmitting data rate, symbol rate, transmitting level, and asymmetric rate.  
NOTE  
The V.34 status display is available only when the modem is  
configured for V.34 modulation.  
To access V.34 from the Status branch, make the following selection:  
Status:  
DTE  
V.34  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select V.34.  
Status: V.34  
TxRate = xxxx Kbps  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the modem is receiving a signal, the signal quality appears on the second LCD line. Press the  
key to scroll and view the V.34 modem receive rate, symbol rate, transmit rate, and  
asymmetric. If the modem is not receiving a signal, the message No Sync appears.  
TxRate  
Modem Transmit Rate indicates the rate at which the modem is transmitting  
data. Possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12.0 (12,000), 14.4 (14,400),  
16.8 (16,800), 19.2 (19,200), 21.6 (21,600), 24.0 (24,000), 26.4 (26,400),  
28.8 (28,800), 31.2 (31,200), or 33.6 (33,600) bps.  
RxRate  
Modem Receive Rate indicates the rate at which the modem is receiving data.  
Possible values are 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12.0 (12,000), 14.4 (14,400),  
16.8 (16,800), 19.2 (19,200), 21.6 (21,600), 24.0 (24,000), 26.4 (26,400),  
28.8 (28,800), 31.2 (31,200), or 33.6 (33,600) bps.  
SymbolRate  
Symbol Rate indicates the baud rate used by V.34 modulation. Refer to CCITT  
specifications. Possible values are 3429, 3200L, 3200H, 3000L, 3000H,  
2800L, 2800H, 2743L, 2743H, 2400L, 2400H.  
TxLevel  
Transmit Level indicates the power level at which the modem is transmitting  
when running V.34 modulation. Possible values are 0164 dBm.  
AsymRate  
Asymmetric Rate indicates the rate symmetry when running V.34 modulation.  
Refer to the Asymmetric Rate configuration option in the Dial Line or Leased  
Line section of Chapter 4.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-25  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Backup  
The Status Backup function displays the configuration of the modems current operating line  
facility and the configuration and condition of the inactive line.  
NOTE  
The modem’s rear panel has two line interface jacks: LEASE and  
DIAL (see Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2). The jack labeled LEASE is the  
APL primary interface and accepts either 2-wire or 4-wire APL. The  
jack labeled DIAL is the backup interface and accepts either 2-wire  
APL (Dual Lease Line) or Dial lines.  
To access Backup from the Status branch, make the following selection:  
Press the  
key until Backup appears.  
Status:  
DTE  
Backup  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Backup.  
Status:Backup  
>
Line=Pri 4w APL  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The configuration of the current operating line facility (either APL primary or backup) appears  
(Refer to Table 3-7).  
Press the  
key to display the next screen.  
Status:Backup  
<
Bkup:2wAPL=Good  
F3  
F1  
F2  
This screen displays the configuration and condition of the inactive line facility (either APL  
primary or backup).  
There are four condition codes, Good, Bad, ????, and  
(blank).  
3-26  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Table 3-7 provides information about the Status Backup screens. The first column lists all possible  
configurations for the modem’s currently active line. The second column lists all possible  
configurations for the modem’s inactive lines. The third column provides information about the  
inactive line condition.  
XXXX represents the condition code of the inactive line.  
Table 3-7  
Backup Status Screens  
Active Line  
1st Screen Display  
Inactive Line  
2nd Screen Display  
Possible Inactive/Backup Line Condition  
Line=Pri 4w APL  
or  
Line=Pri 2w APL  
Bckup:2wAPL=XXXX  
or  
Bckup : Dial =(blank)  
Good indicates that line continuity is detected.  
Bad indicates that line continuity is not detected.  
???? indicates that the line condition is unknown (Backup  
Facility Check is making its first determination of the line  
conditions since the last retrain).  
blank indicates that the BackupLineCheck configuration  
option is disabled or not available. Refer to the BackupLine  
Check configuration option in the Leased Line section of  
Chapter 4.  
Line=Bkup 2w APL  
or  
Line = Dial Backup  
Pri 4w APL =XXXX  
or  
Pri 2w APL =XXXX  
Good indicates the line condition is good.  
Bad indicates the line condition is bad.  
???? indicates the line condition is unknown (Lease  
Lookback has not had enough time to make an initial  
appraisal of the line conditions since the last retrain).  
blank indicates the Lease Lookback option is disabled.  
Refer to the BackupLine Check configuration option in the  
Leased Line section of Chapter 4.  
Line=Dial Only  
Line=No Sync  
No second screen  
display.  
NOTE: When the modem is configured for Dial Only, there  
is no backup.  
NOTE: The leased-line interface is disabled when the  
factory default options are loaded from the Async  
Dial, Sync Dial, or UNIX Dial templates.  
No second screen  
display.  
NOTE: No Sync appears when the modem is not trained on  
either the primary or backup line facility.  
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-27  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Options  
The Options Status function displays all optional firmware features currently installed in the  
modem. If no firmware options are installed, None_Installed appears on the LCD.  
To access Options from the Status branch, make the following sections:  
Status:  
DTE  
Options  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Options appears. Select Options.  
Options:Status  
V.29  
>
V.33  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If optional features are installed in the modem, they appear on the LCDs bottom line. If other  
features are installed, press the key to scroll other features into view.  
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
.
Record  
Record is a troubleshooting tool used in conjunction with support personnel. This function  
retrieves and reports any sequence faults to support personnel. A sequence fault is an irregular or  
unexpected event.  
There are two selections under Record: Display and Clear. Display allows up to eight sequence  
fault messages that are recorded by the modem and displayed on the LCD in descending order. If  
no sequence faults have occurred, then Modem O.K. appears.  
Clear is used to remove all sequence fault messages from nonvolatile memory and the LCD.  
To access Record from the Status branch, make the following selections:  
Status:  
Options  
Record  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Record appears. Select Record.  
3-28  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
Record Status  
Display  
Clear  
F3  
F1  
F2  
To display sequence faults, select Display  
.
Record Number 1  
Modem O.K.  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The LCD displays the first sequence fault field. (Sequence fault fields range from 1 to 8 and are  
identified by a number in the upper right corner.) Press the key to view the remaining fields.  
The message Modem O.K. appears if no sequence faults have occurred.  
To remove sequence fault records from both the LCD and nonvolatile memory, select Clear. The  
message Modem O.K. appears.  
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
Service Log  
Service Log is a troubleshooting tool used in conjunction with support personnel. Use this function  
to retrieve and report Service Log data to support personnel.  
To access Service Log from the Status branch, make the following selections:  
Status:  
<
Service_Log  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Service appears. Select Service Log.  
Service Log: xx  
Nxt  
mm/dd/yy zz  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Support personnel will request the applicable information from this screen.  
xx displays the Service Log number.  
mm/dd/yy displays the date (month/day/year).  
zz  
displays the Customer Support code number.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the Service Log.  
To exit this function and remain in the Status branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
.
Configure Branch  
The Configure branch of the LCD allows you to change and save the modems configuration  
options. For configuration options and DCP configuration procedures, refer to Chapter 4,  
DCP Configuration.  
Poll List Branch  
The Poll List function is not available in:  
Multipoint tributary modems.  
Modems with the Diag Connection configuration option disabled.  
Modems using modulations that do not support the secondary channel.  
Point-to-point control modems.*  
The Poll List (Plist) branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to identify downstream modems in  
order to support health and status polling and download broadcasting. The maximum number of  
devices is 32 on the secondary channel and 64 on the diagnostic channel.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
Test  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Control  
PList  
(Tributary  
only)  
Display  
Clear  
Change  
Add  
Acquire  
Active  
Delete  
Skip  
To access PList from the Top-Level menu, make the following selections:  
* Point-to-point control modems only poll address 01, and point-to-point tributary modems are always set to address 01.  
3-30  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
Leased:28.8  
PList  
Control  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until PList appears. Select PList.  
Within a network link, a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the  
tributary modem’s network management address for polling functions. Each TMp tributary modem  
must have a different network management address. Refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a  
description of the network management address (NetMngmtAddress) configuration option.  
Over a diagnostic channel a tributary modem can communicate with control modems by using the  
control modem’s network management address for polling.  
In the poll list, modems are listed as either Active or Skip. Downstream modems in the Active poll  
list are polled by the modem. Modems in the Skip poll list are passed over during the polling  
process, but not deleted from the poll list.  
Display  
Display allows you to view the modems poll list.  
To access Display from the PList branch, make the following selection:  
Poll List:  
Display  
>
Clear  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Display  
.
NOTE  
If there are no modems in the poll list when you select Display, the  
message Poll List Empty! appears on the second line of the LCD.  
Poll List:Disp  
Nxt  
xxx yyyyyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If there are modems in the poll list when you select Display  
,
xxx  
Displays the network management address of the modem in the poll list.  
yyyyyy  
Displays either Active or Skip to indicate the poll list in which the network  
management address is included.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the Active or Skip poll lists.  
To exit this function and remain in the PList Display branch, press the  
key. To exit and return  
to the Top-Level menu, press the key  
.
Clear  
The Clear function does not appear in Remote mode.  
Clear deletes the modem’s poll list.  
To access Clear from the PList branch, make the following selection:  
Poll List:  
Display  
>
Clear  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Clear  
.
The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll  
list has been cleared.  
To exit this function and remain in the PList branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
Change  
The Change function does not appear in Remote mode.  
Change allows you to change the modem’s poll list.  
To access Change from the PList branch, make the following selections:  
Poll List:  
Clear  
Change  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Change appears. Select Change.  
Change allows you to add modems to the Active poll list (Active), delete modems from both  
Active and Skip poll lists (Delete), and move modems from the Active to the Skip poll list.  
Poll List:Chang  
>
Active  
Delete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
3-32  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
To implement Change, select the appropriate function (Active, Delete, or Skip). (For Skip, you will  
need to press the  
key until Skip appears.)  
Poll List:yyyyyy  
Ent  
"xxx  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The function field (yyyyyy) displays the function selected (Active, Delete, or Skip).  
The address field (xxx) displays the network management address of the modem to be changed.  
The valid address field range is from 001 to 256.  
To increment digits within the address field (xxx), use the  
and  
keys to position the cursor  
( _ ) under the digit to be incremented. Press the F2 (") key to increment the digit.  
Press Enter (Ent) to implement the function (yyyyyy) you selected (Active, Delete, or Skip). The  
message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list  
change occurred. If the message Poll List Check appears, you attempted to delete an address that  
is not on the poll list, or you attempted to add an address that is already on the poll list. If the  
message Poll Lst too Big appears, you exceeded the maximum number of downstream devices. To  
return to the selected function (Active, Delete, or Skip), press the  
automatically increments upon returning to this function.  
key. The address  
To exit this function (Active, Delete, or Skip) and remain in the PList Change branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the Top-Level menu, press the key  
.
Add  
The Add function does not appear in Remote mode or on control modems.  
Add allows you to add the tributary modem to a control modems poll list. This function should be  
initiated from only one tributary modem at a time.  
To access Add from the Plist branch, make the following selections:  
Poll List:  
Change  
Add  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Add appears. Select Add.  
Poll List:Add  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
The message Command Complete appears on the LCD to indicate that the tributary modem will  
be added to the control modem’s poll list.  
To exit this function and remain in the PList branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the  
key.  
Acquire  
The Acquire function does not appear in Remote mode.  
Acquire allows you to acquire an active poll list consisting of all modems that are one tier  
downstream. A modem adds to its poll list all downstream modems that respond to a poll.  
To access Acquire from the Plist branch, make the following selections:  
Poll List:  
Add  
<
Acquire  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Acquire appears. Select Acquire.  
NOTE  
If an error message (OtherTestActive or Unable To Acquir)  
appears on the second line of the LCD, move up one level in the  
menu tree to clear the message and return to the PList Acquire  
branch. The OtherTestActive message indicates that a test is  
running which blocks the Acquire function. The Unable To Acquir  
message indicates that the diagnostic network is in a busy state.  
Poll List:Acquir  
Abort  
xxx  
yyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The address field (xxx) is incremented sequentially from 001 to 256 as polls are transmitted from  
the modem to the downstream modem(s). To be added to the modem’s poll list, the device must  
respond to a poll after receiving its address. The Acquire function can be canceled by selecting  
Abort.  
The number field (yyy) indicates the total number of devices that responded to the modems polls  
thus far. These devices have been acquired for the poll list.  
Select Abort or allow the function to complete.  
3-34  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Poll List:Acquir  
Num Acquired  
yyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The number field (yyy) indicates the total number of devices acquired for the poll list.  
To exit this function and remain in the PList branch, press the key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
.
Control Branch  
The Control branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to manage hardware and software  
functions, such as speaker volume, reset, busy out, and firmware download.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
PList  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Test  
Control  
(3921Plus  
nly)  
o
Service_Line  
or  
Make_Busy  
or  
Download_Code  
(DownLoadSoftware)  
VF_Thresh_Update  
Data_Stream  
EIA_LEDs  
Speaker  
Reset  
DiscServiceLine  
RemoveMakeBusy  
To access Control from the Top-Level menu, make the following selections:  
Leased:28.8  
Control  
Test  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Control appears. Select Control.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Speaker  
Speaker allows you to make temporary adjustments to the modems speaker volume. Upon a reset,  
speaker volume returns to its configured setting. For more information on speaker settings, refer to  
the Misc section in Chapter 4.  
To access Speaker from the Control branch, make the following selection:  
Control:  
Speaker  
>
Reset  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Speaker.  
Speaker Control  
>
Off  
Low  
Med  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key and appropriate function keys to choose the desired selection.  
DCP selections are  
Off  
Turns the speaker off.  
Low  
Med  
High  
Adjusts the speaker to low volume.  
Adjusts the speaker to medium volume.  
Adjusts the speaker to high volume.  
The message Command Complete appears on the LCD.  
To exit Speaker and remain in the Control branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the  
key.  
3-36  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
DCP Operation  
Reset  
Reset causes the modem to stop operation and perform a complete program restart. The  
modem begins the power-up test sequence that ends with the Top-Level menu displayed on  
the LCD. Configuration options stored in an Active (Saved) configuration area are copied to  
the Active (Operating) configuration area.  
To access Reset from the Control branch, make the following selection:  
Control:  
Speaker  
>
Reset  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Reset.  
The message Reset appears momentarily before the modem performs the power-up diagnostic test  
sequence.  
Data Stream  
Use Data Stream to enable or disable the modems data transmitter function on a specific port or  
on all ports.  
The Data Stream function is not available in Async mode in Singleport mode.  
To access Data Stream from the Control branch, make the following selections:  
Control:  
Data_Stream  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Data Stream appears. Select Data Stream (F1).  
Select DS Port  
Port1  
>
Port2  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the mux is enabled, press the  
key to scroll the available ports into view. You may see Port1,  
Port2, Port3, Port4, or All. For information on selecting All, refer to Selecting All Ports later in this  
section.  
To select a port, press the appropriate function key (F1 or F3).  
This screen does not appear if in Singleport mode or the DTE Bridge configuration option is  
enabled.  
Now go to the next screen (Data Stream).  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Data Stream  
Port1 Disable  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The port field (for example, Port1) displays the selected port.  
The available Data Stream action (Disable or Enable) appears on the second line of the LCD  
beside the port field. If the modem’s data transmitter is enabled, the word Disable appears to  
indicate that you may disable the data transmitter by selecting this action.  
To change the modem’s data stream, press the F2 key. When the message Command Complete  
appears, press the  
key to clear the message.  
Data Stream  
Port1 Enable  
F3  
F1  
F2  
To change the data stream for the selected port again, press the F2 key  
.
or  
To exit this function and remain in the Control branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the  
key.  
Selecting All Ports  
Selecting All will enable or disable the modem’s data transmitter function on all ports.  
Select DS Port  
Port1  
>
All  
F3  
F1  
F2  
From the Select DS Port screen, press the F3 key to select All.  
Data Stream All  
Enable  
Disable  
F3  
F1  
F2  
To enable or disable the modem’s data transmitter function on all ports, press the appropriate  
function key, F1 (Enable) or F3 (Disable). When the message Command Complete appears, press  
the  
key to clear the message.  
3-38  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
DCP Operation  
Select DS Port  
All  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
To change the data stream on all ports again, press the F1 key  
.
or  
To exit this function and remain in the Control branch, press the  
key. To exit and return to the  
Top-Level menu, press the  
key.  
EIA LEDs  
This function allows the front panel EIA LEDs to display and change the activity of a selected  
digital interface. Use the EIA LEDs function to change the port that controls the front panel LED.  
Based on the modem’s configuration, the following conditions exist:  
The CC or DC selection is not available if the Diagnostic Connector configuration option is  
disabled. Refer to the Diag Connection configuration option in the Misc section of  
Chapter 4.  
The CC or DC interface is not available on the 3921Plus modem. The CC or DC activity is  
monitored on the SDU in the 3000 Series carrier.  
Ports 3 or 4 are not available in the DTE Bridge mode.  
Ports 2, 3, and 4 are available in TDM/MSD mode.  
To access EIA LEDs from the Control branch, make the following selections:  
Control:  
EIA_LEDs  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until EIA LEDs appears. Select EIA LEDs.  
EIA LEDs:xxxxx  
>
Port1  
Port2  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The port field (xxxxx) displays the currently selected interface. Valid interface selections are Port1,  
Port2, Port3, Port4, and depending on the set value of the Diagnostic Connection configuration  
option, CC (NMS Control Channel), or DC (Diagnostic Channel). Refer to Diag Connection  
configuration option in the Misc section of Chapter 4.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Press the F1 key until the appropriate digital interface appears. Select the appropriate interface by  
pressing the corresponding function key.  
After selecting the desired interface, the message Command Complete appears on the bottom line  
of the LCD and the selected interface appears in the xxxxx field.  
NOTE  
The Port 1 interface is the only display allowed on the 3921Plus  
modem in Singleport mode, therefore the entire EIA LEDs branch is  
masked.  
Make Busy/Remove Make Busy  
The Make Busy function forces the modem off-hook so it cannot answer a call. This is often used  
with PBX systems to permit the busy out of a PBX port for rotary or hunt groups.  
WARNING  
To prevent violations of FCC and DOC regulations, this  
function must only be used behind a user’s PBX.  
To access Make Busy from the Control branch, make the following selections:  
Control:  
Make_Busy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Make Busy appears. Select Make Busy.  
Make Busy  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The modem is now in a forced busy condition. Command Complete appears on the LCD.  
To remove the modem from Make Busy mode, press the  
key once and the  
key until  
RemoveMakeBusy appears.  
3-40  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
DCP Operation  
Control:  
RemoveMakeBusy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press any function key to select RemoveMakeBusy. The message Command Complete appears  
on the LCD.  
Service Line/Disconnect Service Line  
The Service Line/Disconnect Service Line is only available in Models 3921-B1-001 and  
3021-B1-011.  
The Service Line function allows you to switch a specific Model 3921Plus installed in a  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier from normal leased or dial operation to service-line operation.  
This switch only places the modem on the service line. For a connection to be established, you  
must still use the normal dialing methods as described earlier in this chapter in the Call Setup  
Branch section.  
A service line is an extra dial line connected to a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. This line is  
normally shared by up to four Model 3921Plus multiport or eight singleport modems installed in  
either Slots 1–8 or Slots 9–16. However, by daisy chaining the service-line connector of one  
Network Interface Module (NIM) to the service line of another NIM installed in the same carrier,  
you can permit eight multiport or sixteen singleport modems to share one service line. The service  
line can also be extended to other carriers in a cabinet. For more information on daisy chaining  
NIMs to the service line, refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual.  
A service line is ideal for a dial backup of Model 3921Plus modems operating on leased lines.  
Remember that a service line can back up only one failed leased line at a time.  
To enable service line from the Control branch, make the following selections:  
Press the  
key until Service Line appears.  
Control:  
Service_Line  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press F1 (Service_Line) to switch the modem from its normal dial line to the service line.  
Service_Line  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The message Command Complete appears. Now, when the modem places a call, instead of using  
the dial, the call is placed on the service line.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
To disconnect the modem from the service line and resume normal operation, press the  
key  
(returning to Control branch). From the Control branch, press the  
appears.  
key until DiscServiceLine  
Control:  
DiscServiceLine  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press F1 (DiscServiceLine). The call and service line disconnect and the message Command  
Complete appears.  
Download Software  
The Download Software function sets parameters within the modem when transferring firmware  
to one or more modems or when receiving firmware upgrades from a locally attached PC-based  
controller. The latter is only performed by service representatives.  
There are two selections under Download Software: Clone Remote and To Local via DTE. Clone  
Remote is used to transfer an exact copy of the firmware currently stored in a 392xPlus modem to  
either one or more remote 392xPlus modems or one or more DC-attached 392xPlus modems.  
When implementing a Clone Remote operation, the following is true:  
The Clone Remote function only operates properly if the remote modems are connected to  
the local modem via a leased-line or an established dial-line network.  
The Clone Remote will not appear on the LCD if the modem is not configured for leased  
lines and a dial-line connection does not exist.  
For more information on Clone Remote operation, refer to Implementing a Clone Remote  
Operation later in this section.  
The second selection appearing on the LCD is To Local via DTE. This function permits firmware  
upgrades to be transferred to a 392xPlus modem. This type of download requires a locally attached  
PC controller to be connected to the modems DTE port as well as special download software. Any  
downloads using this selection are intended to be performed by service representatives only.  
Selecting Clone Remote  
NOTE  
Clone Remote operations are not supported unless both local and  
remote modems are 392xPlus modems. (The 3800 or 391x Series  
modems cannot be used in cloning operations with 392xPlus  
modems.)  
To access DwnLoadSoftware from the Control branch, make the following selections:  
3-42  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Control:  
Download_Code  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Download_Code appears. Press any function key to select  
Download_Code. The DwnLoadSoftware screen appears.  
DwnLoadSoftware >  
Clone_Remote  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press any function key to select Clone_Remote.  
The next screen to appear is determined by the modems configuration. Refer to the appropriate  
section based on your modem’s configuration; Clone Remote in Point-to-Point Configurations,  
Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations, or Clone Remote in Multipoint Configuration.  
Clone Remote in Point-to-Point Configurations  
Before using Clone Remote in point-to-point configurations, verify the following:  
The 392xPlus modems have an established leased-line connection using either V.34 family,  
V.33, V.32 family, or V.29 modulation (refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4) or a  
dial network connection using either V.34 family or V.32 family modulations (refer to the  
Dial Line section in Chapter 4).  
The remote modem’s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled (refer to the  
Misc section in Chapter 4).  
The password (Remote Access Password configuration option) is the same in both the local  
and remote modems. (For an example of how to change the password, refer to the Editing  
and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 4.)  
After completing these checks, proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote  
Operation, which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations.  
Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations  
A tributary modem configured for extended diagnostics (Diagnostic Connection configuration  
option set to Modem(DC)) can perform two types of Remote Clone operations. It can clone the  
upstream, VF connected, control modem (SC_Clone) or it can clone all the 392xPlus modems  
attached to its downstream Diagnostic Channel (DC_Broadcast).  
Choose DLL Type >  
SC_Clone  
F3  
F1  
F2  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
From the Choose DLL Type screen, press the F1 key to select SC_Clone to request the transfer of  
an exact copy of the tributary modem’s firmware to the VF connected control modem.  
Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation, which follows the  
descriptions of multipoint cloning operations.  
Cloning DC Broadcast Remote  
Before using Clone Remote in DC Broadcast configurations, make sure the tributary modems  
active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the control modems that receive  
the download (refer to the Poll List Branch section in this chapter), and ensure that the control  
modems are responding properly to polls (refer to the Sub-Network Health and Status branch  
section in this chapter).  
Choose DLL Type >  
DC_Broadcast  
F3  
F1  
F2  
From the Choose DLL Type screen, press the  
key until DC_Broadcast appears. Press F1 or F2  
to transfer an exact copy of the tributary modems firmware to the DC-connected control  
modem(s) using the Active Poll list.  
Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation, which follows the  
descriptions of multipoint cloning operations.  
Viewing DC Broadcast Clone Results  
Choose DLL Type >  
DC_CloneResults  
F3  
F1  
F2  
From the Choose DLL Type screen, press the  
key until DC_CloneResults appears to view the  
results of the last DC_Broadcast clone operation. If the message Trib List Empty appears, this  
indicates that a multiple download was never initiated.  
DC Clone Results  
Nxt  
xxx  
Pass  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The address field (xxx) displays the network management address of one of the remote modems.  
Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result  
for those modems (Pass or Fail).  
3-44  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
Clone Remote in Multipoint Configurations  
A Trellis Multipoint (TMp) control modem can be used to download firmware to just one tributary  
modem (Single) or to all of its tributary modems (Multiple).  
NOTE  
A Trellis Multipoint (TMp) tributary modem cannot download  
firmware to its control modem. To download firmware to a TMp  
control modem use a point-to-point dial connection, an NMS, or a  
PC controller.  
Before using Clone Remote in multipoint configurations (Single or Multiple), perform the  
following:  
Make sure the 392xPlus modems have an established leased-line connection using the  
Trellis Multipoint (TMp) modulation (refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4).  
Make sure the remote modem’s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled (refer  
to the Misc section in Chapter 4).  
For Single download configurations, know the remote access password and the network  
management address of the remote tributary modem that will receive the download. Refer to  
the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a description of the remote access password  
(RemAccssPasswrd) configuration option and the network management address  
(NetMngmtAddress) configuration option.  
For Multiple download configurations, ensure that:  
— the tributaries are responding properly to polls (this may take several minutes after the  
control modem powers up). Refer to the Sub-Network Health and Status Branch section  
in this chapter for more information.  
— the control modem’s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for  
the remote 392xPlus tributary modems that will receive the download (refer to the Poll  
List Branch section in this chapter).  
— all 391x modems are removed from the active poll list.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Cloning a Single TMp Remote  
Choose DLL Type >  
Single  
Multiple  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the F1 key to select Single Clone Remote.  
Choose Address:  
Ent  
"xxx  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The address field (xxx) displays the network management address of the modem that receives the  
download. The valid address field range is from 001 to 256.  
To increment digits within the address field (xxx), use the  
and  
keys to position the cursor  
( _ ) under the digit to be incremented. Press the F2 (") key to increment the digit.  
Press F1 (Ent) to select the modem that will receive the download.  
Choose Password:  
Ent  
"yyyyyyyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The password field (yyyyyyyy) displays the remote access password for the modem that will  
receive the download.  
To increment digits within the password field (yyyyyyyy), use the  
and  
keys to position the  
cursor ( _ ) under the digit to be incremented. Press the F2 ( ) key to increment the digit.  
"
Press Enter (Ent) to select the modem that will receive the download.  
After completing these actions, proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote  
Operation.  
3-46  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
Cloning a Multiple TMp Remote  
Choose DLL Type >  
Single  
Multiple  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the F3 key to select Multiple Clone Remote.  
After completing this action, proceed to the next section titled Implementing a Clone Remote  
Operation.  
Viewing Multiple TMp Clone Results  
Choose DLL Type >  
MPtCloneResults  
F3  
F1  
F2  
From the Choose DLL Type screen, press the  
key until the MPtCloneResults screen appears to  
view the results of the last multiple TMp clone operation. If the message Trib List Empty appears,  
this indicates that a multiple download was never initiated.  
MPtCloneResults  
Nxt  
xxx  
Pass  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The address field (xxx) displays the network management address of one of the remote modems.  
Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result  
for those modems (Pass or Fail).  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Implementing a Clone Remote Operation  
WARNING  
The modem begins a transfer of its own program to the remote  
modem. This process takes the communication link  
out-of-service for a period of time depending on the data rate  
of the link. If the Clone Remote process is started and then  
interrupted, the remote modem is left in a partially programmed  
state in which its functional capabilities are limited to those  
required to initiate and complete another download attempt. If  
the mux is enabled when the Clone Remote process is  
interrupted, disable the mux on the source modem before you  
initiate another Clone Remote process. (Be sure to re-enable  
the mux when cloning is complete.)  
Warning:Download  
Abort_Download  
F3  
F1  
F2  
At this point, if you do not want to continue this process, abort the transfer by selecting any  
function key. This returns the modem to the DwnLoadSoftware menu. However, to continue with  
the transfer, press the  
key to display the Reprogram_Remote selection.  
Warning:Download  
Reprogram_Remote  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press any function key to begin the transfer.  
RemClone Status  
Establish Remote  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The local modem’s LCD displays Establish Remote, indicating the modem is attempting to  
establish a Remote Cloning Download session with the remote modem.  
3-48  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
If unsuccessful, the modem remains in the Download Transfer mode. The LCD’s top line displays  
RemClone Failed and the bottom line displays one of the following messages:  
Incompat Modulat  
No Response  
The modems are connected, but are using a modulation scheme other  
than V.34 family, V.33, V.32 family, V.29, or TMp.  
The remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem or the connection  
between the two modems is poor  
.
Access Disabled  
Password Invalid  
The remote modem’s Access from Remote configuration is disabled.  
The local and remote modems’ passwords do not match. Correct the  
problem and attempt another download from the local modem. If this  
fails, contact your service representative.  
No Circuit  
There is no connection between the local and remote modem.  
After successful establishment of a Remote Cloning Download session, the following screens  
appear.  
RemClone Status  
Initializing  
F3  
F1  
F2  
RemClone Status  
Bank1:xxxx/yyyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
As the firmware transfers, the local and remote LCDs bottom line displays the status of the  
download process, plus the number of records sent versus the total number of records for that data  
bank number.  
For Single download applications, if the download is successful, the local modem displays  
Remote Clone OK and the remote modem displays Frmware Upgrade. If the download took  
place over the dial network, the modems disconnect when the download is complete.  
If the Single download is unsuccessful, RemClone Failed appears on the LCD’s top line. Attempt  
another download from the local modem. If this fails, contact your service representative.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Automatic Firmware Download  
New releases may be available for the 392xPlus modems. The latest 392xPlus firmware is  
available at no charge from the Automatic Firmware Download Center. Refer to page A in the  
front of this document for contact information.  
To download the firmware, your modem must be configured for dialing. Save your modems  
current configuration to the Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory area, and load the Async Dial  
factory template (refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for more information about saving and  
changing configuration options).  
If you have a DTE (terminal or PC) attached to your modem, informational messages appear on it  
when the modem connects. These messages show the amount of time the download will take.  
However, a DTE is not required.  
The firmware download begins without any operator action. When the firmware download begins,  
the LCD displays download status messages with the data bank number, current block being  
loaded, and the total number of blocks.  
Download Status  
Bank1: xxxx/yyyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the modem connects at 14,400 bps, the download takes about 10 minutes. When the download  
completes, the modem resets itself and displays a normal status message (such as Idle:28.8).  
Reload your saved configuration options from the Customer 1 or Customer 2 memory area.  
Automatic Firmware Download Failure  
If the firmware download is interrupted, the following screen appears.  
DownldOnly Mode  
Configure  
F3  
F1  
F2  
This indicates that your modem is left in a state that can only be used to make or receive a call for  
download. To continue the firmware download, repeat the download process by directing the  
modem to dial the Automatic Firmware Download Center (refer to the Call Setup Branch section  
in this chapter for information about dialing a number using the DCP). If you are unable to  
complete the download, contact your service representative for assistance.  
3-50  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
VF Thresholds Update  
The VF Thresholds Update function allows you to set the thresholds that determine the Health and  
Status alarm conditions for the VF parameters. Refer to Table 3-8 in this section for VF  
thresholds and their valid ranges and default values.  
To access VF_Thresh_Update from the Control branch, make the following selections:  
Control:  
<
VF_Thresh_Update  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until VF_Thresh_Update appears. Press any function key to select  
VF_Thresh_Update.  
VF Thresholds  
Edit  
Save Reset  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Edit.  
In the following example, the RSL High threshold is changed from 09 (–dBm) to 10. This example  
demonstrates VF threshold editing and saving. With the exception of Signal Quality, all VF  
thresholds may be modified in this manner. Signal Quality uses a menu selection with possible  
values of Excelent (Excellent), Good, Fair, Poor, or No Signal. Editing and saving a VF threshold  
is similar to editing and saving a configuration option. (For another example of editing and saving,  
refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 4.)  
RSL High (- dBm)  
Nxt  
" 09  
F3  
F1  
F2  
In the example shown above, 09 is the upper (High) RSL threshold (in –dBm). To change the  
09 to 10, make the following selections:  
RSL High (- dBm)  
r
Nxt  
" 19  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select the F2 ( " ) key to increment the number above the cursor ( 0 ) to 1.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
NOTE  
Note that a warning ( r ) appears on the second line of the screen if  
you enter an invalid VF threshold (out of range). You cannot save  
your edits until all thresholds are within their valid range. Refer to  
Table 3-8 for valid VF threshold ranges.  
RSL High (- dBm)  
r
Nxt  
" 19  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key to move the cursor to the next position ( 9 ).  
Select the F2 ( " ) key to change the number above the cursor ( 9 ) to 0.  
RSL High (- dBm)  
Nxt  
" 10  
F3  
F1  
F2  
NOTE  
If you want to modify additional VF thresholds, select Nxt.  
To save the edited threshold(s):  
RSL High (- dBm)  
Nxt  
" 10  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key to scroll up to the Edit/Save screen.  
VF Thresholds  
Edit  
Save Reset  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Save.  
3-52  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
If the edited VF thresholds are valid, the Save command stores them into nonvolatile memory.  
When the Save completes, the message Save Completed appears.  
Save VF Thresh  
Thd Out of Range  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the edited VF threshold is invalid (out of range), the error message Thd Out of Range appears.  
This indicates the Save procedure was unsuccessful. Return to the Edit screen and correct the  
invalid threshold range.  
To correct the invalid VF threshold, press the  
Edit/Save/Reset screen.  
key to return to the VF Threshold  
VF Thresholds  
Edit  
Save Reset  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Reset to restore the original default values into memory.  
Repeat the Edit and Save procedure until the VF threshold(s) is valid and the Save completes  
successfully (Save Completed).  
To exit this function and remain in the Control branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
Health and Status VF alarms are reported to the front panel LED and the Network Management  
System (NMS) based on the parameters in Table 3-8. Refer to Table 3-6 in the Device Health and  
Status section of this chapter for Health and Status VF message alarm information.  
Table 3-8  
(1 of 2)  
Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds  
VF Thresholds  
Receive Signal Level High  
Receive Signal Level Low  
Signal to Noise Ratio  
Non-Linear Distortion  
Retrains (per 15 minutes)  
Signal Quality  
Valid Ranges  
Default Values  
0 dBm to –15 dBm  
Above –9 dBm  
–16 dBm to 50 dBm  
5 dB to 40 dB  
Below –23 dBm  
Below 23 dB  
Below 30 dB  
15 trains  
15 dB to 50 dB  
1 to 255 trains  
Excellent (lowest)  
Good  
Good  
Fair  
Poor  
No Signal (highest)  
Near Echo  
0āć38 dBm  
Above –20 dBm  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 3-8  
(2 of 2)  
Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds  
VF Thresholds  
Valid Ranges  
038 dBm  
Default Values  
Far Echo  
Above –20 dBm  
Frequency Offset  
Phase Jitter  
Phase Hits  
Impulse Hits  
Gain Hits  
1 Hz to 15 Hz  
Above 4 Hz  
1 degree to 45 degrees  
1 to 255 hits  
Above 9 degrees  
20 hits per 15 minutes  
20 hits per 15 minutes  
20 hits per 15 minutes  
20 dropouts per 15 minutes  
1 to 255 hits  
1 to 255 hits  
Drop Outs  
1 to 255 dropouts  
Test Branch  
The Test branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to initiate various modem tests. Use these tests  
if you are having data communication problems, such as periodic character loss, random errors, or  
constant format errors. By the process of elimination, you can usually isolate the fault in your  
system.  
There are six selections under Test: Abort, Self (Self-Test), Loc Analog Loop (Local Analog  
Loopback), Rem Digital Loop (Remote Digital Loopback), Loc Digital Loop (Local Digital  
Loopback), and Pattern. The only tests that can operate concurrently on a single modem are Pattern  
with a Local Analog Loopback and Pattern with a Remote Digital Loopback. If any test is  
operating, besides the two combinations just mentioned, it must be canceled before starting another  
test.  
The Test branch only initiates and cancels tests. If parameters need to be set, refer to the Tests  
section in Chapter 4.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
PList  
Control  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
SubHS  
Test  
Abort  
Self  
Loc_Analog_Loop Rem_Digital_Loop Loc_Digital_Loop  
Pattern  
Port  
Port  
Port  
Select  
Select  
Select  
3-54  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
DCP Operation  
To access the Test branch from the Top-Level menu, make the following selections:  
Leased:28.8  
Control  
Test  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Test appears. Select Test.  
Abort  
Abort ends any test that is in progress and brings the modem back to the normal mode of  
operation. Confirmation is provided by the Command Complete message.  
To access Abort from the Test branch, make the following selection:  
Test:  
Abort  
>
Self  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Abort.  
Test:Abort  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The modem stops all tests currently in progress and displays the Command Complete status  
message on the LCD.  
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-55  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Self  
Self performs an internal self-test of the modem, which takes less than a minute to complete. The  
modem must be offline; otherwise, Invalid Command appears.  
WARNING  
When this test is run in Remote mode, it causes the Remote  
mode session to be lost. The Remote mode session will  
reestablish after the self-test completes (usually one or two  
minutes). If the remote self-test fails, a Device Failure alarm  
message appears when the remote modem’s Device Health and  
Status (DeviceHS) branch is accessed.  
To access Self from the Test branch, make the following selection:  
Test:  
Abort  
>
Self  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Self. (All LCD cells and DCP status indicators light.)  
NOTE  
The test delays 15 to 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network  
management messages to propagate before the VF channel is  
interrupted by the test.  
If the modem passes the self-test, Pass appears on the LCD. If it fails, Failed appears. If the  
modem fails, contact your service representative. If Invalid Command appears, the modem is  
operating on dial lines. If OtherTestActive appears, another test is in progress. If another test is in  
progress, select Abort to clear the current test and try again. If the modem is operating on dial  
lines, disconnect to clear the dial lines, and then choose Self. If the modem receives a ring signal  
during this test, the test is canceled and RI Abort message appears.  
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
3-56  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
DCP Operation  
Loc Analog Loop  
This test is not available when using V.34 modulation in Multiport mode.  
Loc Analog Loop performs a local analog loopback (CCITT V.54 Loop 3), Figure 3-4, that verifies  
modem operation as well as the connection between the DTE and modem. The modem must be  
offline and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode to perform this test, otherwise Invalid  
Command appears.  
NOTE  
If you are performing a Local Analog Loop test on a TMp modulation  
that is running a test pattern with a constant flow of data, you must  
toggle the RTS switch off and then on to allow the modem to train  
up.  
Figure 3-4. Local Analog Loopback  
To access Loc Analog Loop from the Test branch, make the following selections:  
Test:  
Loc_Analog_Loop  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Loc Analog Loop appears. Press any function key to start this test.  
Test:Local Loop  
Started  
F3  
F1  
F2  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
NOTE  
The test delays 15 to 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network  
management messages to propagate before the VF channel is  
interrupted by the test.  
The message Started appears on the LCD, and the Test LED lights for the duration of the test. If  
OtherTestActive appears on the LCD, another test is in progress. Select Abort to clear the current  
test and try again. If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled, Test Timeout appears at the  
conclusion of the test. If it is disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more information on the  
Test Timeout configuration option, refer to the Test section in Chapter 4. A Ring Indicate during  
this test can cause errors.  
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
Rem Digital Loop  
This test is not available when:  
Using TMp modulation.  
Using Remote mode.  
V.54 configuration option is enabled.  
Using V.34 modulation with the Aysmmetric Rate configuration option enabled.  
Rem Digital Loop performs a remote digital loopback (CCITT V.54 Loop 2), Figure 3-5. This test  
can verify the integrity of the local modem, the communication link, and the remote modem. Any  
data or pattern entered at the local DTE is sent to and returned from the remote modem. For this  
test to operate properly, the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or  
Asynchronous Direct mode.  
Figure 3-5. Remote Digital Loopback  
3-58  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
To access Rem_Digital_Loop from the Test branch, make the following selections:  
Test:  
Rem_Digital_Loop  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Rem_Digital_Loop appears. Press any function key to start this test.  
Pick Test Port  
Port1  
>
Port2  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding function key. Press the  
other ports into view.  
key to scroll  
This screen does not appear in Singleport mode.  
Test:P1:Rem Loop  
Started  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The message Started appears on the LCD, and the Test LED lights.  
If OtherTestActive appears on the LCD, another test is in progress. Select Abort to clear the  
current test and try again. If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled, Test Timeout  
appears at the conclusion of the test. If it is disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more  
information on the Test Timeout configuration option, refer to the Test section in Chapter 4.  
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-59  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Loc Digital Loop  
Loc Digital Loop is issued by a local modem and forces it to loopback any data received from the  
remote modem (Figure 3-6 ). (This test operates the same as a CCITT V.54 Loop 2 except it is  
issued at your modem.) This is useful if a remote modem is incapable of initiating a remote digital  
loopback from its location. For this test to operate properly, the modems must be operating at  
the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode.  
NOTE  
A TMp tributary cannot perform a local digital loopback test.  
Figure 3-6. Local Digital Loopback  
To access Loc_Digital_Loop from the Test branch, make the following selections:  
Test:  
Loc_Digital_Loop  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Loc_Digital_Loop appears. Press any function key to start this test.  
Pick Test Port  
Port1  
>
Port2  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the mux is enabled, select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding function key. Press  
the  
key to scroll other ports into view.  
3-60  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
This screen does not appear in Singleport mode.  
Test:P1:Dig Loop  
Started  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights. The port field (for example, P1  
for Port 1) displays the port that is currently selected. You may see P1, P2, P3, or P4.  
If OtherTestActive appears on the LCD, another test is in progress. Select Abort to clear the  
current test and try again. If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled, Test Timeout  
appears at the conclusion of the display. If it is disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more  
information on the Test Timeout configuration option, refer to the Test section in Chapter 4.  
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
Pattern  
Pattern can transmit and receive a 511 bit error rate test pattern. It can also be used with a currently  
running local analog loopback or a remote digital loopback to simulate data passing through the  
modem. You will need to start the local analog or remote digital loopback test before you start the  
pattern test. For this test to operate properly, the modems must be online and in Synchronous or  
Asynchronous Direct mode. Otherwise, the message Invalid Command appears when this test is  
started (Figures 3-7 through 3-9).  
Figure 3-7. Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Figure 3-8. Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test  
Figure 3-9. End-to-End Pattern Test  
To access Pattern from the Test branch, make the following selections:  
Test:  
<
Pattern  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Pattern appears. Select Pattern to start this test.  
3-62  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
Pick Test Port  
Port1  
>
Port2  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select the appropriate port by pressing the corresponding F key. Press the  
ports into view.  
key to scroll other  
The Pick Test Port screen does not appear in Singleport mode.  
Test:P1:Pattern  
Started  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights.  
The port field (for example, P1 for Port 1) displays the port that is currently selected. You may see  
P1, P2, P3, or P4.  
Test P1:Pattern  
>
BlksErrd=xxxxxxx  
F3  
F1  
F2  
BlksErrd=xxxxxxx displays the number of blocks of data found in error (block size is 1000 bits  
per block). BlksRcvd=xxxxxxx displays the total number of blocks of data received. Select Clear  
to reset both block counters. In Singleport mode the message NoSync can appear as a value for  
BlksErrd while the modem’s receiver is synchronizing. The message OvrFlw can appear as the  
value for BlksErrd if the counter overflows.  
Press the  
Press the  
key to display BlksRcvd=xxxxxxx, number of blocks of data received.  
key to display Clear. Select Clear to reset the block counters.  
The Pattern test can be exited and reentered without restarting the test. The BlksErrd and BlksRcvd  
continue counting.  
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled, Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the  
test. If it is disabled, the test operates until aborted. For more information on the Test Timeout  
configuration option, refer to the Test section in Chapter 4.  
To exit this function and remain in the Test branch, press the  
Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to the  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-63  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Sub-Network Health and Status Branch  
The Sub-Network Health and Status (SubHS) function is not available on multipoint  
tributary modems or with certain modulations (V.29, V.33, V.22bis, and V.27bis).  
The SubHS branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to display alarm conditions in downstream  
modems.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
Plist  
Control  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Test  
SubHS  
To access the SubHS branch from the Top-Level menu, make the following selections:  
Leased:28.8  
Test  
SubHS  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until SubHS appears. Select SubHS.  
NOTE  
If there are no modems in the poll list, the message Poll List  
Empty! appears on the second line of the LCD.  
Sub-network HS  
Nxt  
xxx yyyyyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
3-64  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
When you select SubHS,  
xxx  
Displays the network management address of the downstream modem selected.  
Displays the status of the downstream modem. This message is updated every  
yyyyyy  
several seconds to display the latest status. MAJOR, MINOR, and STATUS  
display Health and Status alarm conditions; refer to Table 3-6 in the Device Health  
and Status (DeviceHS) section of this chapter for additional information.  
UNKNWN appears when the modem does not recognize the downstream health  
and status information or device communication is not established. Normal  
appears if no alarms are present. NO RSP appears when the downstream modem  
does not respond to the poll.  
Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the poll lists.  
To exit this function and return to the Top-Level menu, press the  
key.  
Call Setup Branch  
The Call Setup function is not available in TMp Control mode.  
For dial backup applications, the Call Setup branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to dial,  
disconnect, and answer telephone calls. For leased backup applications, the Call Setup branch  
allows you to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line.  
In leased backup operation, a 2-wire leased line is used as the backup facility instead of the normal  
2-wire dial line. Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem  
(see Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2), and enable the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option. (Refer to the  
Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options.) Except for dialing, ring indication, and  
call progression functions, you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
PList  
Control  
Test  
SubHS  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Call_Setup  
(Dial  
Backup  
only)  
Dial  
Answer  
Change_Directory  
Directory_Status  
Dial_Standby  
or  
Return_to_Dial  
Disconnect  
(Does not appear  
in North America)  
Directory Locations 1 - 2  
4
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-65  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
To access the Call Setup branch from the Top-Level menu, make the following selections:  
Leased:28.8  
Call_Setup  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Call_Setup appears. Select Call Setup.  
Dial  
For dial backup applications, Dial allows you to dial any telephone number stored in directory  
locations 1–24. Any telephone number dialed using the DCP must already exist in a directory  
location. Refer to Change Directory for information on storing telephone numbers in directory  
locations.  
For leased backup applications, Dial allows you to switch to the backup leased line. Any valid  
non-empty directory location may be used. The remote modem cannot automatically answer the  
simulated call. Use the Answer function of the remote modem in conjunction with the Dial  
function to manually switch to the backup leased line.  
To access Dial from the Call Setup branch, make the following selection:  
Call Setup:  
>
Dial Disconnect  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Dial to display the first directory telephone number.  
DialDirectory:  
Nxt  
01:5551234  
F3  
F1  
F2  
To view other directory locations, select Nxt.  
DialDirectory:  
Nxt  
02:3219876  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Once the directory location you want appears on the LCD, press the F2 or F3 key to dial the  
number.  
3-66  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
DialDirectory:01  
Off Hook  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The Call Setup status Off Hook appears during the connection process.  
If the connection is successful, the modem is online and one of the Normal Operation status  
messages (Table 3-3) appears on the LCD. If the connection is not successful, the LCD displays  
one of the Call Failure status messages (Table 3-3).  
Disconnect  
For dial backup applications, use this function when you want to disconnect an established call on  
a dial line. For leased backup applications, use this function to switch between the primary leased  
line and the backup leased line.  
To access Disconnect from the Call Setup branch, make the following selection:  
Call Setup:  
>
Dial Disconnect  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Disconnect.  
Disconnect  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
For dial backup applications, the modem goes on-hook (hangs up) and the call is disconnected.  
The Command Complete status message appears.  
To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch, press the  
the Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-67  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Answer  
For dial backup applications, Answer allows the modem to go off-hook, generate an answer tone,  
and begin the handshaking process with the calling modem. Use the Answer function when the  
Auto-Answer Ring Count configuration option is disabled. (Refer to the Line Dialer section in  
Chapter 4.)  
For leased backup applications, Answer allows the modem to begin a “handshake” process with  
the remote modem.  
To access Answer from the Call Setup branch, make the following selections:  
Call Setup:  
Answer  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Answer appears. Select Answer.  
Answer  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The modem goes off-hook and attempts to establish a connection in Answer mode. The Command  
Complete status message appears on the LCD.  
To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch, press the  
the Top-Level menu, press the key  
key. To exit and return to  
.
Dial Standby/Return to Dial  
When the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode (DialBckUp), Dial Standby and Return to Dial  
allow the modem to switch between primary leased-line and primary leased-line backup operation  
while still maintaining the backup connection (Figure 3-10). Switching between backup and  
primary leased-line operation can be performed manually or automatically. (Refer to the Leased  
Line section in Chapter 4 to enable the Automatic Dial Backup configuration option.)  
DIAL BACKUP LINE  
RETURN  
TO DIAL  
DIAL  
STANDBY  
X
X
MODEM  
MODEM  
LEASED-LINE  
FAILURE  
496-13081-01  
Figure 3-10. Dial Backup  
3-68  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Operation  
Under normal backup conditions, when a problem occurs on the primary leased line, the modems  
establish a connection over the backup network.  
Call Setup:  
Dial Standby  
F3  
F1  
F2  
When this occurs, the Dial Standby function appears on the LCD. If you select Dial Standby, the  
modem switches back to the primary leased-line while still maintaining the backup connection. As  
a result, the Return_to_Dial function appears on the LCD instead of Dial Standby.  
Call Setup:  
Return_to_Dial  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the primary leased line is unacceptable, select Return_to_Dial which switches the modem back  
to backup network operation (LCD displays Dial Standby). If however, the primary leased-line is  
operating properly, you can select Disconnect from the Call Setup branch to drop the dial backup  
connection. Also, if the primary leased-line operation is maintained uninterrupted amount of time  
specified in the Dial Standby configuration option, the dial backup network disconnected.  
To access Dial Standby or Return to Dial from the Call Setup branch, make the following  
selections:  
Call Setup:  
Dial Standby  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Dial Standby or Return_to_Dial appears. Select the appropriate function.  
Dial Standby  
Command Complete  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode, the Dial Standby function forces the modem to  
primary leased-lines and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete.  
Once the modem is in Dial Standby mode, Return_to_Dial appears on the LCD. Selecting this  
function forces the modem to backup networks and the LCD displays the status message  
Command Complete.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Change Directory  
Change Directory allows you to enter or modify telephone numbers. The modem has nonvolatile  
memory locations that allow you to store up to 24 telephone numbers. Each directory location can  
accept up to 40 characters; this includes the telephone number and dial command modifiers. Any  
telephone number dialed using the DCP Dial command must appear in a directory location.  
NOTE  
If the modem is operating on leased lines and has a dial line  
attached for dial backup purposes, it is required that directory  
location 1 contain the telephone number used for dial backup.  
To access Change Directory from the Call Setup branch, make the following selections:  
Call Setup:  
<
Change_Directory  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Change_Directory appears. Press any function key to select  
Change_Directory.  
01:551234z  
Nxt  
"
#
F3  
F1  
F2  
The phone number listed in directory location 1 appears. Select Nxt to display other directory  
locations.  
3-70  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations  
The following example uses an empty directory location for describing how to enter a telephone  
number. If you want to change an existing telephone number in any of the 24 directory locations,  
follow the same procedures.  
To add a telephone number to a directory location, make the following selections:  
02:z  
Nxt  
"
#
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Nxt until a blank directory appears on the LCD. (The cursor ( _ ) always appears in the first  
character position.)  
Select F2 (  
character.  
"
) or F3 (  
#
) until the desired character is selected. This can be an alpha or numeric  
02:z  
Nxt  
"
#
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key to move the cursor to the next character position.  
Continue this key sequence until the dial command modifiers and telephone number are entered.  
(Refer to Table 3-9 for a list of valid dial command modifiers.)  
01:9W5556789z  
Nxt  
"
#
F3  
F1  
F2  
To save the number just entered, scroll to the next directory location by selecting Nxt. The number  
is now stored in nonvolatile memory.  
Table 3-9 describes what can be entered in directory locations.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 3-9  
Valid Dial Command Modifiers  
Dial command modifiers are parameters entered in the dial command string which specify how, when, and what number  
to dial. The following is a list of parameters the 392xPlus modems recognize:  
T
P
Tone (DTMF) dial. Any digit 0–9, *, or # can be dialed as tone.  
— Pulse dial. Only the digits 0–9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode.  
NOTE: Once a dialing method (tone or pulse) has been specified, it will only remain active until the end of that dial  
string. The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option.  
,
— Pause. Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the dial string. The length of  
this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option (refer to the Line Dialer  
configuration option group) or by the value held in S-Register S8.  
W
R
— Wait for tone dial. The modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string. This can be the  
initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX.  
— Reverse Dial mode. Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects  
ringback. (Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call.) The R modifier must be  
the last character in the dial string.  
@
— Quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number. If the silence is not detected, the  
modem sends the NO ANSWER result code to the DTE or displays the No Quiet Answer LCD status  
message.  
!
;
— Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5 seconds then return to off-hook.  
— Return to Command mode. Causes the modem to return to Command mode after dialing a number without  
disconnecting the call.  
Space — Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
— Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
+
— Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
( )  
— Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
— End of Number. Hides all characters appearing on the LCD entered to the right of this indicator.  
Directory Status (may not appear for certain countries)  
Directory Status displays the status of each directory location.  
To access Directory Status from the Call Setup branch, make the following selections:  
Press the key until Directory_Status appears. Press any function key to select  
Directory_Status.  
Call Setup:  
Directory_Status  
<
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Directory_Status appears. Press any function key to select  
Directory_Status.  
3-72  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
DCP Operation  
Number Status  
Nxt  
01:Allowed  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Nxt to display other directory locations.  
The status of a directory location can be:  
No Number  
Allowed  
The directory location is empty.  
The number in this directory location may be dialed at this time.  
The number in this directory location may be dialed later.  
The number in this directory location may not be dialed.  
Delayed  
Forbidden  
Delayed and Forbidden only appear in countries with specific dialing requirements.  
When a number is delayed, press the key to display the value of the delay in minutes.  
The delayed and forbidden conditions can be cleared by power cycling the modem. This is actually  
the only way to re-enable a forbidden number. Deleting a number from a directory location and  
reentering it into another directory location will not change the delayed or forbidden condition of  
this number.  
Talk/Data Branch  
The alk/Data function is not available in TMp Control mode.  
T
The Talk/Data branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to switch the modem between Talk mode  
and Data mode when manually dialing using either the DCP or an externally attached telephone.  
To add an external telephone to your modem, use an external “Y” cable to connect the phone line  
to both the modem and the telephone (refer to Appendix C). This cable is not supplied with your  
modem.  
On initial power-up, the modem is in Data mode. When in Data mode, the modem is connected  
and data can be transmitted or received. When in Talk mode, the modem is disconnected and you  
are free to use the external telephone. This function is not available for Model 3921Plus  
modems.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
PList  
Control  
Test  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Security  
Remote  
Tlk/Data  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-73  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
The following sections describe the uses of the Talk/Data function.  
Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Auto-Answer  
NOTE  
On the remote modem, the Line Current Disconnect configuration  
option (refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4) must be set to  
Disable.  
This configuration option does not appear on Models 3920-A1-401,  
411 and 3921-B1-001, 011.  
If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for  
Auto-Answer, perform the following procedure.  
Idle:28.8  
Tlk/Data  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Tlk/Data appears.  
Lift the attached handset and dial the telephone number of the remote modem. When the remote  
modem answers, it transmits an answer tone.  
Idle:28.8  
Tlk/Data  
F3  
F1  
F2  
When you hear this tone, immediately select Tlk/Data and hang up the handset. This starts the  
handshaking sequence between your modem and the remote modem.  
Online:28.8  
Call_Setup  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
If this is successful, the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD.  
3-74  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Manual Answer  
NOTE  
On both modems, the Line Current Disconnect configuration option  
(refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4) must be set to Disable.  
If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Manual  
Answer, perform the following procedure.  
Once the remote telephone is answered by the remote user, you must both decide when to place the  
modems into Data mode. You must both select Tlk/Data at approximately the same time and hang  
up the handset to begin the handshaking sequence.  
If the handshake is successful, the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD.  
NOTE  
If the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem, then the remote  
user must consult that modem’s operator’s manual to perform a  
similar operation.  
Once the modems are online, the status messages listed in Table 3-3 appear on the Top-Level  
display.  
It is not necessary to specify an originating or answering modem when dialing via the DCP  
because the answering modem detects that it is receiving a ringing voltage and automatically  
defaults to Answer mode.  
Security Branch  
The Security branch is only available in Singleport mode. The Security branch allows you to  
create, edit, and save parameters that determine how the modems security is executed. For  
security procedures and configuration options, refer to Chapter 6, Dial Access Security  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Remote Branch  
The Remote branch of the Top-Level menu allows you to control the remote modems DCP using  
the local modem’s DCP. This function allows you to change configuration options and control test  
functions in a remote modem. Any changes made to configuration options while using the Remote  
branch are not saved until you exit the Remote branch. This function is only available when using  
either V.34, V.33, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32, TMp, or V.29 modulation schemes.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
Plist  
Control  
Test  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Choose Address  
(TMp Control only)  
Choose Password  
(TMp only)  
(Not i  
n
TMp Trib)  
Secondary  
Prim (data blckd)  
(ExitRem  
instead of Remot  
using Remote Mode)  
appears  
e
when  
The following conditions must be met before using the Remote branch:  
A connection using either leased lines or the dial network must be established.  
The Access from the Remote configuration option must be enabled in the remote modem.  
In point-to-point networks, the Remote Access Password configuration option must be the  
same for both the local and remote modems. In multipoint networks the remote access  
password must be entered at the appropriate prompt.  
For multipoint control modems, the network management address of the tributary modem  
must be entered at the appropriate prompt.  
3-76  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Operation  
Remote DCP access is accomplished using either the primary or secondary channel (if available)  
of the VF line. Using the primary channel gives a much faster response time due to the higher data  
rate, but it also interrupts data flow because primary data is stopped when Remote mode is active.  
Once Remote mode is terminated, the primary channel is automatically made available for data  
transmission.  
Unlike primary channel communications, the secondary channel operates at a slower data rate and  
does not interrupt data flow. (V.34, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32, and TMp are the only modulations  
available for the secondary channel.)  
NOTE  
When initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem,  
primary channel operation is not available. Also, if the tributary  
modem is not on the control modem’s poll list, the error message  
No Trib Session appears when the function is executed.  
To access the Remote branch, make the following selections:  
Leased:28.8  
Security  
<
Remote  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key until Remote appears. Select Remote.  
NOTE  
If a connection is not established between a local 3900 Series  
modem and a remote 3900 Series modem, the LCD displays  
Remote Mode Fail–No Circuit. Return to the Top-Level menu.  
For Trellis Multipoint (TMp) control modems, you must specify the network management address  
of a tributary modem. The following display does not appear in point-to-point or Trellis  
Multipoint tributary modems.  
Choose Address:  
Ent  
"xxx  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The address field (xxx) displays the network management address of the modem to be accessed by  
the Remote function. The valid address field range is from 001 to 256.  
To increment digits within the address field (xxx), use the  
and  
keys to position the cursor  
( _ ) under the digit to be incremented. Press the F2 ( ) key to increment the digit.  
"
Press Enter (Ent) to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
For Trellis Multipoint (TMp) modems (control or tributary), you must specify the remote access  
password of the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function. The following display does  
not appear in point-to-point modems.  
Choose Password:  
Ent  
"yyyyyyyy  
F3  
F1  
F2  
The password field (yyyyyyyy) displays the remote access password of the modem to be accessed  
by the Remote function.  
To increment digits within the password field (yyyyyyyy), use the  
and  
keys to position the  
cursor ( _ ) under the digit to be incremented. Press the F2 ( ) key to increment the digit.  
"
Press Enter (Ent) to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function.  
Select Channel  
Secondary  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
or  
Select Channel  
Prim (data blckd)  
<
F3  
F1  
F2  
If operation over the secondary channel is desired, press any function key to select the secondary  
channel. Secondary channel only appears if using V.34, V.32 terbo, V.32bis, V.32 or TMp  
modulation. If operation over the primary channel is desired, press the  
key until primary  
displays and press any function key. Primary channel operation is not available when initiating  
a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem.  
3-78  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
Leased:28.8  
Control  
ExitRem  
F3  
F1  
F2  
If the remote modem accepts the password and the entry is successful, the Top-Level menu of the  
remote modem appears on the local modems LCD. An appears in the upper right-hand corner  
indicating that what is displayed on your LCD is actually the Top-Level menu of the remote  
392xPlus modem. If the message Remote FP Busy appears, the remote modem’s front panel is  
already in Remote mode.  
“Status”  
Status  
Configure  
PList  
Control  
Test  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
ExitRem  
The Top-Level menu of the remote 392xPlus modem is similar to the local 392xPlus modem with  
the following exceptions:  
The Talk/Data and Security branches do not appear.  
Change Directory is the only function available under the Call Setup branch.  
Local Analog Loop and Remote Digital Loop do not appear under the Test branch when  
using the secondary channel. When using the primary channel, the Test branch does not  
appear.  
Poll List Display is the only function available under the PList branch.  
Exit Remote replaces Remote on the local modems LCD.  
To return to local modem operation, select ExitRem. Any changes made to configuration options in  
the remote modem are saved.  
The following conditions can cause Remote branch access to fail:  
The local modem is not able to communicate with the remote modem because of a poor dial  
network or leased-line connection, or the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem. If this  
is the case, the status message No Response appears on the LCD.  
If a connection is established but the remote modems Access from Remote configuration  
option is disabled, then the status message Access Disabled appears on the LCD.  
If a connection is established but the wrong password is stored, the status message  
Password Invalid appears on the LCD. This configuration option must be enabled by the  
remote user. (Refer to the Remote Access Password configuration option in Chapter 4.)  
The remote mode command displays Other Test Active if an Analog Loopback test is  
currently running.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Operation  
Diagnostic Control Panel Access  
NOTE  
This page of the manual is self supporting and can be removed to  
prevent unwanted knowledge of the DCP security access  
selections.  
Use the DCP security access function to “lock” the DCP of any 392xPlus modem and prevent  
unwanted user access. Two options are available for this function: Grant and Deny.  
Grant allows any branch of the Top-Level menu to be accessed from the DCP. Deny only allows  
access to the Status branch of the Top-Level menu. All 392xPlus modems are shipped from the  
factory with DCP access granted.  
To access the Front Panel (DCP) Security Access function, perform the following:  
Press the  
Press the  
Press the  
key three times.  
key twice.  
key once.  
Frnt Panl Acces  
Grant  
Deny  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Grant to allow access or select Deny to lock DCP access.  
Either selection results in a return to the Top-Level menu.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Configuration  
4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
DTE Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27  
Leased Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
V.42/MNP/Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58  
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64  
Overview  
After installing a 392xPlus modem, its software configuration options must be set using the  
diagnostic control panel (DCP). This chapter describes how to access and use the Configure branch  
of the Top-Level menu via the DCP.  
The Configure branch accesses the Edit Area which is a work space where you view and change  
the configuration options. These configuration options are loaded to the Edit Area from one of five  
configuration option areas: Active (Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1, Customer 2,  
or Factory.  
Active (Operating) is a configuration area containing configuration options currently used  
by the modem. When the modem is powered on or when a save is performed, the contents of  
Active (Saved) are loaded into Active (Operating). Any changes made using AT commands  
directly affect this configuration area.  
Active (Saved) is a read from and write to configuration option area containing the most  
recently saved changes made to any configuration options. In the event of a power cycle or  
reset, the modem retrieves these settings from nonvolatile memory.  
Customer 1 and Customer 2 are two additional read and write (changeable) configuration  
areas where you can create and store additional configurations for specific applications.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Factory is a read-only (unchangeable) configuration area containing six sets of predefined  
configuration options labeled Sync Leased Async Leased, TMp (Trellis Multipoint),  
,
Async Dial, Sync Dial, and UNIX Dial. If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected, you  
must choose either Answer or Originate mode. If TMp is selected, you must choose either  
Control or Trib (Tributary) mode. These sets contain the most commonly used  
configurations options for modems installed into these hardware environments. These  
predefined configuration options are intended to give you a head start and only require a  
minimum of changes to the default settings. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Figure 4-1 graphically displays the interaction between the edit area and configuration areas as  
viewed from the perspective of the DCP.  
CONTENTS O  
F
Active (Saved)  
ARE AUTOMATICALLY COPIED  
TO Active (Operating)  
WHEN A SAVE IS COMMANDED VIA THE  
DCP, ON A RESET, OR ON POWER-UP.  
Active (Operating) Active (Saved) Customer1  
Customer2  
Factory  
S Sync Leased*  
(Answer/Originate)  
S
Async Leased*  
(Answer/Originate)  
S
S
S
S
TMp (Control/Trib)  
Async Dial  
Sync Dial*  
UNIX Dial  
Load Edit  
Area From  
*Multiport mode  
EDIT AREA  
ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW AND  
EDIT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS  
Save  
To  
ANY CHANGES MADE T  
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS  
O
ARE SAVED TO Active (Saved),  
Customer1 OR Customer2  
,
Figure 4-1. DCP Configuration Process  
4-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Configuration  
Configure Branch  
The Configure branch of the Top-Level menu contains all of the modem’s configuration options  
which determine how the modem operates. These configuration options are accessed by scrolling  
down and across various levels of the Configure branch.  
“Status”  
Status  
PList  
Control  
Test  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Tlk/Data  
Security  
Remote  
Configure  
Ld EditArea frm:  
Activ (Operating)  
Customer1  
Active (Saved)  
Customer2  
Factory  
Sync_Dial  
UNIX_Dial  
TMp  
Sync_Leased  
Async_Leased  
Async_Dial  
Choose Mode  
Choose Mode  
Trib  
Control  
Answer  
Originate  
Choose Function  
Edit StrapGroup  
Save  
Customer1  
Active (Saved)  
Line_Dialer  
Customer2  
DTE_Interface  
Leased_Line  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
Test  
Security  
MIsc  
Dial_Line  
DTE_Dialer  
MUX  
Copy  
Port1  
Port2*  
Port3*  
Async  
Port*  
EIA  
Rate*  
*Not shown when the DTE Bridge configuration option is enabled.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
The Configure branch consists of the following three levels:  
Ld EditArea frm. Allows the selection of the Active (Operating), Active (Saved),  
Customer 1, Customer 2, and Factory configuration areas.  
Choose Function. Allows you to make changes (Edit) to existing configuration options or  
write (Save) these changes to either the Active (Saved), Customer 1, or Customer 2.  
Edit Strap Group. Contains the eight software configuration option groups that determine  
how the modem operates, plus the Security group, which can be viewed but not changed  
using this branch.  
Editing and Saving a Configuration Option  
The following example shows how to change the Remote Access Password using the DCP. (If you  
intend to access another 392xPlus modem via the Remote branch of the Top-Level menu, the  
Remote Access Password must be the same for both modems.) By following these procedures you  
learn how to load a factory preset configuration area (in this case, Sync Leased), how to edit a  
configuration option (Remote Access Password), and how to save changes to a configuration area  
(Active (Saved)). The shaded key indicates what key to press.  
Leased:28.8  
Status  
Configure  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Configure from the Top-Level menu.  
LdEditAreafrm  
>
Activ(Operating)  
F3  
F1  
F2  
LdEditAreafrm  
Factory  
<
F3  
F1  
F2  
Scroll across the LCD and select the Factory configuration area.  
4-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DCP Configuration  
Ld Fact Preset:  
Sync_Leased  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Sync_Leased.  
Choose Mode:  
Answer  
Originate  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Answer  
.
Choose Function:  
Edit  
Save  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Edit.  
Edit StrapGroup:  
DTE_Interface  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
Edit StrapGroup  
Test  
Misc  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Scroll across the LCD and select the Misc configuration options group.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
StrapsWhenDisc  
>
Nxt  
No_Change  
F3  
F1  
F2  
RemAccssPasswrd:  
Nxt  
"00000000  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Nxt until RemAccssPasswrd appears.  
RemAccssPasswrd:  
Nxt  
"10000000  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select the F2 (  
"
) key to increment password values.  
RemAccssPasswrd:  
Nxt  
"10000000  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key to move the cursor to the next position.  
RemAccssPasswrd:  
Nxt  
"12345678  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Continue this sequence until you have entered the new password value.  
4-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
To save the new password to a configuration area, make the following selections:  
RemAccssPasswrd:  
Nxt  
"12345678  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Press the  
key to scroll up (twice).  
Choose Function  
Edit  
Save  
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select Save.  
Sav EditArea to  
Active(Saved)  
>
F3  
F1  
F2  
Select a configuration area (Active (Saved), Customer 1, or Customer 2) to save the changes.  
Select the  
branch.  
key to exit to the Top-Level menu or select the  
key to remain in the Configure  
Summary  
When using the DCP to edit configuration options, keep the following in mind:  
Nxt has two functions. First, it indicates that more configuration options are available within  
that group. These are accessed by selecting Nxt (pressing F1) and scrolling down to the next  
configuration option. Second, it indicates that what is displayed on the LCD is the current  
setting. If you scroll left or right, Nxt disappears and reappears if a new value is selected.  
End appears when you have scrolled down to the last configuration option available in that  
group. Selecting End returns you to the top of the configuration group. You are free to enter  
that group again or scroll left or right to the next configuration options group.  
The  
The  
key takes you one step up in the Configure branch each time it is pressed.  
key causes you to exit the Configure branch and return to the Top-Level menu. If  
any changes are made to configuration options, the DCP allows you to save these changes to  
either the Active (Saved), Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration areas.  
The  
and  
keys move selections across the LCD.  
The F2 key selects the setting for the configuration option.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Configuration Tables  
Each modem operates in either the Multiport or Singleport mode depending on the modems  
configuration (refer to 392xPlus Operational Modes in Chapter 1).  
The modem’s configuration options are arranged into six groups in the Multiport mode, and nine  
groups in the Singleport mode. When using configuration option tables, be sure you are  
referencing the correct group (Multiport or Singleport mode). Failure to do this may lead to  
erroneous assumptions about the functionality of certain configuration options.  
l The star symbol indicates configuration option groups which are valid in Multiport mode.  
A The solid arrow indicates configuration option groups which are valid in Singleport mode.  
Throughout these tables, two selections frequently appear on the LCD: Enable and Disable. Unless  
otherwise stated, Enable selects a configuration option and makes it available for use; Disable  
makes a configuration option unavailable for use.  
NOTE  
In some countries, the range of allowable values for some  
configuration options is restricted. The modem accepts any  
selection, but sets the configuration option to the closest legal value.  
The actual value accepted by the modem appears when the F2 key  
is pressed to enter a selection.  
The remainder of this chapter discusses each Multiport and Singleport mode configuration option  
group in detail.  
Multiport Mode l  
The Multiport mode’s configuration options are arranged by functionality into the following:  
DTE Interface (Table 4-1)  
Line Dialer (Table 4-2)  
Dial Line (Table 4-3)  
Leased Line (Table 4-4)  
Test (Table 4-5)  
Misc (Table 4-6)  
The following graphic represents the structure of the configuration options in Multiport mode.  
4-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Multiport Mode  
V.42/  
MNP/  
Buffer  
Test  
Misc  
DTE  
Interface  
DTE  
Dialer  
Line  
Dialer  
Dial  
Line  
Leased_Line  
Security  
AutoAnswerRing#  
Dialer Type  
Dial Modulation  
Dial Line Rate  
Autorate  
V32bis Override  
Dial Tx Level  
Train Time  
LeaseModulation  
LeasedLine Rate  
Leased Mode  
Test Timeout  
V54 Address  
V54 Device Type  
StrapsWhenDisc  
Speaker Control  
Speaker Volume  
Access frm Remt  
RemAccssPasswrd  
Dir#1_Callback  
NMS_Call_Msgs  
NetworkPosition  
NetMngmtAddress  
Diag Connection  
Link Delay(sec)  
DialTone Detect  
Blind Dial Paus  
BusyTone Detect  
"," Pause Time  
NoAnswer Timout  
Fast Disconnect  
Line Crnt Disc  
Long Space Disc  
No Carrier Disc  
No Data Disc  
Autorate  
V32bis Override  
Leased Tx Level  
Asymmetric Rate  
Auto Dial Back  
AutoDialStandby  
SpecialStandby  
DialStandbyTime  
CarrierOn Level  
Lease Lookback  
Dual_Leased_Ln  
BackupLine Check  
Asymmetric Rate  
Auto Make Busy  
MUX  
Copy  
Port 1 Port 2* Port 3* Port 4*  
From Port X  
To Port X or All  
MUX Mode  
–TDM/MSD  
–DTE Bridge  
Tx Clock Source  
Bakup_TXClk_Src  
CT111_Rate Cntl  
MSD Port Control  
Rate*  
Async  
EIA  
Modem MSD  
Async/Sync  
DTR Action  
DSR Control  
RTS Action  
RTS Antistream  
CTS Control  
Rate at 33.6 K Async DTE Rate  
Rate at 28.8 K Asyn #Data Bits  
Rate at 24.0 K Asyn #Stop Bits  
Rate at 19.2 K Async OverSpeed  
Rate at 16.8 K  
RTS/CTS Delay  
LSD Control  
Rate at 14.4 K  
Rate at 12.0 K  
Rate at 9600  
XTXC Clamps TXC  
CT111 Control  
Rate at 7200  
Rate at 4800  
Rate at 2400  
Rcv Remote Loop  
DTE RL (CT140)  
DTE LL (CT141)  
Port TXC Source  
DTE Alarm Mask  
Extend Main Ch.  
Upstream Port  
*Not shown when the DTE Bridge configuration option is enabled.  
495-14623-01  
NOTE  
The DTE Dialer, V.42/MNP/Buffer, and Security branches are not  
available in Multiport mode.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
DTE Interface — Multiport Mode l  
The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA-232-D (CCITT V.24) and asynchronous  
character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data  
between the DTEs and the modem.  
Table 4-1 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is newly installed) shown following  
the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line. Following  
this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F.  
Table 4-1  
(1 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
MUX Sub-Group  
MUX Mode: TDM/MSD  
Nxt TDM/MSD Disable DTE Bridge  
Mux Mode. Determines the operating mode of the multiplexer (mux).  
NOTE: If the MUX mode configuration option does not appear under the DTE Interface branch, refer to Table B-7 in  
Appendix B, Troubleshooting.  
TDM/MSD – Enables the modem as a time division multiplexer (TDM) and a modem sharing device (MSD). When the  
Mux mode configuration option is set to TDM/MSD, and at least one port has the MSD Mode setting enabled, then the  
MSD is enabled. Only the lowest numbered port in an MSD group allows strapping of the port rate, which will only be  
used when V.34 or V.32 modulation is active. For example, a tributary running TMp modulation will have the port rate  
equal to the line rate. The lowest numbered port on the control modem is recommended as the MSD output port.  
Disable – Disables MUX Mode on the modem. Refer to the Singleport Mode section in this chapter for the mux disabled  
configuration options.  
DTE Bridge – Enables the modem as a digital bridge for dial backup of a multipoint configuration by bridging the signal  
on the digital side of the Front End Processor (FEP) modems. In this configuration, only two ports can be used on the  
control and backup modems (both on the FEP side). Data received on Port 1 is transmitted across the communication  
link and looped back through Port 2. Data received across the communication link and on Port 2 is sent through Port 1.  
NOTE: DTE Bridge mode is only available when the NetworkPosition configuration option is set to Control.  
NOTE: MSD mode is only available when the NetworkPosition configuration option is set to Tributary.  
Tx Clock Source: Internal  
Nxt Internal RXC_Loop Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4  
Transmit Clock Source. Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the modem to the  
analog channel.  
NOTE: If the DTE Bridge configuration is enabled, Ports 2, 3, and 4 are not available.  
Internal – The transmit data’s clock source is derived from the modem’s internal clock. This clock is available as an  
output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
Receive Clock Loop – The modem’s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal. The derived clock is  
available as an output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
Port1 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 1.  
Port2 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 2.  
Port3 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 3.  
Port4 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 4.  
4-10  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-1  
(2 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Bakup_TXClk_Src: Internal  
Nxt Internal RXC_Loop Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4  
This configuration option only appears when Dual_Leased_Ln is configured for Enable.  
Backup Transmit Clock Source. Selects the clock reference source when operating in the Dual Leased Line Mode. This  
is a special mode in which one leased line is used to back up another.  
NOTE: If the DTE Bridge is enabled, Ports 2, 3, and 4 are not available.  
Internal – The transmit data’s clock source is derived from the modem’s internal clock. This clock is available as an  
output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
Receive Clock Loop – The modem’s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal. The derived clock is  
available as an output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
Port1 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 1.  
Port2 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 2.  
Port3 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 3.  
Port4 – The transmit data’s clock source is provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface for Port 4.  
CT111_Rate Cntl: Disable  
End Disable Fallback1 Fallback2  
This configuration option does not appear when V.34 is enabled for a leased or dial line.  
CT111 Rate Control. Allows the DTEs to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA-232-D interface. This configuration  
option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signals. CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA-232-D interface.  
Disable – Disregards all CT111 Rate Control.  
Fallback1 – Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when any of the CT111  
signals are OFF. When all of the CT111 signals are ON, the modem returns to its previous data rate.  
Fallback2 – Forces the modem to decrease two data rates (while remaining in the same modulation scheme) when any  
of the CT111 signals are OFF. When all of the CT111 signals are ON, the modem returns to its previous data rate. Note,  
Fallback2 is not available for TMp tributaries.  
NOTE: For proper CT111 operation, disable the Autorate configuration option.  
MSD Port Control: Host  
Nxt Host Modem  
This configuration option does not appear when MSD is disabled.  
Modem Sharing Device Port Control.  
Host – The host computer determines the polling sequence that controls which port transmits at any given time. When  
the DTE/DCE equipment attached to a port raises RTS (Request-to-Send) it gets to use the channel. If more than one  
port raises RTS at the same time, the transmission on the channel is garbled. The system protocol ensures that only  
one port transmits data at a time.  
Modem – The modem determines the polling sequence that controls which port transmits at a given time. The first port  
to raise RTS will receive CTS (Clear-to-Send) authorization to transmit data. When the current transmitting port lowers  
its RTS, the modem randomly polls another port with RTS raised.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-1  
(3 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Port Rate Sub-Group (One for Each Port)  
NOTE: The Port Rate Sub Group configuration options are not available in Digital Bridge mode.  
Modem MSD: Disable  
Nxt/End Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when NetworkPosition is configured for Tributary.  
Modem Modem Sharing Device. Disables or enables the MSD function on a per-port basis.  
NOTE: When the Modem MSD configuration option is enabled, port rates default to the lowest port number. For example,  
if Modem MSD is enabled for Ports 2, 3, and 4, only Port 2 rates are available.  
NOTE: When using TMp modulation on a tributary modem, port rates are not available when the Modem MSD configuration  
option is disabled.  
Rate at 33.6 K  
Nxt Disable 33600 28800 24000 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 33.6K. When the modem rate is 33,600 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable  
or 33600 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 33,600 bps.  
Rate at 28.8 K  
Nxt Disable 28800 24000 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 28.8K. When the modem rate is 28,800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option  
(Disable, 28800, or 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 28,800 bps.  
Rate at 24.0 K  
Nxt Disable 24000 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 24.0K. When the modem rate is 28,800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option  
(Disable, 24000, or 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 24,000 bps.  
Rate at 19.2 K  
Nxt Disable 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 19.2K. When the modem rate is 19,200 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable  
or 19200 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 19,200 bps.  
Rate at 16.8 K  
Nxt Disable 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 16.8K. When the modem rate is 16,800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable  
or 16800 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 16,800 bps.  
Rate at 14.4 K  
Nxt Disable 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 14.4K. When the modem rate is 14,400 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable  
or 14400 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 14,400 bps.  
Rate at 12.0 K  
Nxt Disable 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 12.0K. When the modem rate is 12,000 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable  
or 12000 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 12,000 bps.  
Rate at 9600  
Nxt Disable 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 9600. When the modem rate is 9600 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable or  
9600 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 9600 bps.  
4-12  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-1  
(4 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Rate at 7200  
Nxt Disable 7200 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 7200. When the modem rate is 7200 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable or  
7200 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 7200 bps.  
Rate at 4800  
Nxt Disable 4800 2400 1200  
Rate at 4800. When the modem rate is 4800 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable or  
4800 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 4800 bps.  
Rate at 2400  
End Disable 2400 1200  
Rate at 2400. When the modem rate is 2400 bps the port rate will be as selected by this configuration option (Disable or  
2400 to 1200). The total for all ports cannot exceed the modem rate of 2400 bps.  
Port Async Sub-Group (One for Each Port)  
Async/Sync Mode: Sync  
Nxt Sync Async  
Asynchronous/Synchronous Mode. Determines whether the port operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous  
mode.  
Async DTE Rate: =Sync  
Nxt =Sync 150 300 600 1800  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous DTE Data Rate. Identifies the asynchronous DTE’s operating rate to the modem. The asynchronous rate  
must be less than or equal to the synchronous port rate.  
NOTE: When using 150, 300 or 600 bps line rates, the port rate must be set to a minimum of 1200 bps.  
NOTE: When using 1800 bps line rate, the port rate must be set to 2400 bps.  
=Sync – The asynchronous data is equal to the synchronous rate.  
Asyn #Data Bits: 8  
Nxt 8 7 9 6  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous Number of Data Bits. Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits.  
This data length excludes start, parity, and stop bits.  
8
– Sets data length to 8 data bits.  
7 – Sets data length to 7 data bits.  
9
6
– Sets data length to 9 data bits  
– Sets data length to 6 data bits.  
Asyn #Stop Bits: 1  
Nxt 1 2  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits. Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-1  
(5 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Async OverSpeed: 1.0 %  
End 1.0 % 2.3 %  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous Overspeed. Provides rate compensation for asynchronous DTEs that may be operating at a slightly  
higher rate than the asynchronous interface of the port. It accomplishes this by shortening the duration of the stop bit.  
1.0 % – Causes the stop bit to be shortened to 87.5% of its original duration.  
2.3 % – Causes the stop bit to be shortened to 75% of its original duration.  
Port EIA Sub-Group (One for Each Port)  
DTR Action: Ignore  
Nxt Ignore Stndrd_RS232 CntrlsOnHook  
Data Terminal Ready Action. DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and  
ready for operation.  
NOTE: Only the Stndrd_RS232 setting is allowed in Austria.  
Ignore – Modem assumes DTR is always ON. This is used when the DTE does not provide DTR.  
Standard RS232 – Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA-232-D and CCITT V.24  
specifications. If this signal is not present on at least one port, the modem will not answer or dial.  
Controls On-Hook – Required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before  
the current session is terminated. When selected, the modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call  
until DTR is lowered by all DTE ports. This setting is ignored if the modem is commanded to disconnect from its own  
front panel or by the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System.  
DSR Control: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR On_Early Delay_ToData  
Data Set Ready Control. DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for  
operation.  
Standard RS232 – Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE. The modem raises DSR when it begins the  
handshake process. DSR lowers upon disconnect. The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR, CTS, and LSD  
are active. An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data. An OFF state indicates that the  
modem is not ready to receive data, and the DTE will not send data to the modem. During a Local Analog Loop and a  
Remote Digital Loop, DSR is ON.  
Forced On – Forces DSR output ON constantly. This is usually used for leased-line applications and when the DTE  
requires DSR to always be ON.  
Wink When Disconnect – DSR is normally forced ON, but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect.  
Follows DTR – When the modem receives DTR from the DTE, it sends DSR to the DTE.  
On Early – DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state. DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data  
mode. This setting is required for some modem pooling applications.  
Delay to Data – Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters  
Data mode. Normally, the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process. Use this setting when the DTE  
cannot operate with a long DSR-to-CTS delay (common for V.32bis modulation).  
4-14  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-1  
(6 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
RTS Action: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Ignore Sim_Cntl_Car  
Request-to-Send Action. RTS is a signal from the DTE indicating the DTE has data to send.  
Standard RS232 – Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal EIA-232-D operation. RTS must be ON for  
the DTE to transmit to the modem.  
Ignore – Modem assumes RTS is always ON. Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem.  
Simulated Control Carrier – RTS input controls the remote modem’s LSD signal. This is used for DTEs that require  
Line Signal Detect (LSD) to toggle ON and OFF to simulate half-duplex operation. If RTS Action is set to simulated  
control carrier, then the remote modem’s LSD Control configuration option must be set to Simulated Control Carrier.  
Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V.13 specifications. This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for  
Asynchronous mode and RTS/CTS flow control is selected.  
NOTE: Simulated Control Carrier is not available on point-to-point MSD ports.  
NOTE: Simulated Control Carrier is available on TMp tributary ports for dial backup purposes.  
RTS Antistream: Disabled  
Nxt 10msec 30msec 1min 2min 3min 5min  
This configuration option only appears when MSD is enabled, or when RTS Action is set to Sim_Cntl_Car.  
Request-to-Send Antistreaming. If enabled, the operation of the antistreaming function is as follows. If RTS is ON for a  
period exceeding the selected time, the modem will take over control of the carrier and will force the carrier OFF. The  
modem will also force CTS OFF during this time. This condition will stay in effect until the DTE turns RTS OFF. After  
this, the next time the DTE turns RTS ON, carrier will be turned ON and the RTS timer will start again.  
Disable – The antistreaming function is not in effect.  
10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min – Enables the antistreaming function and sets the maximum ON time for  
RTS before antistreaming control takes effect.  
CTS Control: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR Follows_RTS  
Clear-to-Send Control. CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE.  
Standard RS232 – In Synchronous mode, forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal EIA-232-D  
operation. The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS/CTS Delay configuration  
option. Use this setting for most synchronous applications.  
Forced On – CTS is forced ON at all times. Use this selection for most asynchronous applications.  
Wink When Disconnect – CTS is normally forced ON, but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect.  
Follows DTR – The state of CTS follows the state of DTR. When DTR turns ON, CTS turns ON. When DTR turns OFF,  
CTS turns OFF.  
Follows RTS – The state of CTS follows the state of RTS. When RTS turns ON, CTS turns ON. When RTS turns OFF,  
CTS turns OFF.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-1  
(7 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
RTS/CTS Delay: 0msec  
Nxt 0msec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec 5  
Request-to-Send/Clear-to-Send Delay. RTS/CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the  
DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE.  
NOTE: This delay is only valid in applications when it is necessary to have a short delay between the time the DTE  
raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data.  
NOTE: For this configuration option to be valid, both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be  
set to Stndrd RS232. If RTS Action is set to Ignore, RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no  
effect.  
LSD Control: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR Sim_Cntl_Car =DTR/DiscOFF  
Line Signal Detect Control. LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem. It  
is normally turned OFF to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect  
threshold.  
Standard RS232 – LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem’s carrier signal. LSD turns OFF when the  
carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold.  
Forced On – Forces LSD to be ON at all times.  
Wink When Disconnect – LSD is normally forced ON, but can be turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect.  
Follows DTR – The state of LSD follows the state of DTR. When DTR turns ON, LSD turns ON. When DTR turns OFF,  
LSD turns OFF.  
Simulated Control Carrier – LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V.13 simulated control carrier  
signaling. This is required for hosts that cannot support full-duplex operation. If LSD Control is set to simulated control  
carrier, then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set to Simulated Control Carrier.  
=DTR/Disconnect OFF – The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is  
established. In this instance, DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF. DTR must then toggle OFF and then ON again for  
LSD to turn ON. This setting is required for AT&T DATAKITr dial-out applications.  
NOTE: If LSD Control is set to =DTR/DiscOff, then the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232.  
XTXC Clamps TXC: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
External Transmit Clock Clamps Transmit Clock. Allows the port’s TXC output (Pin 15 on the EIA-232-D interface) to be  
clamped OFF when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Enable – TXC is clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Disable – TXC continues to be provided when TX Clock Source is configured for Port 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
4-16  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-1  
(8 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
CT111 Control: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option does not appear when V.34 is enabled for a leased or dial line.  
CT111 Control. Used in conjunction with CT111 Rate Control. (Refer to the Mux Sub-Group section of this table.) Allows  
the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA-232-D interface. CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA-232-D  
interface.  
Enable – The DTEs CT111 signal may be used in conjunction with CT111 Rate Control (refer to the Mux Sub-Group  
section of this table) to control modem rate.  
Disable – Disregards the DTEs CT111 signal.  
Rcv Remote Loop: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Receive Remote Loopback Response. Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued  
from a remote modem.  
DTE RL (CT140): Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
DTE Remote Loopback. Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 interface by the DTE to initiate a  
remote loopback. An Abort command or test time-out ends this test.  
Enable – The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 (CCITT 140) is turned ON.  
Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped.  
Disable – The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21.  
DTE LL (CT141): Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
DTE Local Loopback. Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local  
loopback. An Abort command or test time-out ends this test.  
Enable – The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 (CCITT 141) is turned ON. Local  
loopback ends when the signal is dropped.  
Disable – The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18.  
Port TXC Source: Internal  
End Internal External  
Port Transmit Clock Source. Determines the clock source used to clock transmit data into the port buffer from Pin 2  
(TXD) of the EIA-232-D interface. The port buffer is used to compensate for timing differences when a port is connected  
via a crossover cable to another modem’s EIA-232-D interface.  
Internal – The data input to the port buffer (from Pin 2 of the EIA-232-D interface) is clocked into the buffer using the  
modem’s transmit clock. (The modem’s transmit clock is determined by the TX Clock Source configuration option.) Data  
is removed from the buffer using this same clock.  
External – The data input to the port buffer (from Pin 2 of the EIA-232-D interface) is clocked into the buffer using the  
clock source provided on Pin 24 (XTXC) of the EIA-232-D interface. Data is removed from the buffer using the modem’s  
transmit clock. (The modem’s transmit clock is determined by the TX Clock Source configuration option.)  
NOTE: The port buffer is re-centered each time RTS is turned ON. If there is a lack of clock synchronization, frequent  
toggling of RTS will prevent the loss of data due to buffer overflow or underflow.  
DTE Alarm Mask: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
DTE Alarm Mask. Allows you to enable or disable the reporting of DTE alarms (per port) to the front panel and/or NMS.  
Enable – No not report alarms.  
Disable – Report alarms.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-1  
(9 of 9)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Extend Main Ch.: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Primary data can only be extended one link.  
Extend Main Channel. Supports extended diagnostics. Specifies whether there is main (primary) channel connectivity  
between the modem’s DTE ports and the DTE ports of modems one level below (downstream) or above (upstream) in  
the diagnostic network.  
Enable – If this configuration option is set to Enable on a port of a tributary modem, test mode is propagated to the  
modems downstream when test mode goes ON for that port.  
Disable – If this configuration option is set to Disable on a port of a tributary modem, test mode is not propagated for  
that port and primary channel data is clamped when in test mode.  
NOTE: For an extended control modem, this configuration option is used along with the upstream port number where  
the main (primary) channel is extended.  
NOTE: For an extended port using V.34 modulation, only a single port rate is used for all the modem’s line rates. Refer  
to the Extended Point-to-Point section in Appendix G.  
Upstream Port: Port1  
End Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8  
This configuration only appears when the Extended Main Channel is enabled.  
Upstream Port. When an extended control modem’s main (primary) channel is connected to a tributary modem that is  
one link above it in the diagnostic network, this configuration option is set to the port number to which it is connected on  
the tributary modem.  
4-18  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Line Dialer — Multiport Mode l  
The Line Dialer configuration options establish parameters used by the modem to answer or  
originate calls.  
Table 4-2 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-2  
(1 of 3)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
AutoAnswerRing#:  
1
Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10  
Auto-Answer Ring Count. Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an  
incoming call. For example, if this option is set to 2, then the answering modem answers after the second ring.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
Disable – If selected, the modem must be answered using either the DCP’s Answer command or the Talk/Data function.  
Refer to Talk/Data in Chapter 3, DCP Operation, for more on Manual Answer.  
Dialer Type: Tone  
Nxt Tone Pulse  
Dialer Type. Selects either tone (DTMF) dialing or pulse (rotary) dialing mode.  
NOTE: Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and in Sweden.  
DialTone Detect: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Dial Tone Detect. Sets the modem for dial tone detection (enable) or blind dialing (disable).  
NOTE: It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries.  
Enable – Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on  
both the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal.  
Disable – Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line. This is known as blind dialing. The period  
of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Paus configuration option.  
Blind Dial Paus: 2sec  
Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec  
This configuration option only appears when Dial Tone Detect is disabled.  
Blind Dial Pause. Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when Dialtone Detect is  
disabled.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
BusyTone Detect: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Busy Tone Detect. Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone (Enable) or ignore Busy Tone (Disable).  
NOTE: This configuration option is normally enabled; however, if the modem receives false busy tones, this  
configuration option can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-2  
(2 of 3)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
“,” Pause Time: 2sec  
Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec  
Pause Time. Determines the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial  
command string.  
NoAnswer Timout: 45sec  
Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec  
No Answer Abort Time-out. Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call  
attempt when no answer tone is received.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
Fast Disconnect: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Fast Disconnect. Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE  
or its own diagnostic control panel.  
Disable – The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space  
disconnect. This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a  
disconnection.  
Enable – Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a  
disconnect command.  
NOTE: This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem, which may interpret the  
disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect.  
Line Crnt Disc: Enab(>8msec)  
Nxt Enab(>8msec) Enab(>90msec) Disable  
This configuration option does not appear on Models 3920-A1-401 and 3921-B1-001.  
Line Current Disconnect. Determines the modem’s response to short interruptions of line current. The loss of line  
current is one method of disconnecting a call.  
Enable > 8-millisecond – Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds.  
Enable > 90-millisecond – Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90-milliseconds. Use this  
setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set to Enab(>8msec).  
Disable – Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting.  
Long Space Disc: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Long Space Disconnect. Determines the modem’s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote  
modem before it goes on-hook. Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call.  
Enable – Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE. For modulations lower than 4800 bps the  
modem’s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect.  
Disable – Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE. Modem will not transmit a long  
space disconnect.  
NOTE: In MUX Mode all enabled DTE ports on the remote modem must be in a continuous spacing condition.  
4-20  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-2  
(3 of 3)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
No Carrier Disc: 2sec  
Nxt 2sec Disable 5sec 10sec 20sec  
No Carrier Disconnect. If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem, it disconnects the call. This  
configuration option determines how long carrier is OFF before the modem disconnects. Loss of carrier is one method of  
disconnecting a call.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
2, 5, 10, 20 sec – Modem disconnects if carrier turns OFF for more than 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or  
20 seconds.  
Disable – Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns OFF.  
No Data Disc: Disable  
Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min  
No Data Disconnect. Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted and received within a specified amount  
of time.  
NOTE: The factory default value is country dependent.  
Disable – Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow.  
10, 30, 60 min – Modem disconnects if data is not received and transmitted within 10-minute, 30-minute, or 60-minute  
intervals.  
Auto Make Busy: Disable  
End Disable Enable  
This option is only valid on Model 3921Plus.  
Automatic Make Busy. Forces the modem to go off-hook under the following conditions: if a local analog loopback is  
performed, a self-test is performed, or if the modem is switched to the service line.  
NOTE: This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user’s Private Branch  
Exchange (PBX). The Make Busy Network Interface Module (NIM) must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000  
Series Carrier. Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual  
.
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Dial Line — Multiport Mode l  
The Dial Line configuration options are used to configure the modem for operation over dial lines.  
Table 4-3 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-3  
(1 of 2)  
Dial Line Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Dial Modulation: V34  
Nxt V34 V32_Family  
Dial Modulation. Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Dial Line rates by limiting the number  
of Dial Line Rate configuration options. Only one group of Dial Line rates is displayed depending on the setting of the  
Dial Modulation configuration option (V.34, V.32bis, and V.32 terbo).  
Dial Line Rate: 28800(V34)  
Nxt 33600 28800(V34) 24000(V34) 19200(V34) 16800(V34) 14400(V34) 12000(V34) 9600(V34) 7200(V34)  
4800(V34) 2400(V34) 19200(V32t) 16800(V32t) 14400(V32b) 12000(V32b) 9600(V32b) 7200(V32b)  
4800(V32b)  
Dial Line Rate. This configuration option determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial  
lines. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.  
33600, 28800(V34), 24000(V34), 19200(V34), 16800(V34), 14400(V34), 12000(V34), 9600(V34), 7200(V34),  
4800(V34), 2400(V34) – The modem operates using V.34 modulation at the data rate selected.  
19200(V32t), 16800(V32t), 14400(V32b), 12000(V32b), 9600(V32b), 7200(V32b), 4800(V32b) – The modem operates  
using V.32bis or V.32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected.  
Autorate: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96  
Autorate. Once connected, the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired. When line  
conditions improve, the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support. This autorating only  
occurs between 19,200 bps and 4800 bps during V.32, V.32bis, and V.32 terbo connections, and 33.6 to 2400 for V.34.  
Start at 48 and Start at 96 – Set the maximum connect rate for V.32, V.32bis, and V.32 terbo connections.  
V32bis Override: Disable  
Nxt Disable 2400  
This configuration option is ignored unless Dial Line Rate is 4800(V32b).  
V.32bis Override. Activates the Paradyne Point-to-Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation. Allows the modem to use a  
non-standard, point-to-point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps.  
NOTE: This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems.  
4-22  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-3  
(2 of 2)  
Dial Line Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Dial Tx Level: Permissv(–9)  
Nxt Permissv(–9) –10 –11 –12 –13 –14 –15 –16 –17 –18 –19 –20 –21 –22 –23 –24 –25 –26 –27 –28 –29  
–30 –31 –32  
Dial Transmit Level. Selects the modem’s transmit power level over dial lines. The transmit output level can be selected  
in 1 dBm decrements from –9 dBm to –32 dBm.  
NOTE: In North America the range of allowable values is –10 dBm to –32 dBm, plus Permissive (–9 dBm). This  
configuration option is locked in other countries (the user cannot change the level).  
NOTE: The factory default setting is country dependent. Default is Permissv(–9) in North America.  
Train Time: Long  
End Long Short  
Train Time. Controls V.34 and V.32 family train time. Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are used  
during the handshaking sequence for both dial and 4-wire/2-wire leased-line applications.  
Long – Selects long train. Use this setting whenever far-end frequency offset (phase roll) may be encountered. This is  
usually only required when transmitting over satellite links.  
Short – Allows the modem to train-up faster when using V.32 terbo, V.32bis, or V.32 modulation.  
Asymmetric Rate: Disabled  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option does not appear unless V.34 is enabled.  
Asymmetric Rate. Controls rate symmetry when running V.34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V.34 modulation  
from using equal transmit and receive rates.  
Enable – The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates can be different) when running  
V.34 modulation. The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems.  
Disable – The modem operates in symmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates are identical) when running V.34  
modulation. Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Leased Line — Multiport Mode l  
The Leased Line configuration options only appear when the Sync Leased factory preset template  
is selected. They are used to configure the modem for operation over leased lines.  
Table 4-4 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-4  
(1 of 3)  
Leased Line Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
LeaseModulation: V34  
Nxt V34 V32_Family TMp  
Lease Modulation. Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Leased Line rates by limiting the  
number of Leased Line Rate configuration options. Only one group of Leased Line rates is displayed depending on the  
setting of the Lease Modulation configuration option (V.34, V.32bis, V.32 terbo, and TMp).  
LeasedLine Rate: 28800(V34)  
Nxt 33600 28800(V34) 24000(V34) 19200(V34) 16800(V34) 14400(V34) 12000(V34) 9600(V34) 7200(V34)  
4800(V34) 2400(V34) 19200(V32t) 16800(V32t) 14400(V32b) 12000(V32b) 9600(V32b) 7200(V32b)  
4800(V32b) 19200(TMp) 14400(TMp) 9600(TMp) 7200(TMp) 4800(TMp) 2400(TMp)  
Leased-Line Rate. Determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines. These  
modulation schemes are available on 2-wire or 4-wire lease.  
33600, 28800(V.34), 24000(V34), 19200(V34), 16800(V34), 14400(V34), 12000(V34), 9600(V34), 7200(V34),  
4800(V34), 2400(V34) – The modem operates using V.34 modulation at the data rate selected.  
19200(V32t), 16800(V32t), 14400(V32b), 12000(V32b), 9600(V32b), 7200(V32b), 4800(V32b) – The modem operates  
using V.32bis or V.32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected.  
19200(TMp), 14400(TMp), 9600(TMp), 7200(TMp), 4800(TMp), 2400(TMp) – The modem operates in Trellis Multipoint  
mode at the data rate selected. These modulation schemes are available on 4-wire leased lines. The 19200(TMp)  
modulation does not appear on tributary modems.  
Leased Mode: 4WLL-Ans  
Nxt 4WLL-Ans 4WLL-Orig 2WLL-Orig 2WLL-Ans  
Leased Mode. Sets the modem for either 2-wire or 4-wire operation in Answer mode (receiving a call) or 2-wire or 4-wire  
operation in Originate (initiating a call) mode.  
NOTE: For proper operation of V.34 or V.32 modulations over leased lines, one modem must be set to Originate mode  
and the other set to Answer mode.  
For Sync Leased Originate Mode, Async Leased Originate Mode and Trellis Multipoint Control Mode, 4-wire Originate is  
the factory default.  
Autorate: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Autorate. Once connected, the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired. When line  
conditions improve, the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support. This autorating only  
occurs between 19,200 bps and 4800 bps during V.32, V.32bis, V.32 terbo connections, and 33.6 to 2400 for V.34.  
4-24  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-4  
(2 of 3)  
Leased Line Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
V32bis Override: Disable  
Nxt Disable 2400  
This configuration option is ignored unless Leased-Line Rate is 4800(V32b).  
V.32bis Override. Activates the Paradyne Point-to-Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation. Allows the modem to use a  
non-standard, point-to-point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps.  
NOTE: This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems.  
Leased Tx Level: 0  
Nxt 0 –1 –2 –3 –4 5 –6 7 8 9 –10 –11 –12 –13 –14 –15  
Leased Transmit Level. Selects the modem’s transmit power level over leased-lines. The transmit output level can be  
selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to –15 dBm.  
NOTE: The leased TX level is limited to –1 dBm in all countries except North America.  
NOTE: The factory default setting is country dependent. Default is 0 in North America.  
The AT command is S-Register S45=n, where n is from 0 to 15 corresponding to 0 dBm to –15 dBm.  
Asymmetric Rate: Disabled  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option does not appear unless V.34 is enabled.  
Asymmetric Rate. Controls rate symmetry when running V.34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V.34 modulation  
from using equal transmit and receive rates.  
Enable – The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates can be different) when running  
V.34 modulation. The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems.  
Disable – The modem operates in symmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates are identical) when running  
V.34 modulation. Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option.  
Auto Dial Back: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup  
Automatic Dial Backup. Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications  
with the remote modem when the leased lines fail.  
NOTE: This configuration option must be set to Disable for TMp (Control) operation.  
NOTE: In point-to-point applications, this configuration option must be set to Enable in both the local and remote  
modem. The answering modem must have its Auto-Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled. Refer to  
the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto-Answer.  
NOTE: When this configuration option is enabled, the originating modem will attempt the dial backup for a maximum of  
10 call attempts, with a 2 minute delay between calls. This function can only be reset with a completed manual  
dial backup, a power cycle, or using NMS.  
Fast Backup – Only used in special applications requiring a shortened delay time from the failure of the leased lines to  
the initiation of the automatic dial backup.  
AutoDialStandby: Disable  
Nxt Disable 15min 1hr 4hr Test(2min) Adv 15min Adv 30min Adv 1 hr TestAdv2min  
Automatic Dial Standby. Permits a modem operating on dial lines (regardless of the method of dialing origination) to  
check the quality of the leased lines periodically and, if they are good, to disconnect from the dial lines and resume  
operations on the leased lines. The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is  
determined by the configuration option. These intervals are 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 4 hours. The Test(2min) and  
TestAdv2min selections are for testing purposes only. The Adv 15min, Adv 30min, and Adv 1 hr selections cause the  
modem to evaluate the leased lines continuously in a manner which is non-disruptive to the dial-line communication.  
NOTE: For Automatic Dial Standby to operate properly, it must be enabled prior to a backup occurring.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-4  
(3 of 3)  
Leased Line Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
SpecialStandby: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option is only available if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for 15min, 1hr, 4hr or  
Test(2min) and Leased mode is configured for Originate mode,  
or  
if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for Adv15min, Adv30min, Adv1hr or TestAdv(2min).  
Special Standby. Used to support Automatic Dial Standby configurations when a third modem is used for the dial  
backup. When the leased line is restored, the Special Standby configuration allows the leased-line modems to return  
service to the original point-to-point modems.  
NOTE: When the modems are set for normal dial standby (15min, 1hr 4hr, or Test(2min)), the Special Standby  
configuration option allows the originate modem to test the lease connection in one direction before interrupting  
primary data on the dial lines.  
NOTE: When the modems are set for advanced dial standby (Adv15min, Adv 30min, Adv1hr or Adv Test(2min)), the  
Special Standby configuration option allows a non-interruptive algorithm to test the original point-to-point lease  
connection in both directions before interrupting primary data on the dial lines.  
DialStandbyTime: 10min  
Nxt 10min 5min 1min  
Dial Standby Time. Selects the amount of time that a dial circuit is held after returning to the leased lines.  
CarrierOn Level: 43dbm  
Nxt 43dbm –26dbm  
Carrier On Level. Controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines. When the power level of the receive carrier  
signal drops 2 dBm below this level (either –26 dBm or –43 dBm), LSD turns OFF. When the carrier signal is greater  
than this level, LSD turns ON.  
Lease Lookback: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Lease Lookback. While operating on backup lines, this configuration option allows the modem to test the primary 4-wire  
leased lines for connectivity by detecting line energy across the normal line bandwidth. This test of the primary lines will  
not interrupt the data flow on the backup lines. The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends.  
Dual_Leased_Ln: Disable  
End Disable Enable  
Dual Leased Line. Allows the 2-wire backup facility to function as a 2-wire leased line facility. When this configuration  
option is disabled, the backup facility is a 2-wire dial line.  
NOTE: Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem (see Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2).  
Except for dialing, ring indication, and call progression functions, you control the backup function as if it were a  
normal dial backup.  
NOTE: When the Dual Leased Line configuration option is changed, the modem will reset.  
BackupLine Check: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Dual Leased Line is enabled.  
This configuration option does not appear when V.34 is enabled.  
Backup Line Check. Tests the backup circuit for availability while the modem is operating on the primary 4-wire leased  
lines. The test involves detecting line energy across the normal bandwidth. This test of the backup lines will not interrupt  
the data flow on the primary lines. The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends.  
NOTE: In network applications where the modem is in backup mode and is connected to a modem other than the  
modem connected to the primary leased-line, enabling this configuration can cause problems.  
4-26  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Test — Multiport l  
The Test configuration option determines the duration of a test.  
Table 4-5 shows the Test configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync Leased  
factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown following the  
colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line. Following this  
is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F.  
Table 4-5  
Test Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Test Timeout: Disable  
End Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec  
Test Time-out. Determines how long a test runs before aborting.  
Disable – Allows a test to run indefinitely.  
30, 60, or 240 seconds – Allows the test to run for 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 240 seconds.  
V54 Address: Disable  
Nxt Disable (Address Values)  
V.54 Address. Determines which remote 392xPlus modem is placed into a remote loopback test. This test can be either  
a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback. This type of addressing should be used for extended data circuits  
(tail circuits).  
Disable – This is used for normal point-to-point leased-line and dial networks.  
Address Values – 01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 0B, 0D, 0F, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 1B, 1D, 1F, 25, 27, 2B, 2D, 2F, 33, 35, 37, 3B, 3D,  
3F, 55, 57, 5B, 5F, 6F, 77, or 7F. This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a  
loopback test. This configuration option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems, used in extended  
data circuits (tail circuits), can be commanded to loopback.  
The AT command for Disable is S-Register S53=0.  
The AT command for V.54 Address is S-Register S53=n, where n is a value from 1 to 34.  
V54 Device Type: Peripheral  
End Peripheral Intermediate  
This configuration option only appears when V54 Address is enabled.  
V.54 Device Type. Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network.  
Peripheral – The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back-to-back with another  
modem.  
Intermediate – The modem is either of the two modems connected back-to-back.  
The AT command for Peripheral is S-Register S54=0.  
The AT command for Intermediate is S-Register S54=1.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Misc — Multiport l  
The Miscellaneous configuration options determine specifics for various functions, including  
network management parameters and remote modem access.  
Table 4-6 shows each Misc (Miscellaneous) configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with  
the Sync Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed)  
shown following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the  
second line. Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are  
listed in Appendix F.  
Table 4-6  
(1 of 3)  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
StrapsWhenDisc: No_Change  
Nxt No_Change Reload  
Straps When Disconnected. Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active (Saved) configuration area  
are reloaded to Active (Operating) when a disconnect occurs. This is appropriate in Async Dial Mode only.  
No Change – Configuration options do not change if a disconnect occurs.  
Reload – The Active (Operating) configuration area, which controls modem operation, is reloaded from the Active  
(Saved) configuration area when a disconnect occurs. This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable  
to start the modem from a known condition after every call.  
Speaker Control: OnUntilCarr  
Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On  
Speaker Control. Determines if the speaker is OFF, ON until carrier signal is received by the modem, or ON all the time.  
NOTE: Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch; however, a reset or power cycle will  
restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings.  
Speaker Volume: Medium  
Nxt Medium Low High  
Speaker Volume. Controls the level of speaker volume.  
NOTE: Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch; however, a reset or power cycle will  
restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings.  
Access frm Remt: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Access from Remote. Determines if your modem’s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line.  
CAUTION: If this configuration option is disabled, the modem cannot be accessed by another modem.  
Enable – Allows access from a remote modem.  
Disable – Does not allow access from a remote modem.  
NOTE: The remote modem must be a 392xPlus modem or a 391x Series modem.  
RemAccssPasswrd: 00000000  
Nxt  
"
00000000  
Remote Access Password. Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of  
a local modem. The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem.  
CAUTION: A remote access password should be selected for security purposes.  
NOTE: If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable, the password has no effect.  
4-28  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-6  
(2 of 3)  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Dir#1_Callback: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Directory Location 1 Callback. This configuration option controls whether or not the modem’s single number callback  
function is used.  
Disable – Modem does not use the single number callback function.  
Enable – Modem answers a call, disconnects, and dials the number stored in directory location 1.  
NMS_Call_Msgs: CallCnct&Prg  
Nxt CallCnct&Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly  
NMS Call Messages. Determines if the modem status and/or call summary information is sent to the NMS. The modem  
can itemize status, such as CallProgress messages, or it can report a summary of activity, such as Call Connect  
messages, to the NMS.  
Call Connect & Progress – Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS.  
Disable – Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS.  
Call Connect Only – The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then transmits a summary of  
these statistics to the NMS. The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports.  
Call Progress Only – The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS. These messages include  
any events that can display on the LCD.  
NOTE: For 6800 Series NMS applications, Disable must be selected.  
NetworkPosition: Tributary  
End Tributary Control  
Network Position Identification. Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem.  
NOTE: Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
NOTE: This configuration option is only applicable for leased-line network management applications.  
For the Model 3920Plus, Tributary is the factory default.  
For the Model 3921Plus, Control is the factory default.  
NetMngmtAddress: 256  
Nxt  
"
256  
This configuration option is not available in point-to-point tributaries, which are always set to address 01.  
Network Management Address. Determines the address used when accessing a modem from the NMS or when using  
DCP functions that require network management addresses. Within a network link, a control modem can communicate  
with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem’s network management address. Each TMp tributary modem must  
have a different network management address. Address values range from 001 to 256.  
NOTE: Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-6  
(3 of 3)  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Multiport Mode l  
Diag Connection: Modem(DC)  
Nxt Modem(DC) NMS(CC) Disable  
This configuration option does not appear when the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and NetworkPosition is  
configured for Tributary.  
Diagnostic Connection. Allows the configuration of the serial diagnostic port of the modem to be either a diagnostic  
channel that is connected to another modem (DC), or a control channel that is connected to a network management  
device (CC).  
NOTE: Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
Modem (DC) – Selects the Diagnostic Channel.  
NMS(CC) – Selects the Control Channel.  
Disable – Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port.  
Link Delay(sec): 0 1  
Nxt 0 1 2 5 10 20 50  
Link Delay Seconds. Controls the length of time (in seconds) a modem will wait for responses from the downstream  
devices. This configuration option is used to calculate protocol timers for polling and normal selection.  
NOTE: The estimated roundtrip delay in the diagnostic link is entered.  
4-30  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Singleport Mode A  
In Singleport mode, the modem’s configuration options are arranged into nine groups based on  
functionality:  
DTE Interface (Table 4-7)  
DTE Dialer (Table 4-8)  
Line Dialer (Table 4-9)  
Dial Line (Table 4-10)  
Leased Line (Table 4-11)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer (Table 4-12)  
Test (Table 4-13)  
Misc (Table 4-14)  
Security (Chapter 6)  
The following graphic represents the structure of the configuration options in Singleport mode.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Singleport Mode  
Test  
Security  
DTE  
Interface  
Line  
Dialer  
Leased_Line  
AutoAnswerRing#  
Dialer Type  
LeaseModulation  
LeasedLine Rate  
Leased Mode  
DTE RL(CT140)  
DTE LL(CT141)  
Test Timeout  
Rcv Remote Loop  
V54 Address  
MUX*  
Port 1*  
DialTone Detect  
Blind Dial Paus  
BusyTone Detect  
"," Pause Time  
NoAnswer Timout  
Fast Disconnect  
Line Crnt Disc  
Long Space Disc  
No Carrier Disc  
No Data Disc  
MUX Mode Async/Sync Mode  
Async DTE Rate  
Asyn #Data Bits  
Asyn Parity Bit  
Asyn #Stop Bits  
DTR Action  
Autorate  
V32bis Override  
Leased Tx Level  
Asymmetric Rate  
Auto Dial Back  
AutoDialStandby  
SpecialStandby  
DialStandbyTime  
CarrierOn Level  
V27bis Train  
V54 Device Type  
DSR Control  
RTS Action  
RTS Antistream  
CTS Control  
RTS/CTS Delay  
LSD Control  
Auto Make Busy  
MakeBusyVia DTR  
V29 TrainOnData  
V29 Retrain  
Tx Clock Source  
Bakup_TXClk_Src  
XTXC Clamps TXC  
CT111_Rate Cntl  
DTE_Rate=VF  
Extend Main Ch.  
Upstream Port  
V29 Link Config  
TMp Train Time  
TMp TxPreemphis  
Lease Lookback  
Dual_Leased_Ln  
BackupLine Check  
V.42/  
MNP/Buffer  
Misc  
DTE  
Dialer  
Dial  
Line  
DTE Dialer Type  
AT Escape Char  
Escape GuardTim  
BreakForceEscap  
CommandCharEcho  
CarriageRtn Char  
Backspace Char  
Linefeed Char  
Dial Modulation  
Dial Line Rate  
Automode  
Err Contrl Mode  
V42bis Compress  
MNP5 Compress  
EC Negotiat Bfr  
EC Fallbck Char  
Flw Cntl of DTE  
Flw Cntl of Mdm  
XON/XOFF Psthru  
Mdm/Mdm FlowCtl  
Break Buffr Ctl  
Send Break Cntl  
BuffrDiscDelay  
Max Frame Size  
CellularEnhance  
RdcdAsyncBufSiz  
StrapsWhenDisc  
Speaker Control  
Speaker Volume  
Access frm Remt  
RemAccssPasswrd  
Dir#1_Callback  
NMS_Call_Msgs  
NetworkPosition  
NetMngmtAddress  
Diag Connection  
Link Delay(sec)  
Autorate  
V32bis Override  
Dial Tx Level  
V22b Guard Tone  
Train Time  
Result Codes  
Asymmetric Rate  
ExtendResltCode  
ResultCode Form  
AT Cmnd Mode  
V25bis Coding  
V25bis IdleFill  
V25b NewLineChr  
495-14624-01  
*Does not appear on Singleport modems.  
4-32  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
DCP Configuration  
DTE Interface — Singleport Mode A  
The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA-232-D (CCITT V.24) and asynchronous  
character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data  
between the DTE and the modem.  
Table 4-7 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-7  
(1 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Async/Sync Mode: Sync  
Nxt Sync Async  
Asynchronous/Synchronous Mode. Determines whether the modem operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous  
mode. If the AT command set is enabled and this configuration option is set to Sync, then the modem operates in Async  
mode when offline.  
For Async Dial, Async Leased and UNIX Dial, Async is the factory default.  
The AT commands for Async Mode are &M0 or &Q0.  
The AT commands for Sync Mode are &M1, &M2, &M3, or &Q1, &Q2, &Q3.  
Async DTE Rate: 19200  
Nxt 19200 57600 38400 28800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 0–300  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous DTE Data Rate. Identifies the asynchronous DTE’s operating rate to the modem. Data rates from  
57,600 bps to 300 bps are supported.  
NOTE: To prevent losing data in 57,600 bps applications, a 16650 UART on the PC’s serial port is required, as well as  
a communications package which can take advantage of its 16-byte buffer. In addition, a 386 PC (25 MHz or  
faster) is required, and the RS232 cable length must be minimized to reduce capacitance.  
NOTE: To configure the Async DTE Rate differently than the modem rate, ensure that the Error Control Mode  
configuration option (see the V.42/MNP/Buffer — Singleport Mode section) is set to BufferMode.  
The AT prefix determines Async DTE Rate.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-7  
(2 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Asyn #Data Bits: 8  
Nxt 8 7 9(DirectMde) 6(DirectMde)  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous Number of Data Bits. Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits.  
This data length excludes start, parity, and stop bits.  
8 – Sets data length to 8 data bits.  
7 – Sets data length to 7 data bits.  
9(DirectMode) – Sets data length to 9 data bits. Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct  
Mode.  
6(DirectMode) – Sets data length to 6 data bits. Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct  
Mode.  
NOTE: If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V.25bis Async, then the total character size must  
equal 10 bits. Total character size consists of start, data, parity, and stop bits. V.25bis Async must use 7 data  
bits with even parity and 1 stop bit. The total character size for Error Control mode, Direct mode, or Buffer mode  
must be 11 bits or less.  
The AT prefix determines the async character length.  
Asyn Parity Bit: None  
Nxt None Even Odd Mark Space  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous Parity Bit. Determines the type of asynchronous parity bit. The parity of the DTE must match the parity of  
the modem. Parity options include None, Even, Odd, Mark, or Space.  
None – No parity bit is used.  
Even – Parity bit is set so that total number of 1’s in data bits plus parity bit is even.  
Odd – Parity bit is set so that total number of 1’s in data bits plus parity bit is odd.  
Mark – Parity bit is always set to 1. Only valid if Async #Data Bits configuration option is set to 7.  
Space – Parity bit is always set to 0. Only valid if Async #Data Bits configuration option is set to 7.  
NOTE: If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V.25bis Async, then the total character size must  
equal 10 bits. Total character size consists of start, data, parity, and stop bits. V.25bis Async must use 7 data  
bits with even parity and 1 stop bit. The total character size for Error Control mode, Direct mode, or Buffer mode  
must be 11 bits or less.  
The AT prefix determines parity of the async character.  
Asyn #Stop Bits: 1  
Nxt 1 2  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits. Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character.  
NOTE: If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V.25bis Async, then the total character size must  
equal 10 bits. Total character size consists of start, data, parity, and stop bits. V.25bis Async must use 7 data  
bits with even parity and 1 stop bit. The total character size for Error Control mode, Direct mode, or Buffer mode  
must be 11 bits or less.  
The AT prefix determines the number of stop bits via autobauding.  
4-34  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-7  
(3 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
DTR Action: Ignore  
Nxt Ignore Stndrd_RS232 CntrlsOnHook CntrlsTxMute  
Data Terminal Ready Action. DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and  
ready for operation.  
Ignore – Modem assumes DTR is always ON. This is used when the DTE does not provide DTR.  
Standard RS232 – Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA-232-D and CCITT V.24  
specifications. If this signal is not present, the modem will not answer or dial.  
Controls On-Hook – Required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before  
the current session is terminated. When selected, the modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call  
until DTR is lowered by the attached DTE. This setting is ignored if the modem is commanded to disconnect from its  
own front panel or by the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System.  
Controls Transmitter Mute – Mutes the transmitter whenever DTR drops on the DTE interface. This selection is valid  
only in the V32bis modulation and can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial  
backup.  
NOTE: If V.25bis mode is used, then this configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232. The DTE must provide  
DTR to dial or answer a call.  
NOTE: When operating over the dial network, this selection forces DTR Action to behave as CT108/2 (Data Terminal  
Ready). If DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to DTR=Direct 1, then DTR Action behaves as CT108/1  
(Connect Data Set to Line).  
The AT command for Ignore is &D0.  
The AT commands for Standard RS232 are &D1, &D2 or &D3.  
The AT command for CntrlsOnHook is &D4.  
The AT command for CntrlsTxMute is &D5.  
DSR Control: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR On_Early Delay_ToData  
Data Set Ready Control. DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for  
operation.  
Standard RS232 – Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE. The modem raises DSR when it begins the  
handshake process. DSR lowers upon disconnect. The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR, CTS, and LSD  
are active. An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data. An OFF state indicates that the  
modem is not ready to receive data, and the DTE will not send data to the modem. During a Local Analog Loop and a  
Remote Digital Loop, DSR is ON.  
Forced On – Forces DSR output ON constantly. This is usually used for leased-line applications and when the DTE  
requires DSR to always be ON.  
Wink When Disconnect – DSR is normally forced ON, but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect.  
Follows DTR – When the modem receives DTR from the DTE, it sends DSR to the DTE.  
On Early – DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state. DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data  
mode. This setting is required for some modem pooling applications.  
Delay to Data – Operation is similar to the Standard RS232 except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters  
Data mode. Normally, the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process. Use this setting when the DTE  
cannot operate with a long DSR-to-CTS delay (common for V.32bis modulation) or when dial access security is enabled  
and requires a DTE-side password entry. Often, the DTE cannot accept the long delay between DSR and CTS turning  
ON due to the remote user entering the DTE-side password.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-7  
(4 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
DSR Control: Stndrd_RS232 (Cont.)  
The AT command for Forced On is &S0.  
The AT command for Standard RS232 is &S1.  
The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is &S2.  
The AT command for Follows DTR is &S3.  
The AT command for On Early is &S4.  
The AT command for Delay to Data is &S5.  
RTS Action: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Ignore Sim_Cntl_Car Cntl_Car  
Request-to-Send Action. RTS is a signal from the DTE indicating the DTE has data to send.  
Standard RS232 – Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal EIA-232-D operation. RTS must be ON for  
the DTE to transmit to the modem.  
Ignore – Modem assumes RTS is always ON. Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem.  
Simulated Control Carrier – RTS input controls the remote modem’s LSD signal. This is used for DTEs that require  
Line Signal Detect (LSD) to toggle ON and OFF to simulate half-duplex operation. If RTS Action is set to simulated  
control carrier, then the remote modem’s LSD Control configuration option must be set to Simulated Control Carrier.  
Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V.13 specifications. This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for  
Asynchronous mode and RTS/CTS flow control is selected.  
Control Carrier – Allows the DTE’s RTS signal to control the modem’s carrier signal. When RTS is ON, carrier is  
present on the VF line. When RTS turns OFF, carrier is not present. This is only valid for V.29 and V.27bis leased-line  
modulations. Auto Dial Backup is always disabled for this setting.  
The AT command for Standard RS232 is &R0.  
The AT command for Ignore is &R1.  
The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is &R2.  
The AT command for Control Carrier is &R3.  
RTS Antistream: 10sec  
Nxt 10sec Disable 30sec 1min 2min 3min 5min  
This configuration option only appears in TMp Tributary mode, or when RTS_Action is configured for Cntl_Car  
(V.29 and V.27bis).  
Request-to-Send Antistreaming. If enabled, the operation of the antistreaming function is as follows. If RTS is ON for a  
period exceeding the selected time, the modem will take over control of the carrier and will force the carrier OFF. The  
modem will also force CTS OFF during this time. This condition will stay in effect until the DTE turns RTS OFF. After  
this, the next time the DTE turns RTS ON, carrier will be turned ON and the RTS timer will start again.  
Disable – The antistreaming function is not in effect.  
10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 5 min – Enables the antistreaming function and sets the maximum ON time for  
RTS before antistreaming control takes effect.  
The AT command is S-Register S72=n, where n is 0 for Disable, 1 for 10 sec, 2 for 30 sec, 3 for 1 min, 4 for 2 min,  
5 for 3 min, and 6 for 5 min.  
4-36  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-7  
(5 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
CTS Control: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR Follows_RTS  
Clear-to-Send Control. CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE.  
Standard RS232 – In Synchronous mode, forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal EIA-232-D  
operation. The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS/CTS Delay configuration  
option. Use this setting for most synchronous applications. In AT Command mode, CTS goes low just prior to DSR  
going active and goes high when the modem enters Data mode. This operation prevents losing data in applications  
which begin transmitting as soon as DSR and CTS are both active.  
Forced On – CTS is forced ON at all times. Use this selection for most asynchronous applications.  
Wink When Disconnect – CTS is normally forced ON, but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect. Use  
this for most UNIXr applications.  
Follows DTR – The state of CTS follows the state of DTR. When DTR turns ON, CTS turns ON. When DTR turns OFF,  
CTS turns OFF.  
Follows RTS – The state of CTS follows the state of RTS. When RTS turns ON, CTS turns ON. When RTS turns OFF,  
CTS turns OFF.  
NOTE: When CTS flow control or CTS/RTS flow control is enabled, CTS will turn ON and OFF regardless of the setting  
of CTS Control.  
The AT command for Forced On is \D0.  
The AT command for Standard RS232 is \D1.  
The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is \D2.  
The AT command for Follows DTR is \D3.  
The AT command for Follows RTS is \D4.  
RTS/CTS Delay: 0msec  
Nxt 0msec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec  
Request-to-Send/Clear-to-Send Delay. RTS/CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the  
DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE.  
NOTE: This delay is only valid in Async Direct mode and synchronous applications when it is necessary to have a short  
delay between the time the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send  
data.  
NOTE: For this configuration option to be valid, both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be  
set to Stndrd RS232. If RTS Action is set to Ignore, RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no  
effect.  
The AT command is S-Register S26=n, where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 10 millisecond increments.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-7  
(6 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
LSD Control: Stndrd_RS232  
Nxt Stndrd_RS232 Forced_On WinkWhenDisc Follows_DTR Sim_Cntl_Car =DTR/DiscOFF  
Line Signal Detect Control. LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem. It  
is normally turned OFF to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect  
threshold.  
Standard RS232 – LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem’s carrier signal. LSD turns OFF when the  
carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold.  
Forced On – Forces LSD to be ON at all times.  
Wink When Disconnect – LSD is normally forced ON, but can be turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect.  
This is used for UNIXr DTEs.  
Follows DTR – The state of LSD follows the state of DTR. When DTR turns ON, LSD turns ON. When DTR turns OFF,  
LSD turns OFF.  
Simulated Control Carrier – LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V.13 simulated control carrier  
signaling. This is required for hosts that cannot support full-duplex operation. If LSD Control is set to simulated control  
carrier, then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set to Simulated Control Carrier.  
=DTR/Disconnect OFF – The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is  
established. In this instance, DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF. DTR must then toggle OFF and then ON again for  
LSD to turn ON. This setting is required for AT&T DATAKIT dial-out applications.  
NOTE: If LSD Control is set to =DTR/DiscOff, then the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232.  
The AT command for Forced On is &C0.  
The AT command for Standard RS232 is &C1.  
The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is &C2.  
The AT command for Follows DTR is &C3.  
The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is &C4.  
The AT command for =DTR/Disconnect OFF is &C5.  
Tx Clock Source: Internal  
Nxt Internal External RXC_Loop  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Sync.  
Transmit Clock Source. Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the modem to the  
analog channel.  
Internal – The transmit data’s clock source is derived from the modem’s internal clock. This clock is available as an  
output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
External – The transmit data’s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 (XTXC) on the EIA-232-D interface.  
Receive Clock Loop – The modem’s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal. The derived clock is  
available as an output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
The AT command for Internal is &X0.  
The AT command for External is &X1.  
The AT command for RXC Loop is &X2.  
4-38  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-7  
(7 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Bakup_TXClk_Src: Internal  
Nxt Internal External RXC_Loop  
This configuration option only appears in customized installations in which the Dual_Leased_Ln is configured  
for Enable and Async/Sync Mode is Sync.  
Backup Transmit Clock Source. Selects the clock reference source when operating in the Dual Leased Line Mode. This  
is a special mode in which one leased line is used to back up another.  
Internal – The transmit data’s clock source is derived from the modem’s internal clock. This clock is available as an  
output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
External – The transmit data’s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 (XTXC) on the EIA-232-D interface.  
Receive Clock Loop – The modem’s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal. The derived clock is  
available as an output on Pin 15 (TXC) of the EIA-232-D interface.  
XTXC Clamps TXC: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears when TX Clock Source is configured for External.  
External Transmit Clock Clamps Transmit Clock. Allows the modem’s TXC output (Pin 15 on the EIA-232-D interface) to  
be clamped OFF when TX Clock Source is configured for External.  
Enable – TXC is clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External.  
Disable – TXC continues to be provided when TX Clock Source is configured for External.  
The AT command is S-Register S71=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
CT111_Rate Cntl: Disable  
Nxt Disable Fallback1 Fallback2  
This configuration option does not appear when V.34 is enabled for a leased or dial line.  
CT111 Rate Control. Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA-232-D interface. This configuration  
option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signal. CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA-232-D interface.  
Disable – Disregards CT111 Rate Control.  
Fallback1 – Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when CT111 is OFF.  
Valid only for V.32bis, V.33, V.29 modulation. Modem will only fall back within the same modulation scheme. When  
CT111 turns ON, the modem returns to its previous data rate.  
Fallback2 (Not available for TMp tributaries) – Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the  
same modulation scheme. When CT111 turns ON, the modem returns to its previous data rate.  
NOTE: This configuration option is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode. For proper operation,  
disable the V.32bis Autorate and V.32bis Automode configuration options.  
The AT command is S-Register S61=n, where n is 0 for Disable, 1 for Fallback1, and 2 for Fallback2.  
DTE_Rate=VF: Disable  
End Disable Enable  
This configuration option does not appear when Async/Sync is configured for Sync.  
DTE Rate = VF. Forces the DTE’s data rate to be equal to the VF (telephone line) data rate.  
Disable – The data rate of the connection between the DTE and modem is the value of the Async DTE Rate  
configuration option.  
Enable – The data rate between the DTE and modem is the same as the modem’s VF data rate. As a result, when the  
modem is in Data mode, the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate.  
The AT command is S-Register S90=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-7  
(8 of 8)  
DTE Interface Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Extend Main Ch.: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Primary data can only be extended one link.  
Extend Main Channel. This configuration option supports extended diagnostics. Specifies whether there is main  
(primary) channel connectivity between the modem’s DTE ports and the DTE ports of modems one level below  
(downstream) or above (upstream) in the diagnostic network.  
Enable – If this configuration option is set to Enable on a port of a tributary modem, test mode is propagated to the  
modems downstream when test mode goes ON for that port.  
Disable – If this configuration option is set to Disable on a port of a tributary modem, test mode is not propagated for  
that port and primary channel data is clamped when in test mode.  
NOTE: For an extended control modem, this configuration option is used along with the upstream port number where  
the main (primary) channel is extended.  
Upstream Port: Port1  
End Port1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port7 Port8  
This configuration only appears when the Extended Main Channel is enabled.  
Upstream Port. When an extended control modem’s main (primary) channel is connected to a tributary modem that is  
one link above it in the diagnostic network, this configuration option is set to the port number to which it is connected on  
the tributary modem.  
4-40  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
DTE Dialer — Singleport Mode A  
The DTE Dialer configuration options establish the DTE-to-modem protocol for call establishment  
and control.  
Table 4-8 shows each DTE Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-8  
(1 of 5)  
DTE Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
DTE Dialer Type: Disable  
Nxt Disable AT V25bis_Async V25bis_Bsync V25bis_HDLC DTR=Direct1 AT&T_Exclusv  
Data Terminal Equipment Dialer Type. Identifies to the modem the type of dialing method and protocol used by the DTE.  
Disable – Disables any type of DTE dialing method. Dialing can only be performed using the DCP’s Dial command or  
attached telephone.  
AT – Allows AT command protocol to be used as a method for entering commands and dialing when used in an  
asynchronous application. This is the only valid setting for leased-line applications. The modem will not respond to AT  
commands if DTE Dialer Type is not set to AT.  
V.25bis Async – Selects V.25bis Async as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem. The character length  
must be 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit.  
V.25bis Bisync – Selects V.25bis Bisync as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem. This is also known as  
character-oriented protocol. This framing protocol uses two synchronous control characters and a start-of-text control  
character before the text block and an end-of-text control character after the text block. The correct character structure  
for V.25bis Bisync dialing is 7 data bits, Odd parity, and 1 stop bit. If the modem is in Asynchronous mode, enter the  
following command string to configure it for V.25bis Bisync dialing: AT&F&D1&S1&M233&W. If the modem is already  
configured for synchronous operation, perform the following to set the character format: (1) use the modem’s front panel  
to access the Async/Sync Mode configuration option and set it to Async; (2) scroll down until the Asyn #Data Bits  
configuration option appears and set it to 7 data bits; (3) scroll down and set the Asyn Parity Bit configuration option to  
Odd; (4) scroll through the DTE Interface group until the Async/Sync Mode configuration option appears and set it to  
Sync; (5) move up one level in the menu tree or move to the Top-Level menu, and follow the LCD messages to save the  
new modem settings.  
V.25bis HDLC – Selects V.25bis HDLC as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem. This is also known as  
bit-oriented protocol. This framing protocol uses flag, address and control characters before the text block and a frame  
sequence check and flag after the text block.  
DTR=Direct1 – Allows the modem to automatically dial the number stored in directory location 1 whenever DTR turns  
ON. DTR dialing cannot be used if dial access security is enabled.  
AT&T Exclusive – Enables a subset of the proprietary AT&T command set, which is required for some applications that  
use AT&T equipment. Currently, the only application supported is AT&T DATAKIT.  
The AT commands for AT are &M0, &M1, &M3 or &Q0, &Q1, &Q3.  
The AT commands for DTR=Direct1 dialing are &M2 or &Q2.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-8  
(2 of 5)  
DTE Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
AT Escape Char: 043 ASCI  
Nxt " 043 ASCI  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
AT Escape Character. The escape sequence (+++) allows you to move from Data mode to Command mode. Use the  
ATO command to return to Data mode. The ASCII value of the escape character (43 ASCII) can be set to any ASCII  
value from 0 ASCII to 255 ASCII. However, the escape character is disabled if a value greater than 127 ASCII is  
entered. When disabled, the call must be disconnected to return to Command mode.  
The AT command is S-Register S2=n, where n is a value from 0 to 127.  
The AT command to disable is S-Register S2= where n is a value from 128 to 255. (When disabled, the modem cannot  
n
return to Command mode unless disconnected.)  
Escape GuardTim: 1sec  
Nxt 1sec 200msec 400msec 600msec 800msec 2sec  
This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Escape Guard Time. Determines the length of the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued. The  
guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters.  
The AT command is S-Register S12=n, where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 20 millisecond increments.  
BreakForceEscap: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Break Forces Escape. Determines whether or not the modem should enter Command mode when it receives a break  
character from the DTE.  
Disable – A break character is sent to the remote end.  
Enable – Modem escapes into AT Command mode, and a break character is not sent to the remote end.  
The AT commands for Enable are \K0, \K2, or \K4.  
The AT commands for Disable are \K1, \K3, or \K5.  
CommandCharEcho: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Command Character Echo. Controls whether or not characters are echoed back to the DTE when the modem is in  
Command mode.  
The AT command for Disable is E0.  
The AT command for Enable is E1.  
CarriageRtn Char: 013 ASCI  
Nxt " 013 ASCI  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Carriage Return Character. Allows you to change the ASCII character used to terminate an AT command to any ASCII  
value from 0 to 127.  
The AT command is S-Register S3=n, where n is a value from 0 to 127.  
Backspace Char: 008 ASCI  
Nxt " 008 ASCI  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Backspace Character. Sets the character used to perform a backspace in Command mode.  
The AT command is S-Register S5=n, where n is a value from 0 to 127.  
4-42  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-8  
(3 of 5)  
DTE Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Linefeed Char: 010 ASCI  
Nxt " 010 ASCI  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Line Feed Character. Sets the character used to perform a line feed in Command mode for responses from the modem.  
The AT command is S-Register S4=n, where n is a value from 0 to 127.  
Result Codes: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable EnableInOrig  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Result Codes. Result codes are informational messages (such as Connect and Ring) sent from the modem and  
displayed on the asynchronous DTE terminal. (For a list of Result Codes, refer to Table 5-1 in Chapter 5, AT Commands  
and S-Registers.)  
Enable – Modem sends result codes to the DTE.  
Disable – Modem does not send result codes to the DTE.  
Enable in Originate – For UNIXr applications, enable result codes only on the originating modem. This prevents the  
DTE on the answer side from interpreting result codes as login attempts.  
The AT command for Enable is Q0.  
The AT command for Disable is Q1.  
The AT command for Enable in Originate mode is Q2.  
ExtendResltCode: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable Add/EC Add/V42,MNP Use_DTE_Rate  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Extended Result Codes. Informational messages such as VF data rate and Error Control appear along with the result  
codes. (For a list of Extended Result Codes, refer to Table 5-1 in Chapter 5, AT Commands and S-Registers.)  
Enable  
NO DIALTONE, BUSY, NO ANSWER, and CONNECT xxxx (xxxx = VF data rate) appear along with result  
codes listed in Table 5-1 in Chapter 5.  
Disable – Only OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, and ERROR result codes appear.  
Add/EC – Places the EC suffix after the result code text if error control is used. For example, CONNECT 9600/EC.  
Add/V.42 or /MNP – Places either the /V.42 or /MNP suffix after the result code text if data compression is used. For  
example, CONNECT 9600/V42b.  
Use DTE Rate – Allows the DTE rate to be displayed in the Connect message instead of the line rate. This feature is  
required in some modem pooling applications.  
NOTE: NO DIALTONE is valid only if Dial Tone Detect configuration option is enabled. BUSY appears if Busy Detect  
configuration option is enabled.  
The AT command for Disable is X0.  
The AT commands for Enable are X1, X2, X3, or X4.  
The AT command for Add/EC is X5.  
The AT command for Add/V42, MNP is X6.  
The AT command for Use DTE Rate is X7.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-8  
(4 of 5)  
DTE Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
ResultCode Form: Words  
Nxt Words Numbers (1) Numbers (2)  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
Result Codes Format. Controls whether or not result codes appear as words or as numeric codes. Some DTEs do not  
recognize Result Codes as words; therefore, numbers are required. The Numbers (2) format is required for some  
modem pooling applications. (For a list of Result Codes, refer to Table 5-1 in Chapter 5, AT Commands and  
S-Registers.)  
The AT command for Numbers (1) is V0.  
The AT command for Words format is V1.  
The AT command for Numbers (2) is V2.  
AT Cmnd Mode: Normal  
Nxt Normal No_ERROR NoStrapOrERR  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT.  
AT Command Mode. Determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands.  
Normal – Allows normal operation of the AT command set. The modem acts upon all valid AT commands and issues  
the ERROR result code for invalid commands. If a string with multiple commands is entered, then an invalid command  
within that string will prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands.  
No ERROR – Operates similar to Normal mode, however, the modem does not issue an ERROR result code for invalid  
commands. When an invalid command is encountered, the modem ignores it and issues the OK result code. If a string  
with multiple commands is entered, then an invalid command within that string will not prevent the execution of  
subsequent valid commands.  
No Strap or ERROR – Ignores all AT commands (including valid commands) that cause a configuration option to  
change. Only non-configuring commands (for example ATD, ATA, and ATI) are executed; the ERROR result code is  
never returned.  
NOTE: Since this configuration option affects AT commands, it cannot be changed by the AT&F command. However, it  
can be changed by selecting a factory preset configuration via the DCP.  
The AT command is S-Register S84=n, where n is 0 or 231 for Normal, 1 or 232 for No ERROR, and 2 or 233 for No  
Strap or ERROR.  
V25bis Coding: ASCII  
Nxt ASCII EBCDIC  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer is configured for V.25bis HDLC or V.25bis Bsync.  
V.25bis Coding. Identifies to the modem whether the DTE is using ASCII code or EBCDIC code for V.25bis commands.  
The modem responds to the DTE using the same coding.  
The AT command is S-Register S62=n, where n is 0 for ASCII or 1 for EBCDIC.  
4-44  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-8  
(5 of 5)  
DTE Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
V25bis IdleFill: Mark  
Nxt Mark Flag  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer is configured for V.25bis HDLC.  
V.25bis Idle Fill. Determines whether a mark or flag is used as an idle fill character for the DTE. The modem responds to  
the DTE using the same idle fill.  
The AT command is S-Register S63=n, where n is 0 for Mark or 1 for Flag.  
V25b NewLineChr: CR+LF  
End CR+LF CR LF  
This configuration option only appears when DTE Dialer is configured for V.25bis Async.  
V.25bis New Line Character. Sets the modem for the command line terminator used by the DTE in V.25bis Async mode.  
The modem responds to the DTE using the same line terminator.  
The AT command is S-Register S64=n, where n is 0 for carriage return and line feed, 1 for carriage return, or 2 for line  
feed.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Line Dialer — Singleport Mode A  
The Line Dialer configuration options establish parameters used by the modem to answer or  
originate calls.  
Table 4-9 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-9  
(1 of 4)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
AutoAnswerRing#:  
1
Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10  
Auto-Answer Ring Count. Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an  
incoming call. For example, if this option is set to 2, then the answering modem answers after the second ring.  
Disable – If selected, the modem must be answered using either the DCP’s Answer command or Tlk/Data function or  
via AT commands. Refer to Talk/Data in Chapter 3, DCP Operation, for more on Manual Answer.  
NOTE: Although DCP selections are limited (1, 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10), values set by AT commands can display from 1 to  
255 rings.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
The AT command for Disable is S0=0.  
The AT command is S-Register S0=n, where n is a ring count from 1 to 255.  
Dialer Type: Tone  
Nxt Tone Pulse  
Dialer Type. Selects either tone (DTMF) dialing or pulse (rotary) dialing mode.  
NOTE: Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and Sweden.  
The AT command for Tone is T.  
The AT command for Pulse is P.  
DialTone Detect: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Dial Tone Detect. Sets the modem for dial tone detection (enable) or blind dialing (disable).  
Enable – Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on  
both the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal.  
Disable – Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line. This is known as blind dialing. The period  
of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Paus configuration option.  
NOTE: It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries.  
The AT commands for Disable are X0, X1, and X3.  
The AT commands for Enable are X2, X4, X5, X6, and X7.  
Blind Dial Paus: 2sec  
Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec  
This configuration option only appears when Dial Tone Detect is configured for Disable.  
Blind Dial Pause. Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when Dialtone Detect is  
disabled.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
The AT command is S-Register S6=n, where n is from 2 to 255 in 1-second increments.  
4-46  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-9  
(2 of 4)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
BusyTone Detect: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Busy Tone Detect. Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone (Enable) or ignore Busy Tone (Disable).  
NOTE: This configuration option is normally enabled; however, if the modem receives false busy tones, this  
configuration option can be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones.  
The AT commands for Disable are X0, X1, and X2.  
The AT commands for Enable are X3, X4, X5, X6, and X7.  
“,” Pause Time: 2sec  
Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec  
Pause Time. Determines the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial  
command string.  
NOTE: Although DCP selections are limited (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 20), values set by the AT commands can display from 0 to  
255 seconds.  
The AT command is S-Register S8=n, where n is from 0 to 255 in 1-second increments.  
NoAnswer Timout: 45sec  
Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec  
No Answer Abort Time-out. Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call  
attempt when no answer tone is received.  
NOTE: Although DCP selections are limited (30, 45, or 60), values set by AT commands can display from 1 to  
255 seconds.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
The AT command is S-Register S7=n, where n is from 1 to 255 in 1-second increments.  
Fast Disconnect: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Fast Disconnect. Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE  
or its own diagnostic control panel.  
Disable – The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown sequence or long space  
disconnect. This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a  
disconnection.  
Enable – Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a  
disconnect command.  
NOTE: This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem, which may interpret the  
disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect.  
The AT command is S-Register S85=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
Line Crnt Disc: Enab(>8msec)  
Nxt Enab(>8msec) Enab(>90msec) Disable  
This configuration option does not appear on Models 3920Plus-A1-401 and 3921Plus-B1-001.  
Line Current Disconnect. Determines the modem’s response to short interruptions of line current. The loss of line  
current is one method of disconnecting a call.  
Enable > 8-millisecond – Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds.  
Enable > 90-millisecond – Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90 milliseconds. Use this  
setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set to Enab(>8msec).  
Disable – Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting.  
The AT command is S-Register S65=n, where n is 0 for Enable (>8 msec), 1 for Enable (>90 msec), and 2 for Disable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-9  
(3 of 4)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Long Space Disc: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Long Space Disconnect. Determines the modem’s response to a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote  
modem before it goes on-hook. Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call.  
Enable – Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE. For modulations lower than 4800 bps, the  
modem’s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect.  
Disable – Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE. Modem will not transmit a long  
space disconnect.  
The AT command for Disable is Y0.  
The AT command for Enable is Y1.  
No Carrier Disc: 2sec  
Nxt 2sec Disable 5sec 10sec 20sec  
No Carrier Disconnect. If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem, it disconnects the call. This  
configuration option determines how long carrier is OFF before the modem disconnects. Loss of carrier is one method of  
disconnecting a call.  
2, 5, 10, 20 sec – Modem disconnects if carrier turns OFF for more than 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or  
20 seconds.  
Disable – Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns OFF.  
NOTE: The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
The AT command is S-Register S10=n, where n is 255 for Disable or 0 to 254 in 0.1 second increments for Enable.  
No Data Disc: Disable  
Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min  
No Data Disconnect. Forces the modem to disconnect if no data is transmitted and received within a specified amount  
of time.  
Disable – Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow.  
10, 30, 60 min – Modem disconnects if data is not received and transmitted within 10-minute, 30-minute, or 60-minute  
intervals.  
NOTE: The factory default value is country dependent.  
The AT command for Enable is \Tn, where n is from 1 minute to 255 minutes.  
The AT command for Disable is \T0.  
4-48  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-9  
(4 of 4)  
Line Dialer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Auto Make Busy: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This option is only valid on Model 3921Plus.  
Automatic Make Busy. Forces the modem to go off-hook under the following conditions: if a local analog loopback is  
performed, a self-test is performed, or if the modem is switched to the service line.  
NOTE: This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user’s Private Branch  
Exchange (PBX). The Make Busy Network Interface Module (NIM) must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000  
Series Carrier. Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual  
.
The AT command is S-Register S40=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
MakeBusyVia DTR: Disable  
End Disable Enable  
Make Busy Via DTR. Determines if the modem goes off-hook when DTR is OFF. Enable this setting if the DTE normally  
keeps DTR ON and turns DTR OFF when the DTE cannot accept a call.  
NOTE: This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user’s Private Branch  
Exchange (PBX). For 3921Plus modems, the Make Busy Network Interface Modules (NIMs) must be installed  
on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, Installation Manual  
.
The AT command is S-Register S69=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Dial Line — Singleport Mode  
A
The Dial Line configuration options are used to configure the modem for operation over dial lines.  
Table 4-10 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-10  
(1 of 3)  
Dial Line Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Dial Modulation: V34  
Nxt V34 V32_Family V21/V22/Bell V23  
Dial Modulation. Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Dial Line rates by limiting the number  
of Dial Line Rate configuration options. Only one group of Dial Line rates is displayed depending on the setting of the  
Dial Modulation configuration option (V.34, V.32bis, V.32 terbo, V.21, V.22, V.23, Bell 212A, and Bell 103J).  
Dial Line Rate: 28800(V34)  
Nxt 33600 31200 28800(V34) 26400(V34) 24000(V34) 21600(V34) 19200(V34) 16800(V34) 14400(V34)  
12000(V34) 9600(V34) 7200(V34) 4800(V34) 2400(V34) 19200(V32t) 16800(V32t) 14400(V32b)  
12000(V32b) 9600(V32b) 7200(V32b) 4800(V32b) 2400(V22bis) 1200 (V22) 1200(212A) 0–300(V21)  
0–300(103J) 1200/75(V23) 75/1200(V23) 600/75(V23) 75/600(V23)  
Dial Line Rate. This configuration option determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial  
lines. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.  
NOTE: Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
33600, 31200, 28800(V34), 26400(V34), 24000(V34), 21600(V34), 19200(V34), 16800(V34), 14400(V34), 12000(V34),  
9600(V34), 7200(V34), 4800(V34), 2400(V34) – The modem operates using V.34 modulation at the data rate selected.  
19200(V32t), 16800(V32t), 14400(V32b), 12000(V32b), 9600(V32b), 7200(V32b), 4800(V32b) – The modem operates  
using V.32 terbo, V.32bis, or V.32 modulation at the data rate selected.  
2400(V22bis), 1200 (V22), 1200(212A) – Modem operates using the modulation and data rate selected.  
0–300(V21), 0–300(103J) – Modem operates in full-duplex, Asynchronous mode. These data rates do not support V.42  
or MNP error control.  
1200/75(V23), 75/1200(V23), 600/75(V23), 75/600(V23) – The modem will run in asynchronous semi-full duplex mode  
at the rate chosen.  
The AT command is S-Register S41=n, where n is:  
1 = 14,400 (V.32bis)  
2 = 12,000 (V.32bis)  
3 = 9600 (V.32bis/V.32)  
4 = 7200 (V.32bis)  
5 = 4800 (V.32bis/V.32)  
6 = 2400 (V.22bis)  
7 = 1200 (V.22)  
10 = 0–300 (V.21)  
11 = 0–300 (103J)  
22 = 33,600  
23 = 31,200  
30 = 14,400 (V.34)  
31 = 12,000 (V.34)  
32 = 9600 (V.34)  
33 = 7200 (V.34)  
34 = 4800 (V.34)  
35 = 2400 (V.34)  
12 = 1200/75 (V.23)  
13 = 75/1200 (V.23)  
18 = 600/75 (V.23)  
19 = 75/600 (V.23)  
20 = 19,200 (V.32 terbo)  
21 = 16,800 (V.32 terbo)  
24 = 28,800 (V.34)  
25 = 26,400 (V.34)  
26 = 24,000 (V.34)  
27 = 21,600 (V.34)  
28 = 19,200 (V.34)  
29 = 16,800 (V.34)  
8 = 1200 (212A)  
4-50  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-10  
(2 of 3)  
Dial Line Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Automode: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable System 85  
This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V.32 or V.34 families data rate.  
Automode. The modem automatically adapts to the modulation scheme and line rate of the remote modem. However,  
the maximum data rate the modem uses is determined by the Dial Line Rate configuration option.  
System 85 – Enables the full automode function with special provisions which are needed to work reliably in a  
System 85 or similar PBX modem pool.  
NOTE: When the V.32bis Automoding configuration option is enabled, the V.21 protocol (0–300 bps) is excluded from  
the Automoding sequence. Instead, the modem uses the Bell 103J protocol for 0–300 bps operation.  
The AT command is S-Register S78=n, where n is 0 for Enable, 1 for Disable, and 2 for System 85.  
Autorate: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96  
This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V.32 or V.34 families data rate.  
Autorate. Once connected, the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired. When line  
conditions improve, the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support. This autorating only  
occurs between 19,200 bps and 4800 bps during V.32, V.32bis, and V.32 terbo connections and 33.6 and 2400 bps for  
the V.34 family.  
Start at 48 and Start at 96 – Set the maximum connect rate for V.32, V.32bis, and V.32 terbo connections.  
The AT command is S-Register S76=n, where n is 0 for Enable, 1 for Disable, 2 for Start at 48, and 3 for Start at 96.  
V32bis Override: Disable  
Nxt Disable 2400  
This configuration option is ignored unless Dial Line Rate is 4800(V32b).  
V.32bis Override. Activates the Paradyne Point-to-Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation. Allows the modem to use a  
non-standard, point-to-point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps.  
NOTE: This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems.  
Dial Tx Level: Permissv(–9)  
Nxt Permissv(–9) –10 –11 –12 –13 –14 –15 –16 –17 –18 –19 –20 –21 –22 –23 –24 –25 –26 –27 –28 –29  
–30 –31 –32  
Dial Transmit Level. Selects the modem’s transmit power level over dial lines. The transmit output level can be selected  
in 1 dBm decrements from –9 dBm to –32 dBm.  
NOTE: In North America the range of allowable values is –10 to –32 dBm, plus Permissive (–9 dBm). This configuration  
option is locked in other some countries (the user cannot change the level).  
NOTE: The factory default setting is country dependent. Default is Permissv(–9) in North America.  
The AT command is &In, where n is from 10 to 32 corresponding to –10 dBm to –32 dBm.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-10  
(3 of 3)  
Dial Line Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
V22b Guard Tone: Disable  
Nxt Disable 550Hz 1800Hz  
This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V.22bis or V.22 data rate, or when  
Automode is configured for Enable.  
V.22bis Guard Tone. Determines whether the V.22bis guard tone is disabled, set to 550 Hz, or set to 1800 Hz.  
Disable – No guard tone.  
550 Hz or 1800 Hz – When the modem is in Answer mode, it transmits the guard tone at this frequency.  
NOTE: The V.22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries.  
The AT command for Disable is &G0.  
The AT command for 550 Hz is &G1.  
The AT command for 1800 Hz is &G2.  
Train Time: Long  
End Long Short  
This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V.34 and V.32 families.  
Train Time. Controls V.34 and V.32 families train time. Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are  
used during the V.34 and V.32 families handshaking sequence for both dial and 4-wire/2-wire leased-line applications.  
Long – Selects long train. Use this setting whenever far-end frequency offset (phase roll) may be encountered. This is  
usually only required when transmitting over satellite links.  
Short – Allows the modem to train-up faster when using the V.34 and V.32 families modulation.  
The AT command is S-Register S43=n, where n is 0 for Long and 1 for Short.  
Asymmetric Rate: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option does not appear unless V.34 modulation is selected.  
Asymmetric Rate. Controls rate symmetry when running V.34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V.34 modulation  
from using equal transmit and receive rates.  
Enable – The modem operates in asymmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates can be different) when running  
V.34 modulation. The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems.  
Disable – The modem operates in symmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates are identical) when running  
V.34 modulation. Either modem can force symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option.  
The AT command is S-Register S14=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
4-52  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Leased Line — Singleport Mode A  
The Leased Line configuration options only appear when the Sync Leased factory preset template  
is selected. They are used to configure the modem for operation over leased lines.  
Table 4-11 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync  
Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown  
following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line.  
Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in  
Appendix F.  
Table 4-11  
(1 of 5)  
Leased Line Configuration Options— Singleport Mode A  
LeaseModulation: V34  
Nxt V34 V32_Family TMp V33 V29 V27b/V22b  
Lease Modulation. Modulation reduces the amount of scrolling necessary to select Leased Line rates by limiting the  
number of Leased Line Rate configuration options. Only one group of Leased Line rates is displayed depending on the  
setting of the Lease Modulation configuration option (V.34, V.32bis, V.32terbo, TMp, V.33, V.29, V.27bis, V.22bis).  
LeasedLine Rate: 28800(V34)  
Nxt 33600 31200 28800(V34) 26400(V34) 24000(V34) 21600(V34) 19200(V34) 16800(V34) 14400(V34)  
12000(V34) 9600(V34) 7200(V34) 4800(V34) 2400(V34) 19200(V32t) 16800(V32t) 14400(V32b)  
12000(V32b) 9600(V32b) 7200(V32b) 4800(V32b) 19200(TMp), 14400(TMp) 9600(TMp) 7200(TMp)  
4800(TMp) 2400(TMp) 2400(V22bis) 14400(V33) 12000(V33) 9600(V29) 7200(V29) 4800(V29) 4800(V27bis)  
2400(V27bis)  
Leased-Line Rate. Determines the modem’s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines.  
NOTE: Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
33600, 31200, 28800(V34), 26400(V34), 24000(V34), 21600(V34), 19200(V34), 16800(V34), 14400(V34) 12000(V34),  
9600(V34), 7200(V34), 4800(V34), 2400(V34) – The modem operates using V.34 modulation at the data rate selected.  
19200(V32t), 16800(V32t), 14400(V32b), 12000(V32b), 9600(V32b), 7200(V32b), 4800(V32b) – The modem operates  
using V.32bis or V.32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected. These modulation schemes are available on 2-wire or  
4-wire leased lines.  
19200(TMp), 14400(TMp), 9600(TMp), 7200(TMp), 4800(TMp), 2400(TMp) – The modem operates in Trellis Multipoint  
mode at the data rate selected. These modulation schemes are available on 4-wire leased lines. The 19200(TMp)  
modulation does not appear on tributary modems.  
NOTE: TMp control modems can accept mixed inbound rates from tributary modems. For example, one inbound link  
may be configured for 14.4 kbps while another link experiencing line impairments may be configured for  
9.6 kbps. The following control/tributary rate combinations are allowed: control at 19.2 kbps, tributaries at 14.4  
or 9.6 kbps; control at 14.4 kbps, tributaries at 14.4 or 9.6 kbps; control at 9.6 kbps, tributaries at 9.6 or  
7.2 kbps; control at 7.2 kbps, tributaries at 7.2 or 4.8 kbps; control at 4.8 kbps, tributaries at 4.8 or 2.4 kbps;  
control at 2.4 kbps, tributaries at 2.4 kbps. Tributary rates will never exceed control rates. If tributary and  
control rates are equal, reducing the control rate will automatically reduce the tributary rate.  
2400(V22bis) – This modulation scheme is available on 2-wire and 4-wire leased lines.  
14400(V33), 12000(V33) – These modulation schemes are only available on 4-wire leased lines.  
9600(V29), 7200(V29), 4800(V29) – These modulation schemes are only available on 4-wire leased lines.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-11  
(2 of 5)  
Leased Line Configuration Options— Singleport Mode A  
LeasedLine Rate: 28800(V34) (Cont.)  
4800(V27bis), 2400(V27bis) – This modulation scheme is available on 2-wire (half-duplex) and 4-wire leased lines.  
NOTE: It is recommended that both modems use the same fixed data rate.  
NOTE: The modem must be in Direct mode before the modulation scheme can be changed from V.32bis, V.34 family,  
or TMp to another leased-line modulation (V.33, V.29, or V.22bis). See Err Contrl Mode configuration option for  
more about Direct mode. On leased lines, V.42 error control and Buffer mode are only supported by V.32bis,  
V.34 family, or TMp. An error occurs if the modem is not in Direct mode when the modulation is changed from  
V.32bis, V.34 family, or TMp.  
The AT command is S-Register S44=n, where n is:  
1 = 14,400 (V.32bis)  
2 = 12,000 (V.32bis)  
3 = 9600 (V.32bis)  
4 = 7200 (V.32bis)  
5 = 4800 (V.32bis)  
6 = 2400 (V.22bis)  
11 = 14,400 (V.33)  
12 = 12,000 (V.33)  
13 = 9600 (V.29)  
14 = 7200 (V.29)  
15 = 4800 (V.29)  
23 = 7200 (TMp)  
24 = 4800 (TMp)  
25 = 2400 (TMp)  
26 = 33,600  
32 = 19,200 (V.34)  
33 = 16,800 (V.34)  
34 = 14,400 (V.34)  
35 = 12,000 (V.34)  
36 = 9600 (V.34)  
37 = 7200 (V.34)  
38 = 4800 (V.34)  
39 = 2400 (V.34)  
16 = 4800 (V.27bis)  
17 = 2400 (V.27bis)  
18 = 19,200 (V.32 terbo)  
19 = 16,800 (V.32 terbo)  
20 = 19,200 (TMp)  
21 = 14,400 (TMp)  
22 = 9600 (TMp)  
27 = 31,200  
28 = 28,800 (V.34)  
29 = 26,400 (V.34)  
30 = 24,000 (V.34)  
31 = 21,600 (V.34)  
Leased Mode: 4WLL-Ans  
Nxt 4WLL-Ans 4WLL-Orig 2WLL-Orig 2WLL-Ans  
Leased Mode. Sets the modem for either 2-wire or 4-wire operation in Answer mode (receiving a call) or 2-wire or 4-wire  
operation in Originate (initiating a call) mode.  
NOTE: For proper operation of V.32 modulations over leased lines, one modem must be set to Originate mode and the  
other set to Answer mode.  
For Sync Leased Answer Mode, Async Leased Answer Mode and Trellis Multipoint Tributary Mode, 4-wire Answer is the  
factory default.  
For Sync Leased Originate Mode, Async Leased Originate Mode and Trellis Multipoint Control Mode, 4-wire Originate is  
the factory default.  
The AT command for Disable is &L0.  
The AT command for 2-wire Originate is &L1.  
The AT command for 4-wire Originate is &L2.  
The AT command for 2-wire Answer is &L3.  
The AT command for 4-wire Answer is &L4.  
Autorate: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V.34 and V.32 families data  
rate.  
Autorate. Once connected, the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired. When line  
conditions improve, the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support. This autorating only  
occurs between 19,200 bps and 4800 bps during V.32, V.32bis, and V.32 terbo connections and 33.6 and 2400 for V.34.  
The AT command is S-Register S82=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
V32bis Override: Disable  
Nxt Disable 2400  
This configuration option is ignored unless Leased-Line Rate is 4800(V32b).  
V.32bis 4800 Override. Activates the Paradyne Point-to-Point Diagnostic 2400 bps modulation. Allows the modem to  
use a non-standard, point-to-point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps.  
4-54  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-11  
(3 of 5)  
Leased Line Configuration Options— Singleport Mode A  
Leased Tx Level: 0  
Nxt 0 –1 –2 –3 –4 5 –6 7 8 –9 10 –11 –12 –13 –14 –15  
Leased Transmit Level. Selects the modem’s transmit power level over leased lines. The transmit output level can be  
selected in 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to –15 dBm.  
NOTE: The leased TX level is limited to –1 dBm in all countries except North America.  
NOTE: The factory default setting is country dependent. Default is 0 in North America.  
The AT command is S-Register S45=n, where n is from 0 to 15 corresponding to 0 dBm to –15 dBm.  
Asymmetric Rate: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option does not appear unless V.34 is enabled.  
Asymmetric Rate. Controls rate symmetry when running V.34 modulation by enabling or disabling the V.34 modulation  
from using equal transmit and receive rates.  
Enable – The modem operates in Asymmetric Rate mode (the transmit and receive rates can be different) when  
running V.34 modulation. The Asymmetric Rate configuration option must be enabled in both modems.  
Disable – The modem operates in symmetric rate mode (the transmit and receive rates are identical) when running  
V.34 modulation. Either modem can force Symmetric mode by disabling the Asymmetric Rate configuration option.  
The AT command is S-Register S15=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
Auto Dial Back: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup  
Automatic Dial Backup. Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications  
with the remote modem when the leased lines fail.  
NOTE: This configuration option must be set to Disable for TMp (Control) operation.  
NOTE: In point-to-point applications, this configuration option must be set to Enable in both the local and remote  
modem. The answering modem must have its Auto-Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled. Refer to  
the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto-Answer.  
NOTE: When this configuration option is enabled, the originating modem will attempt the dial backup for a maximum of  
10 call attempts, with a 2 minute delay between calls. This function can be reset with a completed manual dial  
backup, a power cycle, or using NMS.  
Fast Backup – Only used in special applications requiring a shortened delay time from the failure of the leased lines to  
the initiation of the automatic dial backup.  
The AT command is S-Register S46=n, where n is 0 for Disable, 1 for Enable, and 2 for FastBackup.  
AutoDialStandby: Disable  
Nxt Disable 15min 1hr 4hr Test(2min) Adv 15min Adv 30min Adv 1 hr TestAdv2min  
Automatic Dial Standby. Permits a modem operating on dial lines (regardless of the method of dialing origination) to  
check the quality of the leased lines periodically and, if they are good, to disconnect from the dial lines and resume  
operations on the leased lines. The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is  
determined by the configuration option. These intervals are 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 4 hours. The Test(2min) and  
TestAdv2min selections are for testing purposes only. The Adv 15min, Adv 30min, and Adv 1 hr selections cause the  
modem to evaluate the leased lines continuously in a manner which is non-disruptive to the dial-line communication.  
NOTE: For Automatic Dial Standby to operate properly, it must be enabled prior to a backup occurring.  
The AT command is S-Register S47=n, where n is 0 for Disable, 1 for 15min, 2 for 1hr, 3 for 4hrs, 4 for Test(2min),  
5 for Adv 15min, 6 for Adv 30min, 7 for Adv 1 hr, and 8 for TestAdv2min.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-11  
(4 of 5)  
Leased Line Configuration Options— Singleport Mode A  
SpecialStandby: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Automatic Dial Standby is configured for 15min, 1hr, 4hr or  
Test(2min) and Leased mode is configured for Originate mode,  
or  
when Automatic Dial Standby is configured for Adv15min, Adv30min, Adv1hr or TestAdv(2min).  
Special Standby. Used to support Automatic Dial Standby configurations when a third modem is used for the dial  
backup. When the leased line is restored, the Special Standby configuration allows the leased-line modems to return  
service to the original point-to-point modems.  
NOTE: When the modems are set for normal dial standby (15min, 1hr 4hr, or Test(2min)), the Special Standby  
configuration option allows the originate modem to test the lease connection in one direction before interrupting  
primary data on the dial lines.  
NOTE: When the modems are set for advanced dial standby (Adv15min, Adv 30min, Adv1hr or Adv Test(2min)), the  
Special Standby configuration option allows a non-interruptive algorithm to test the original point-to-point lease  
connection in both directions before interrupting primary data on the dial lines.  
NOTE: For proper operation of Special Standby, ensure that the Automode configuration option is set to Enable.  
The AT command is S-Register S98=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
DialStandbyTime: 10min  
Nxt 10min 5min 1min  
Dial Standby Time. Selects the amount of time that a dial circuit is held after returning to the leased lines.  
CarrierOn Level: 43dbm  
Nxt 43dbm –26dbm  
Carrier On Level. Controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines. When the power level of the receive carrier  
signal drops 2 dBm below this level (either –26 dBm or –43 dBm), LSD turns OFF. When the carrier signal is greater  
than this level, LSD turns ON.  
For TMp Control, –26dbm is the factory default.  
The AT command is S-Register S48=n, where n is 0 for 43 dBm and 1 for –26 dBm.  
V27bis Train: Short  
Nxt Short Long  
This configuration option only appears when Leased-Line Rate is configured for V27bis.  
V.27bis Train. Controls the train time for V.27bis operation.  
The AT command is S-Register S70=n, where n is 0 for Short and 1 for Long.  
V29 TrainOnData: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Leased-Line Rate is configured for V29.  
V.29 Train On Data. When enabled, the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence  
from the distant modem. This function is necessary for a remote (tributary) modem in a V.29 multipoint network and is  
recommended for a control modem as well.  
The AT command is S-Register S92=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
V29 Retrain: Enable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Leased-Line Rate is configured for V29.  
V.29 Retrain. When enabled, the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one. This configuration  
option should normally be disabled for control modems.  
The AT command is S-Register S93=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
4-56  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-11  
(5 of 5)  
Leased Line Configuration Options— Singleport Mode A  
V29 Link Config: PointToPoint  
Nxt PointToPoint Multipoint  
This configuration option only appears when Leased-Line Rate is configured for V29.  
V.29 Link Configuration. Selects point-to-point or multipoint operation.  
NOTE: Remote mode and the Cloning function are not available when configured for V.29 multipoint.  
The AT command is S-Register S94=n, where n is 0 for PointToPoint and 1 for Multipoint.  
TMp Train Time: 50  
Nxt 50 10 20 100 200 300  
This configuration option only appears when Leased-Line Rate is configured for TMp.  
Trellis Multipoint (TMp) Train Time. Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control  
modem. More severe line conditions require longer time selections.  
The AT command is S-Register S95=n, where n is 0 for 10 milliseconds, 1 for 20 milliseconds, 2 for 50 milliseconds,  
3 for 100 milliseconds, 4 for 200 milliseconds, and 5 for 300 milliseconds.  
TMp TxPreemphasis: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears if Leased-Line Rate is configured for TMp.  
Trellis Multipoint (TMp) Transmit Preemphasis. Provides amplification for frequencies above the carrier frequency to  
compensate for high frequency line attenuation.  
The AT command is S-Register S96=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
Lease Lookback: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Lease Lookback. While operating on backup lines, this configuration option allows the modem to test the primary 4-wire  
leased lines for connectivity by detecting line energy across the normal line bandwidth. This test of the primary lines will  
not interrupt the data flow on the backup lines. The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends.  
Dual_Leased_Ln: Disable  
End Disable Enable  
Dual Leased Line. Allows the 2-wire backup facility to function as a 2-wire leased line facility. When this option is  
disabled, the backup facility is a 2-wire dial line.  
NOTE: Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem (see Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2).  
Except for dialing, ring indication, and call progression functions, you control the backup function as if it were a  
normal dial backup.  
NOTE: When the Dual Leased Line configuration option is changed, the modem will reset.  
BackupLine Check: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option is only available when the Dual Leased Line device option is enabled and the V.34 is  
disabled in the LeaseLine Rate configuration option.  
Backup Line Check. Tests the backup circuit for availability while the modem is operating on the primary 4-wire leased  
lines. The test involves detecting line energy across the normal bandwidth. This test of the backup lines will not interrupt  
the data flow on the primary lines. The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends.  
NOTE: In network applications where the modem is in backup mode and is connected to a modem other than the  
modem connected to the primary leased-line, enabling this configuration can cause problems.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
V.42/MNP/Buffer — Singleport Mode A  
V.42/MNP/Buffer configuration options determine the type of error correction and flow control  
used by the modems and attached DTEs.  
Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration  
options have been selected. If the Async/Sync Mode configuration option is set for  
synchronous operation (refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group), then the  
V.42/MNP/Buffer group does not appear on the LCD. Any changes made to configuration  
options within this group only take effect after a disconnect.  
Table 4-12 shows each V.42/MNP/Buffer configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the  
Async Dial factory default setting shown following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all  
available selections listed on the second line. Following this is a description of the configuration  
option. Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F.  
Table 4-12  
(1 of 6)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Err Contrl Mode: V42/MNPorBfr  
Nxt V42/MNPorBfr V42/MNPorDsc MNP_or_Buffr MNP_or_Disc BufferMode DirectMode LAPM_or_Disc  
LAPM_or_Bufr  
This configuration option only appears if Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async.  
Error Control Mode. Determines the type of error control used by the modem. In most cases, V42/MNPorBfr is the best  
choice. If V.42bis and MNP are enabled, then the modem uses the following priority for error control negotiation: V.42bis,  
V.42, MNP 5 and below. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.  
V.42/MNP or Buffer – Modem attempts to connect in V.42 Error Control mode using V.42 Link Access Procedure for  
Modems (LAPM) protocol. If this fails, the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem connects in  
Buffer mode and continues operation. This is also known as V42/MNP Autoreliable Mode.  
V.42/MNP or Disconnect – Modem attempts to connect in V.42 Error Control mode using V.42 LAPM protocol. If this  
fails, the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects. This is also known as Reliable  
mode.  
MNP or Buffer – Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem connects in Buffer mode. This is  
also known as MNP Autoreliable Mode.  
MNP or Disconnect – Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects. This is also  
known as Reliable mode.  
Buffer Mode – Modem does not use error control and allows the DTE rate to differ from the communications line rate.  
This mode should only be used if the DTE provides its own error control or if errors in data can be tolerated. This setting  
is also known as Normal mode and is valid even if the remote modem is set to Direct mode.  
Direct Mode – Modem connects at a data rate equal to or less than the initial DTE interface rate. (The modem never  
connects at a data rate greater than the initial DTE rate.) If the modem connects at a data rate lower than the DTE rate,  
the DTE must then adjust its data rate to equal the modem rate. Ultimately, the modem speed and DTE speed must be  
the same. Direct mode does not support error control or data buffering.  
LAPM or Disconnect – Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.  
LAPM or Buffer – Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode. If this fails, the modem connects in Buffer mode.  
NOTE: The modem must be reconfigured for Direct mode before changing the leased-line modulation if V.42 error  
control or Buffer mode are enabled with V.32bis, V.34 family, or TMp on leased lines.  
4-58  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-12  
(2 of 6)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Err Contrl Mode: V.42/MNPorBfr (Cont.)  
The AT command for Buffer Mode is \N0.  
The AT command for Direct Mode is \N1.  
The AT command for MNP or Disconnect is \N2.  
The AT command for MNP or Buffer is \N3.  
The AT command for V42/MNP or Disconnect is \N4.  
The AT command for V42/MNP or Buffer is \N5.  
The AT command for LAPM or Disconnect is \N6.  
The AT command for LAPM or Buffer is \N7.  
V42bis Compress: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is configured for V42/MNPorBfr or V42/MNPorDsc.  
V.42bis Data Compression. Enables or disables V.42bis data compression.  
Enable – Data compression operates in both the transmit and receive directions. This is the recommended setting for all  
applications.  
Disable V.42bis data compression is disabled. This is rarely needed because V.42bis data compression does not  
cause data expansion for compressed data.  
The AT command for Disable is IH0.  
The AT command for Enable is IH1, IH2, or IH3.  
MNP5 Compress: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is configured for V42/MNPorBfr, V42/MNPorDsc, MNP_or_Buffr, or MNP_or_Disc.  
MNP5 Compression. Determines if the modem uses MNP Class 5 data compression. It can be set independently of  
V.42bis data compression. Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs.  
The AT command for Disable is %C0.  
The AT command for Enable is %C1.  
EC Negotiat Bfr: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable Disab&Switch  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is configured for V42/MNPorBfr, MNP_or_Buffr, or LAPM_or_Bufr.  
Error Control Negotiate Buffer. Determines if the answering modem buffers the data that it received from the remote  
modem during an interval in which the modem attempts to establish a connection using error control. Online changes do  
not take effect until a disconnect occurs.  
Disable – Data is not buffered during the link negotiating (handshaking) sequence.  
Enable – Data is buffered while the link is being established. Initialization data is not passed on the DTE during the  
handshaking sequence.  
Disable and Switch – Data is not buffered during the handshaking sequence. However, when the modem receives an  
error control fallback character, it switches to Buffer mode. (Refer to the EC Fallback Char configuration option.)  
The AT command for Disable is \C0.  
The AT command for Enable is \C1.  
The AT command for Disab&Switch is \C2.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-12  
(3 of 6)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
EC Fallbck Char: 013 ASCI  
Nxt " 013 ASCI  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and EC Negotiate  
Buffer is not configured for Disable.  
Error Control Fallback Character. This configuration option allows you to enter the ASCII value of the error control  
fallback character. This provides the remote modem with the ability to end the error control link negotiating  
(handshaking) sequence by sending this character. The modems will connect in Buffer mode (no error control). Online  
changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs. When the modem receives this fallback character it switches to  
Buffer mode and transmits an EC fallback character to the DTE. When comparing incoming characters for a match  
against the EC fallback character, the modem ignores parity.  
The AT command is %An, where n is a value from 0 to 127.  
Flw Cntl of DTE: CTS_to_DTE  
Nxt CTS_to_DTE Disable XON/XOFF  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is not configured for DirectMode.  
Flow Control of DTE. Determines how the modem controls the flow of data from the DTE.  
CTS to DTE – Method of flow control in which the modem raises and lowers its CTS interface lead to indicate when the  
DTE should start and stop sending data.  
Disable – The modem cannot control the flow of data from the DTE.  
XON/XOFF – Method of flow control in which the modem sends XON and XOFF characters to the DTE to start and stop  
the flow of data.  
The AT commands for Disable are \Q0, \Q5, and \Q6.  
The AT commands for XON/XOFF are \Q1 and\Q4.  
The AT commands for CTS to DTE are \Q2 and \Q3.  
Flw Cntl of Mdm: RTS_to_Mdm  
Nxt RTS_to_Mdm Disable XON/XOFF  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is not configured for DirectMode.  
Flow Control of Modem. Determines how the DTE controls the flow of data from the modem.  
RTS to Modem – Method of flow control in which the modem respectively starts and stops data transmission based  
upon the ON and OFF state of the DTE’s RTS signal.  
Disable – The DTE cannot control the flow of data from the modem.  
XON/XOFF – Method of flow control in which the modem starts and stops data flow based upon XON and XOFF  
characters received from the DTE.  
The AT commands for Disable are \Q0, \Q2, and \Q4.  
The AT commands for XON/XOFF are \Q1 and\Q5.  
The AT commands for RTS to Modem are \Q3 and \Q6.  
4-60  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-12  
(4 of 6)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
XON/XOFF Psthru: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Flow Control of  
Modem is configured for XON/XOFF Psthru.  
XON/XOFF Passthrough. Considers an XON/XOFF character as data and passes it on to the remote modem. In this  
case, the DTE at one end of the communications link can send flow control characters to the other DTE. This is also  
known as DTE to DTE flow control.  
Disable – Flow control characters are processed but are not passed on to the remote modem.  
Enable – Flow control characters are processed and passed on to the remote modem.  
The AT command for Disable is \X0.  
The AT command for Enable is \X1.  
Mdm/Mdm FlowCtl: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is configured for V42/MNPorBfr, MNP_or_Buffr, LAPM_or_Bufr, or BufferMode.  
Modem-to-Modem Flow Control. If a modem’s buffers begin to fill due to data it is receiving from the remote modem, but  
is not passing on to the DTE, it can issue XON/XOFF flow control characters to the remote modem. This only applies if  
Buffer (nonerror control) mode is selected. If Error Control mode is enabled, flow control between the modems will  
happen automatically, regardless of the setting of this option.  
Disable – Modem does not respond to XON and XOFF characters received over the VF line. Also, the modem will not  
transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full.  
Enable – Modem stops transmitting data to the remote modem if it receives an XOFF character over the VF line. An  
XON character will enable data transmission. Also, the modem will transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its  
receive buffers are full. Select this setting if the DTE rate is less than the VF line rate or if the DTE must frequently stop  
the flow of data to process it.  
The AT Command for Disable is \G0.  
The AT Command for Enable is \G1.  
Break Buffr Ctl: Keep_Data  
Nxt Keep_Data Discard_Data  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is not configured for DirectMode.  
Break Buffer Control. Determines if data stored in the modem’s buffer is saved or discarded when the DTE issues a  
break sequence.  
Keep Data (Nondestructive mode) – Saves the data in the buffer in both the local and remote modems.  
Discard Data (Destructive mode) – Empties the data buffer. Only buffers in the same direction of travel as the break  
are discarded.  
NOTE: This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option (refer to the DTE Dialer  
configuration options group) is enabled.  
The AT commands for Discard Data are \K0 and \K1.  
The AT commands for Keep Data are \K2, \K3, \K4, and \K5.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-12  
(5 of 6)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Send Break Cntl: Data_First  
End Data_First Break_First  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is not configured for DirectMode.  
Send Break Control. Determines what is sent from the modem first, data or break if a break sequence is sent from the  
DTE.  
Data First (Nonexpedited) – A break is treated as a data character and is sent in the order it was received. This is also  
known as Nonexpedited mode.  
Break First (Expedited) – A break is sent before the data currently in the buffer. This is also known as Expedited mode.  
NOTE: This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option (refer to the DTE Dialer  
configuration options group) is enabled.  
The AT commands for Break First are \K0, \K1, \K2, and \K3.  
The AT commands for Data First are \K4 and \K5.  
BuffrDiscDelay: 10sec  
Nxt 10sec Disable 60sec  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is not configured for DirectMode.  
Buffer Disconnect Delay. Determines how long the modem continues to transmit data stored in its buffers when the  
modem is commanded to disconnect by a locally attached DTE. This also applies to the modem’s receiving buffers  
when it is commanded to disconnect from a remote modem or DTE.  
Disable – Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers.  
10, 60 sec – Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting. In both cases (10 sec  
and 60 sec), the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers.  
NOTE: This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set to Direct Mode.  
The AT command is S-Register S49=n, where n is 0 for Disable and any value from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments.  
Max Frame Size: 256  
Nxt 256 192 128 64 32 16  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is not configured for BufferMode or DirectMode.  
Maximum Frame Size. Sets the maximum frame size for V.42 and MNP. For V.42 operation, 128 is the maximum value.  
Any value which exceeds this will automatically default to 128 for V.42. For MNP operation, 64 is the minimum value.  
Any value less than that will automatically default to 64. For cellular applications, at least one of the sides should be set  
to a low value. A setting of 32 is recommended. Only one modem needs this setting; both modems will automatically  
default to the greatest common value.  
The AT Command for 256 is \A3.  
The AT Command for 192 is \A2.  
The AT Command for 128 is \A1.  
The AT Command for 64 is \A0.  
The AT Command for 32 is \A4.  
The AT Command for 16 is \A5.  
4-62  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-12  
(6 of 6)  
V.42/MNP/Buffer Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
CellularEnhance: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is configured for V42/MNPorBfr, V42/MNPorDsc, LAPM_or_Disc, or LAPM_or_Bufr.  
Cellular Enhancement. When enabled, the modem uses non-standard techniques to enhance V.42 operation for cellular  
applications. It is still compatible, however, with modems which do not have the cellular enhancement implemented or  
enabled.  
The AT command is S-Register S91=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
RdcdAsyncBufSiz: Disable  
End Disable Enable  
This configuration option only appears when Async/Sync Mode is configured for Async, and Error Control  
Mode is configured for BufferMode.  
Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size. When enabled, the modem’s buffer size is limited to a maximum of 20 characters.  
The AT command is S-Register S97=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Test — Singleport Mode A  
The Test configuration options determine specifics, such as the duration of a test, for the various  
diagnostic tests available to the modem.  
Table 4-13 shows each Test configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with the Sync Leased  
factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed) shown following the  
colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line. Following this  
is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F.  
Table 4-13  
(1 of 2)  
Test Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
DTE RL(CT140): Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
DTE Remote Loopback. Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 interface by the DTE to initiate a  
remote loopback. An Abort command or test time-out ends this test.  
Enable – The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 (CCITT 140) is turned ON.  
Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped.  
Disable – The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21.  
The AT command is S-Register S51=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
DTE LL(CT141): Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
DTE Local Loopback. Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local  
loopback. An Abort command or test time-out ends this test.  
Enable – The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 (CCITT 141) is turned ON. Local  
loopback ends when the signal is dropped.  
Disable – The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18.  
The AT command is S-Register S52=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
Test Timeout: Disable  
Nxt Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec  
Test Time-out. Determines how long a test runs before aborting.  
Disable – Allows a test to run indefinitely.  
30, 60, or 240 seconds – Allows the test to run for 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 240 seconds.  
The AT command is S-Register S18=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 to 255 seconds.  
Rcv Remote Loop: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Receive Remote Loopback Response. Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued  
from a remote modem.  
The AT command for Enable is &T4.  
The AT command for Disable is &T5.  
4-64  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-13  
(2 of 2)  
Test Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
V54 Address: Disable  
Nxt Disable (Address Values)  
V.54 Address. Determines which remote 392xPlus modem is placed into a remote loopback test. This test can be either  
a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback. This type of addressing should be used for extended data circuits  
(tail circuits).  
Disable – This is used for normal point-to-point leased-line and dial networks.  
Address Values – 01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 0B, 0D, 0F, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 1B, 1D, 1F, 25, 27, 2B, 2D, 2F, 33, 35, 37, 3B, 3D,  
3F, 55, 57, 5B, 5F, 6F, 77, or 7F. This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a  
loopback test. This configuration option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems, used in extended  
data circuits (tail circuits), can be commanded to loopback.  
The AT command for Disable is S-Register S53=0.  
The AT command for V.54 Address is S-Register S53=n, where n is a value from 1 to 34.  
V54 Device Type: Peripheral  
End Peripheral Intermediate  
This configuration option only appears when V54 Address is enabled.  
V.54 Device Type. Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network.  
Peripheral – The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back-to-back with another  
modem.  
Intermediate – The modem is either of the two modems connected back-to-back.  
The AT command for Peripheral is S-Register S54=0.  
The AT command for Intermediate is S-Register S54=1.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Misc — Singleport Mode A  
The Miscellaneous configuration options determine specifics for various functions, including  
network management parameters and remote modem access.  
Table 4-14 shows each Misc (Miscellaneous) configuration option as it appears on the LCD, with  
the Sync Leased factory default setting (the default value if the modem is just being installed)  
shown following the colon ( : ) on the first line and with all available selections listed on the  
second line. Following this is a description of the configuration option. Factory default settings are  
listed in Appendix F.  
Table 4-14  
(1 of 3)  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
StrapsWhenDisc: No_Change  
Nxt No_Change Reload  
Straps When Disconnected. Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active (Saved) configuration area  
are reloaded to Active (Operating) when a disconnect occurs. This is useful in modem pooling applications.  
No Change – Configuration options do not change if a disconnect occurs.  
Reload – The Active (Operating) configuration area, which controls modem operation, is reloaded from the Active  
(Saved) configuration area when a disconnect occurs. This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable  
to start the modem from a known condition after every call. This allows multiple users to issue AT commands to change  
the modem’s operation for their particular call.  
NOTE: If Reload is selected, the following AT commands are disabled although the OK result code appears when the  
following commands are issued: AT&F0, AT&F1, AT&F2, AT&F3, AT&F4, AT&F5, AT&F6, AT&F7, AT&F8,  
AT&W0, AT&W1, AT&W2, and AT&Zn=x.  
The AT command for the Straps When Disconnected configuration option is S-Register S88=n, where n is 0 or 231 for  
No_Change, and 1 or 232 for Reload.  
Speaker Control: OnUntilCarr  
Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On  
Speaker Control. Determines if the speaker is OFF, ON until carrier signal is received by the modem, or ON all the time.  
NOTE: Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch; however, a reset or power cycle will  
restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings.  
The AT command for Off is M0  
The AT command for On Until CD is M1.  
The AT command for On is M2.  
Speaker Volume: Medium  
Nxt Medium Low High  
Speaker Volume. Controls the level of speaker volume.  
NOTE: Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch; however, a reset or power cycle will  
restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings.  
The AT command for Low is L0 or L1.  
The AT command for Medium is L2.  
The AT command for High is L3.  
4-66  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DCP Configuration  
Table 4-14  
(2 of 3)  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
Access frm Remt: Enable  
Nxt Enable Disable  
Access from Remote. Determines if your modem’s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line.  
CAUTION: If this configuration option is disabled, the modem cannot be accessed by another modem.  
Enable – Allows access from a remote modem.  
Disable – Does not allow access from a remote modem.  
NOTE: The remote modem must be a Model 3920Plus or Model 3921Plus modem.  
The AT command is S-Register S55=n, where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable.  
RemAccssPasswrd: 00000000  
Nxt  
"
00000000  
Remote Access Password. Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of  
a local modem. The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem.  
CAUTION: A remote access password should be selected for security purposes.  
NOTE: If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable, the password has no effect.  
The AT command equivalent is S-Registers S56=n, S57=x, S58=y, and S59=z, where n is the leftmost pair of digits, x is  
the second pair of digits, y is the third pair of digits, and z is the rightmost pair (or fourth) pair of digits. For example, if  
the remote access password is 12345678, then the value for S56 is 1 and 2, and the value for S59 is 7 and 8.  
Dir#1_Callback: Disable  
Nxt Disable Enable  
Directory Location 1 Callback. This configuration option controls whether or not the modem’s single number callback  
function is used.  
Disable – Modem does not use the single number callback function.  
Enable – Modem answers a call, disconnects, and dials the number stored in directory location 1.  
NOTE: This function is disabled if dial access security is enabled.  
The AT Command to Disable is S-Register S67=0.  
The AT Command to Enable is S-Register S67=1.  
NMS_Call_Msgs: CallCnct&Prg  
Nxt CallCnct&Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly  
NMS Call Messages. Determines if the modem status and/or call summary information is sent to the NMS. The modem  
can itemize status, such as CallProgress messages, or it can report a summary of activity, such as Call Connect  
messages, to the NMS.  
Call Connect & Progress – Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS.  
Disable – Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS.  
Call Connect Only – The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then transmits a summary of  
these statistics to the NMS. The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports.  
Call Progress Only – The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS. These messages include  
any events that can display on the LCD.  
NOTE: For 6800 Series NMS applications, Disable must be selected.  
The AT commands are S-Register S66=n where n is 0 for Call Connect & Progress, 1 for Disable, 2 for Call Connect  
Only, and 3 for Call Progress Only.  
Modem – Selects the Diagnostic Channel.  
NMS – Selects the Control Channel.  
Disable – Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 4-14  
(3 of 3)  
Miscellaneous Configuration Options — Singleport Mode A  
NetworkPosition: Tributary  
End Tributary Control  
Network Position Identification. Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem.  
NOTE: Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
NOTE: This configuration option is only applicable for leased-line network management applications.  
For the Model 3920Plus, Tributary is the factory default.  
For the Model 3921Plus, Control is the factory default.  
The AT command for Tributary is S74=0.  
The AT command for Control is S74=1.  
NetMngmtAddress: 256  
Nxt  
"
256  
This configuration option is not available in point-to-point tributaries, which are always set to address 01.  
Network Management Address. Determines the address used when accessing a modem from the NMS or when using  
DCP functions that require network management addresses. Within a network link, a control modem can communicate  
with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem’s network management address. Each TMp tributary modem must  
have a different network management address. Address values range from 001 to 256.  
NOTE: Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
Diag Connection: Modem(DC)  
Nxt Modem(DC) NMS(CC) Disable  
This configuration option does not appear when the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is  
configured for Tributary.  
Diagnostic Connection. Allows the configuration of the serial diagnostic port of the modem to be either a diagnostic  
channel that is connected to another modem (DC), or a control channel that is connected to a network management  
device (CC).  
NOTE: Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset.  
Modem (DC) – Selects the Diagnostic Channel.  
NMS (CC) – Selects the Control Channel.  
Disable – Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port.  
The AT command is S-Register S90=n, where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable.  
Link Delay(sec): 0 1  
Nxt 0 1 2 5 10 20 50  
Link Delay Seconds. Controls the length of time (in seconds) a modem will wait for responses from the downstream  
devices. This configuration option is used to calculate protocol timers for polling and normal selection.  
NOTE: The estimated roundtrip delay in the diagnostic link is entered.  
Security — Singleport Mode A  
The Security configuration options allow you to set the parameters that control how a dial access  
security password is entered. For security configuration options, refer to Chapter 6, Dial Access  
Security.  
4-68  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
5
AT Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
S-Register Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Overview  
In Singleport mode, the AT command set provides an alternative method to the modems DCP for  
entering commands that control the operation and configuration of the 392xPlus modems. This  
chapter discusses guidelines necessary to operate AT commands as well as listing the modifiers for  
all AT commands supported by the 392xPlus modems. AT commands are issued from  
asynchronous DTEs.  
Operating Modes  
The 392xPlus modems have two operating modes, Command mode and Data mode. Before a  
modem goes online (establishes a successful connection with a remote modem), it is considered to  
be in Command mode; an idle state where you can modify its operating parameters or issue  
modem commands. (Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either words or  
digits known as Result Codes. Refer to Table 5-1 for a listing of result codes.)  
Once the modems are online, either by answering or originating a call, they automatically switch to  
Data mode. Data mode is a state where any entries made from the DTE are considered data and are  
transmitted and received between modems. The modems remain in Data mode until the connection  
is broken or until they are forced into online Command mode using the escape sequence.  
Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode  
Sometimes it is necessary to change operating parameters while the modems are online. The  
Escape Sequence allows you to toggle the modem between Data mode and online Command mode  
while maintaining a connection with the remote modem. This is accomplished using the escape  
sequence ( + + + ) to exit Data mode and the O command to return to Data mode.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time  
The escape sequence is only issued when the modem is online and in Data mode. The  
392xPlus modems use three consecutive plus ( + ) characters as the escape sequence. (To change  
this value, refer to S-Register S2 discussed later in Table 5-3 in the S-Register Format section.)  
To prevent the modem from interpreting an embedded + + + in data as an escape sequence, the  
Escape Guard Time value determines the length of the pause before and after the escape sequence  
is issued. The 392xPlus modems use a one-second pause as the Escape Guard Time. (To change  
this value, refer to S-Register S12 discussed later in Table 5-3 in the S-Register Format section.)  
To enter online Command mode while in Data mode, enter the following sequence:  
TYPE:  
+ + +  
Use the O command to return to Data mode from online Command mode. Enter the following  
command:  
TYPE:  
ATO  
PRESS:  
Enter  
Command Guidelines  
Review the following guidelines before using any AT Commands.  
The escape sequence ( + + + ) is used to enter online Command mode from Data mode.  
The asynchronous character format for the AT command set must be one of the following:  
8 data bits + no parity + 1 stop bit.  
7 data bits + no parity + 2 stop bits.  
— 7 data bits + parity + 1 stop bit (parity can be odd, even, mark, or space).  
All commands (except A/ and + + + ) must begin with the characters AT and end by pressing  
the Enter key. The AT (or at) prefix clears the command buffer and matches the modem  
speed and parity to that of the DTE. Commands can be upper- or lowercase, but the modem  
will not recognize mixed case prefixes (At or aT).  
Commands can be entered one at a time or in strings. Strings can have up to 40 characters  
after the AT prefix. You can use spaces, hyphens ( – ), and parentheses ( ) as fillers to make  
the commands easier to read; the modem ignores these fillers and they are not counted  
among the characters which make up the command string. Commands must be entered on  
one line and end with the carriage return character (Enter key).  
Commands with the suffix n have several options associated with them. For example, in the  
Ln command, L1 sets the speaker volume to Low and L3 sets the speaker volume to High. If  
no value is entered for the n suffix, the modem assumes a zero ( 0 ) value.  
The A/ command (without pressing the Enter key) causes the modem to repeat the last  
command entered.  
Valid commands are acknowledged with numeric or word result codes (unless the result  
codes have been disabled using the Q1 command). Table 5-1 lists all available result codes  
with numeric and word equivalents.  
5-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Result Codes  
Table 5-1 lists all valid result codes for the 392xPlus modems.  
Table 5-1  
(1 of 2)  
Result Codes  
Numbers  
(1)  
Numbers  
Word  
Description  
(2)  
0
1
2
3
0
OK  
Command executed  
Modem connected to line  
1
2
3
CONNECT  
RING  
Modem receiving a ring voltage from the VF line  
NO CARRIER  
Modem lost carrier signal, does not detect carrier  
signal, or does not detect answer tone  
4
4
ERROR  
Invalid command  
5
5
CONNECT 1200*  
NO DIALTONE*  
BUSY*  
Connection at 1200 bps  
6
6
No dial tone detected  
7
7
Busy or trunk busy signal detected  
No “quiet” answer (@)  
8
8
NO ANSWER*  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
19  
20  
21  
10  
11  
12  
16  
13  
14  
15  
17  
19  
10  
11  
CONNECT 2400*  
CONNECT 4800*  
CONNECT 9600*  
CONNECT 12000*  
CONNECT 14400*  
CONNECT 19200*  
CONNECT 7200*  
CONNECT 16800*  
CONNECT 300*  
CONNECT 2400/ EC****  
CONNECT 4800/ EC****  
Connection at 2400 bps  
Connection at 4800 bps  
Connection at 9600 bps  
Connection at 12,000 bps  
Connection at 14,400 bps  
Connection at 19,200 bps  
Connection at 7200 bps  
Connection at 16,800 bps  
Connection at 300 bps  
Connection at 2400 bps with error control  
Connection at 4800 bps with error control  
* Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled.  
** Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use_DTE_Rate. This displays the  
DTE data rate instead of the line rate.  
*** Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add/EC. If this configuration option is  
set for Add/V42, MNP, then either V42b, V42, MNP5, MNP4, MNP3, MNP2, or NoEC appears.  
**** Only appears when the modulation is V.34 and the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set to Add/EC or  
Add/V.42. Receive Rate (RX) and Transmit Rate (TX) appear in place of the single rate.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-1  
(2 of 2)  
Result Codes  
Numbers  
(1)  
Numbers  
(2)  
Word  
Description  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
77  
78  
12  
16  
13  
17  
15  
5
CONNECT 9600/ EC****  
CONNECT 12000/ EC****  
CONNECT 14400/ EC****  
CONNECT 16800/ EC****  
CONNECT 7200/ EC****  
CONNECT 1200/ EC***  
CONNECT 38400**  
Connection at 9600 bps with error control  
Connection at 12,000 bps with error control  
Connection at 14,400 bps with error control  
Connection at 16,800 bps with error control  
Connection at 7200 bps with error control  
Connection at 1200 bps with error control  
Connection at 38,400 bps  
28  
14  
30  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
77  
78  
CONNECT 19200/ EC****  
CONNECT 57600**  
Connection at 19,200 bps with error control  
Connection at 57,600 bps  
CONNECT 21600*  
Connection at 21,600 bps  
CONNECT 24000*  
Connection at 24,000 bps  
CONNECT 26400*  
Connection at 26,400 bps  
CONNECT 28800*  
Connection at 28,800 bps  
CONNECT 31200*  
Connection at 31,200 bps  
CONNECT 33600*  
Connection at 33,600 bps  
CONNECT 21600/ EC****  
CONNECT 24000/ EC****  
CONNECT 26400/ EC****  
CONNECT 28800/ EC****  
CONNECT 31200/ EC****  
CONNECT 33600/ EC****  
FORBIDDEN  
Connection at 21,600 bps with error control  
Connection at 24,000 bps with error control  
Connection at 26,400 bps with error control  
Connection at 28,800 bps with error control  
Connection at 31,200 bps with error control  
Connection at 33,600 bps with error control  
Forbidden number  
DELAYED ⊗  
Delayed number  
* Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled.  
** Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use_DTE_Rate. This displays the  
DTE data rate instead of the line rate.  
*** Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add/EC. If this configuration option is  
set for Add/V42, MNP, then either V42b, V42, MNP5, MNP4, MNP3, MNP2, or NoEC appears.  
**** Only appears when the modulation is V.34 and the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set to Add/EC or  
Add/V.42. Receive Rate (RX) and Transmit Rate (TX) appear in place of the single rate.  
Only appears in countries with specific dialing requirements.  
5-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
AT Command List  
AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE, such as a PC, and control the modems  
operation and software configuration. AT commands are only applicable when the DTE Dialer  
Type configuration option is set for AT. (Refer to the &Mn and &Qn commands.)  
Table 5-2 lists all AT commands supported by the 392xPlus modems. The first column lists the AT  
command. The second column defines and lists all possible values for that command. The Async  
Dial factory default is listed in bold. The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the  
equivalent DCP command. Use this to reference commands in Chapter 3 or Chapter 4 if further  
description is necessary  
.
AT Command Format  
AT commands are entered in Command mode using the following format:  
TYPE:  
Where:  
PRESS:  
ATXn  
X
is the AT command and n is the specific value for that command.  
Enter  
In Table 5-2, the value for X is listed in the AT Command column and the value for n is listed in  
the Description column.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-2  
(1 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
A/  
A
Repeat Last Command. Reexecutes last command string. (Not to be preceded  
with AT or followed by pressing the Return key.)  
Call Setup\  
Answer  
Answer Mode. Goes off-hook and attempts to establish a connection without  
waiting for a ring.  
None  
Dn  
Dial. Begins the dialing sequence. The dial string  
number) is entered after the D command.  
n
(modifiers and telephone  
None  
Any digit 0–9, *, or # may be dialed as a DTMF tone. Only the digits 0–9 can be  
dialed in Pulse Dial mode. The following example shows how to dial through a  
PBX. The dial string consists of the command string and the telephone number:  
ATD9W5551234  
Modifiers include the following parameters:  
T
P
Tone (DTMF) dial. Any digit 0–9, *, or # can be dialed as tone.  
— Pulse dial. Only digits 0–9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode.  
NOTE: Once a dialing method (tone or pulse) has been specified, it will only  
remain active until the end of that dial string. The modem defaults to the  
value set by the Dialer Type configuration option.  
,
— Pause. Causes the modem to pause before processing the next  
character in the dial string. The length of this pause is determined  
by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option (refer to the  
Line Dialer configuration option group) or by value held in  
S-Register S8.  
W
R
— Wait for dial tone. The modem waits for a second dial tone before  
processing the dial string. This can be the initial dial tone or can  
be used when dialing through a tandem PBX. For example,  
9W 555-6789.  
— Reverse Dial mode. Causes the originating modem to send out  
an answertone once it no longer detects ringback. (Ringback is  
the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call.) The  
R parameter must be the last character in the dial string. For  
correct operation, at least one ringback must be detected;  
therefore, the remote modem should be configured to answer on  
the second ring or subsequent rings.  
@
— Quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the  
number. If the silence is not detected, the modem sends either a  
NO ANSWER result to the DTE.  
!
;
— Hook flash. This causes the modem to go on-hook for  
0.5 seconds then return to off-hook.  
— Return to Command mode. Modem returns to Command mode  
after dialing a number without disconnecting the call.  
Space — Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
— Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
— Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
— Ignored by the dial string, can be included to enhance readability.  
+
( )  
5-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-2  
(2 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
DS=n  
En  
Dial Stored Number. Dials the number stored in Location n (1–24). (To store a  
telephone number, refer to the &Zn=x command.)  
Call Setup\Dial\  
Dial Directory:  
Command Character Echo.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
E0 Disables echo to the DTE.  
E1 Enables echo to the DTE.  
Hn  
Hook Switch Control.  
H0: Call Setup\  
Disconnect or  
Control\Remove  
Make Busy  
H0 Modem goes on-hook.  
H1 Modem goes off-hook.  
H1: Control\ Make  
Busy  
In  
Identification.  
Status\Identity  
I0  
I1  
I2  
Displays product code — 144.  
Displays 3-digit firmware revision number.  
Performs an EPROM check.  
Ln  
Speaker Volume.  
Control\Speaker  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
L0  
L1  
Selects low volume.  
Selects low volume.  
L2 Selects medium volume.  
L3 Selects high volume.  
Mn  
Speaker On/Off.  
Control\Speaker  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
M0 Speaker always OFF.  
M1 Speaker ON until carrier signal is detected.  
M2 Speaker always ON.  
O
P
Return to Online or Data Mode. Returns modem to Data mode from Online  
Command mode.  
None  
Pulse Dial. Sets the modem for Pulse Dial mode.  
NOTE: Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and Sweden.  
Result Codes.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Qn  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Q0 Enables modem to send result codes to the DTE.  
Q1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the DTE.  
Q2 Enables in Originate mode only for modem to send result codes to  
the DTE. Required for most UNIXr applications.  
Sn=r  
Sn?  
T
Change S-Register. Changes contents of S-Register (where  
n
is the S-Register,  
None  
None  
and r is the new value).  
Display S-Register. Displays value of S-Register where  
number.  
n
is the S-Register  
Tone Dial. Sets the modem for tone dial mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Vn  
Result Codes Format.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
V0 Displays result codes in Number (1) format (digits).  
V1 Displays result codes as text.  
V2 Displays result codes in Number (2) format (digits).  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-2  
(3 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
Xn  
Extended Result Code, Dial Tone Detect, and Busy Tone Detect Configuration  
Options.  
Extended Result  
Code:  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Extended  
Result Code:  
Dial  
Detect:  
T
one  
Busy Tone  
Detect:  
Dial Tone Detect:  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
X0  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
X5  
X6  
X7  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Add/EC  
Add/V42.MNP  
Use DTE Rate  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Busy Tone  
Detect:  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Extended Result Code:  
Enable  
Displays all result codes listed in Table 5-1 except for error  
control suffix.  
Disable  
Only displays OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER,  
ERROR.  
Add/EC  
Displays result codes with /EC suffix.  
Add/V42,MNP  
Use DTE Rate  
Dial Tone Detect:  
Displays result codes with V.42 or MNP suffix.  
Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate.  
Enable  
Disable  
Sets the modem for dial tone detect.  
Sets the modem for blind dialing.  
NOTE: It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries.  
Busy Tone Detect:  
Enable  
Disable  
Modem monitors for busy tone.  
Modem ignores busy tone.  
Yn  
Zn  
Long Space Disconnect.  
Configure/Edit/  
Line Dialer  
Y0  
Disable. Ignores long space.  
Y1  
Enable. Disconnects if long space is detected. Enables transmission  
of a long space.  
Reset and Load Active.  
Control\Reset  
Z0  
Loads configuration options from Active (Saved) to Active  
(Operating).  
Z1  
Z2  
Z3  
Loads configuration options from Customer 1 to Active (Operating).  
Loads configuration from Customer 2 to Active (Operating).  
Loads configuration options from Active (Saved) to Active  
(Operating) and performs a reset.  
5-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-2  
(4 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
&Cn  
LSD Control.  
&C0  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
Forced On. LSD ON at all times.  
Standard RS232. LSD is ON when the remote modem’s carrier  
&C1  
signal is detected. LSD is OFF when carrier signal is not detected.  
&C2  
Wink When Disconnect. LSD normally forced ON, turns OFF for  
approximately one second upon disconnecting.  
&C3  
&C4  
Follows DTR. State of LSD follows state of DTR.  
Simulated Control Carrier. State of LSD follows state of remote  
modem’s RTS.  
&C5  
=DTR/Disconnect Off. State of LSD follows state of DTR except  
upon a disconnect where DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF.  
DTR must then toggle OFF and ON to turn LSD ON. Use this  
setting for AT&T DATAKITr applications. Note that to use this  
option, the DTR Action configuration option must be set to  
Stndrd_RS232 (&D1, &D2, or &D3).  
&Dn  
DTR Action.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
&D0  
Ignore. Modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it as  
always ON.  
&D1, &D2, &D3  
Standard RS232. DTR Signal is controlled by the DTE.  
&D4  
Controls On-Hook. Modem does not disconnect from the VF line  
until DTR turns OFF.  
&D5  
Controls Transmitter Mute. Mutes the transmitter whenever DTR  
drops on the DTE interface. This can be used on the answer side  
modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup.  
NOTE: Only the Standard RS232 setting is allowed in Austria.  
&Fn  
Select Factory Default Configuration Options. Loads factory configuration options  
into Active (Operating) area.  
Configure/Factory  
&F0  
&F1  
&F2  
&F3  
&F4  
&F5  
&F6  
&F7  
&F8  
Async Dial  
Sync Dial  
Sync Leased: Answer  
UNIX Dial  
Sync Leased: Originate  
Async Leased: Answer  
Async Leased: Originate  
TMp: Control  
TMp: Trib  
Only the &F0 and &F3 commands will leave you in AT Command mode. The  
other commands will take you out of AT command control and place the modem  
into Dumb mode. The only way to return to AT command control is via the  
diagnostic control panel (DCP). For additional information, refer to Appendix F,  
Default Configuration Options.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-2  
(5 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
&Gn  
V.22bis Guard Tone.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial Line  
&G0  
&G1  
&G2  
Disable.  
550 Hz.  
1800 Hz.  
NOTE: The V.22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries.  
&In  
Dial Transmit Level.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial Line  
The AT command is &In, where n is  
0 for 0 dBm  
1 for –1 dBm  
32 for –32 dBm  
NOTE: In North America the range of allowable values is –10 dBm to –32 dBm.  
This command is disabled in some countries (it answers OK but does not  
change the level).  
&Ln  
Leased Mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
&L0  
&L1  
&L2  
&L3  
&L4  
Disables leased-line operation.  
2-wire originate leased-line operation.  
4-wire originate leased-line operation.  
2-wire answer leased-line operation.  
4-wire answer leased-line operation.  
The &L command will cause the modem to reset before entering or exiting  
Leased Line mode. Therefore, it must be entered as the last command in an  
initialization string.  
5-10  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-2  
(6 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
&Mn and  
&Qn  
Async/Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
&M0, &Q0 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using AT Command  
protocol.  
&M1, &Q1 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using AT Command  
protocol.  
&M2, &Q2 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and dials telephone number  
stored in directory location 1 when DTR signal turns OFF and then  
ON.  
&M3, &Q3 Modem operates in Synchronous mode using AT Command  
protocol.  
&M231  
&M232  
&M233  
&M234  
&M235  
&M236  
Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using no AT Command  
protocol.  
Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using V.25bis  
asynchronous AT Command protocol.  
Modem operates in Synchronous mode using V.25bis  
bisynchronous AT Command protocol.  
Modem operates in Synchronous mode using V.25bis HDLC AT  
Command protocol.  
Modem operates in Asynchronous mode using AT&T Emulation AT  
Command protocol.  
Modem operates in Synchronous mode using no AT Command  
protocol.  
The following commands disable the use of AT commands and force the modem  
into Dumb mode: &M2, &Q2, &M231, &M232, &M233, &M234, &M235, &M236.  
NOTE: The only way to gain control of the modem is via the DCP.  
&Rn  
&Sn  
RTS Action.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
&R0  
&R1  
&R2  
&R3  
Standard RS232.  
Ignores RTS.  
Simulated Control Carrier.  
Control Carrier.  
DSR Control.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
&S0  
&S1  
&S2  
&S3  
&S4  
&S5  
Forced On.  
Standard RS232.  
Wink When Disconnect.  
Follows DTR.  
On Early.  
Delay to Data.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-11  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-2  
(7 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
&Tn  
Tests.  
Test  
&T0  
&T1  
&T2  
&T3  
&T4  
&T5  
&T6  
&T7  
&T8  
&T9  
Abort. Stops any test in progress.  
Local Analog Loop.  
&T4 and &T5:  
Configure\Edit\  
Tests  
Pattern. Transmits and receives a 511 Bit Error Rate Test (BERT).  
Local Digital Loopback test.  
Enables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option.  
Disables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option.  
Remote Digital Loopback test.  
Remote Digital Loopback with Pattern.  
Local Loopback with Pattern.  
Self-Test.  
&Vn  
View Configuration Options. Displays each configuration group within the Active  
(Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration areas as  
well as the telephone numbers stores in directory locations 1–24.  
None  
&V0  
&V1  
&V2  
&V3  
&V4  
Active (Operating) configuration options.  
Active (Saved) configuration options.  
Customer 1 configuration options.  
Customer 2 configuration options.  
Directory locations 1–24.  
&Wn  
&Xn  
Write (Save to Memory). Saves the current configuration options in Active  
(Operating) to one of three configuration areas:  
Configure\Save  
&W0  
&W1  
&W2  
Saved to Active(Save).  
Saved to Customer 1.  
Saved to Customer 2.  
Transmit Clock Source.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
&X0  
&X1  
&X2  
Internal. Modem provides transmit clock source for synchronous data  
(Pin 15).  
External. Modem derives external transmit clock source provided on  
Pin 24 for synchronous data.  
Receive Clock Loop. Modem derives transmit clock source from  
receive signal for synchronous data (Pin 17).  
5-12  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-2  
(8 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
&Zn=x  
Store Telephone Numbers. Modem saves the telephone numbers and dial  
command modifiers (if any) entered for x (up to 40 characters in length) in  
Directory Location n (1–24). For example, the command AT&Z1 = 5551234  
stores the telephone number 555-1234 into directory location 1.  
Call Setup\  
Change Directory  
To clear a telephone number from a memory location, issue the &Zn=x command  
without entering a telephone number  
.
\An  
Maximum Frame Size.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
\A0  
\A1  
\A2  
\A3  
\A4  
\A5  
64 bytes.  
128 bytes.  
192 bytes.  
256 bytes.  
32 bytes.  
16 bytes.  
\Cn  
\Dn  
Error Control Negotiate Buffer.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
\C0  
\C1  
\C2  
Disable.  
Enable.  
Disables and switches modem to Buffer mode.  
CTS Control.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
\D0  
\D1  
\D2  
Forced On. Forces CTS to always ON.  
Standard RS232.  
Wink When Disconnect. CTS is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a  
disconnect.  
\D3  
\D4  
Follows DTR. The state of CTS follows the state of DTR.  
Follows RTS. The state of CTS follows the state of RTS.  
\Gn  
\Kn  
Modem to Modem Flow Control.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
\G0  
\G1  
Disable.  
Enable.  
Buffer Control, Send Break Control, Break Forces Escape.  
Break Buffer  
Control:  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/  
Break Buffer  
Control:  
Send Break  
Control:  
Break Forces  
Escape:  
Send Break  
Control:  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
\K0  
\K1  
\K2  
\K3  
\K4  
\K5  
Discard Data  
Discard Data  
Keep Data  
Keep Data  
Keep Data  
Keep Data  
Break First  
Break First  
Break First  
Break First  
Data First  
Data First  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Break Forces  
Escape:  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-13  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-2  
(9 of 9)  
392xPlus AT Commands  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
AT  
Command  
Description  
\Nn  
Error Control Mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
\N0  
\N1  
\N2  
\N3  
\N4  
\N5  
\N6  
\N7  
Buffer Mode.  
Direct Mode.  
MNP or Disconnect.  
MNP or Buffer.  
V.42/MNP or Disconnect.  
V.42/MNP or Buffer.  
LAPM or Disconnect.  
LAPM or Buffer.  
\Qn  
Flow Control of DTE, Flow Control of Modem.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
Flow Control  
of DTE:  
Flow Control  
of Modem:  
\Q0  
\Q1  
\Q2  
\Q3  
\Q4  
\Q5  
\Q6  
Disable  
Disable  
XON/XOFF  
Disable  
XON/XOFF  
CTS to DTE  
CTS to DTE  
XON/XOFF  
Disable  
RTS to Mdm  
Disable  
XON/XOFF  
RTS to Mdm  
Disable  
\Tn  
No Data Disconnect Timer.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
\T0  
\Tn  
Disable.  
Where n is a value from 1 to 255 in 1-minute increments.  
NOTE: The factory default value is country dependent.  
\Xn  
%An  
%Cn  
IHn  
XON/XOFF Passthrough Flow Control.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
\X0  
\X1  
Disable.  
Enable.  
Error Control Fallback Character.  
%An Where n is an ASCII value from 0 to 127. Factory default is 013  
ASCII.  
MNP5 Data Compression.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
%C0  
%C1  
Disable.  
Enable.  
V.42bis Compression.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
IH0  
IH1  
IH2  
IH3  
Disable.  
Enable (Transmit (TX) only).  
Enable (Receive (RX) only).  
Enable (Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX)).  
5-14  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
S-Register List  
S-Registers affect the operating parameters of the 392xPlus modems. S-Registers are only  
applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT. (Refer to the &Mn and  
&Qn commands.)  
Table 5-3 lists all S-Registers supported by the 392xPlus modems. The first column lists the  
S-Register. The second column lists all possible values for that register. The third column lists the  
key sequence used to enter the equivalent from the DCP. Use this column to reference commands  
in Chapter 4 if further description is necessary.  
NOTE  
In some countries, the range of allowable values of some  
S-Registers are restricted. If the DTE attempts to enter an illegal  
value, the modem will answer OK, but it will set the register to the  
closest legal value. The DTE can check the actual value of the  
register with Sn? command.  
S-Register Format  
S-Registers can be displayed and/or modified when the modem is in Command mode. To display  
the value of an S-Register, issue the following command:  
TYPE:  
Where:  
PRESS:  
ATSn?  
n is the register number.  
Enter  
To modify the value of an S-Register, issue the following command:  
TYPE:  
Where:  
PRESS:  
ATSn=r  
n is the register number, and is the new value.  
r
Enter  
In Table 5-3, the value for n is listed in the S-Register column, and the value for is listed in the  
r
Description column.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-3  
(1 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
1
S0  
Auto-Answer Ring Number . Register determines number of rings the modem  
will count before automatically answering a call.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Enter zero (0) if you do not want the modem to automatically answer any calls.  
Otherwise, enter a value from 1–255 for the number of rings to count before  
answering. The factory setting is 1.  
S2  
AT Escape Character. Register determines ASCII value used for escape  
sequence to enter Command mode from Data mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the escape character. Any value greater than  
127 causes the modem to disable the escape sequence. When the escape  
sequence is disabled, the modem cannot return to Command mode until the  
call is disconnected. The factory setting is 43 (+ key).  
S3  
Carriage Return Character. Register determines ASCII value used as the  
carriage return (Return key). This character is used to end command lines and  
result codes.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the command end character. The factory  
setting is 13 (carriage return key).  
S4  
S5  
Line Feed Character. Register determines ASCII value used as the line feed  
character.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Enter a value from 0–127 for the line feed character. The factory setting is 10  
(ASCII carriage return or line feed).  
Backspace Character. Register determines ASCII value used as the  
backspace (Backspace key). This character moves the cursor to the left and  
erases the previous character.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Enter a value from 0–127. The factory setting is 8 (backspace key).  
1
S6  
Blind Dial Pause . Register determines how long (in seconds) the modem  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
waits after going off-hook before dialing a telephone number if using result  
code X0, X1, or X3.  
Enter a value from 2–255 seconds. The factory setting is 2.  
1
S7  
No Answer Time-out . Register determines how long (in seconds) an  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
originating modem waits before abandoning a call when no answer tone is  
received.  
Enter a value from 1–255 seconds. The factory setting is 45.  
S8  
“,” Pause Time for the Dial Modifier. Register determines how long (in  
seconds) the modem pauses when it encounters a comma (,) in the Dial  
command string.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Enter a value from 0–255 seconds. The factory setting is 2.  
1
S10  
No Carrier Disconnect . Register determines how long (in tenths of seconds)  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
the modem allows the carrier signal to be OFF before disconnecting the call.  
Enter a value from 0–254 in 0.1 second increments. A value of 255 disables  
this register. The factory setting is 20 (2 seconds).  
1
The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries.  
5-16  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-3  
(2 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S12  
Escape Guard Time. Register sets the value (in 20-millisecond increments) for  
the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued. The guard  
time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence  
characters.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Enter a value from 0–255 in 20-millisecond increments. The factory setting of  
50 equals 1000 milliseconds or one second.  
S14  
S15  
S18  
Asymmetric Rate Mode. Register determines whether VF rates for transmitting  
and receiving are identical when using V.34 modulation on a dial line. The  
factory setting is Enable.  
Configure\Edit\Di  
al Line  
Asymmetric Rate Mode. Register determines whether VF rates for transmitting  
and receiving are identical when using V.34 modulation on a leased line. The  
factory setting is Enable.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Test Time-out. Register sets the duration (in seconds) for the modem tests.  
This automatically cancels any test in progress after the time of this register  
expires. Any test can be manually canceled by issuing the escape sequence  
(+++) followed by the &T0 command.  
Configure\Edit\  
Tests  
Enter a value from 0–255 seconds. A value of 0 disables this register. The  
factory setting is Disable (0).  
S26  
S40  
RTS-to-CTS Delay. Register sets the length of time (in 10-millisecond  
increments) the modem waits after receiving RTS before issuing CTS to the  
DTE.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
Enter a value from 0–255. The factory setting is 0.  
Auto Make Busy. Register determines if the modem goes off-hook under  
certain conditions. This register should only be enabled when the modem is  
located behind a user’s Private Branch Exchange (PBX). This register is only  
valid for Model 3921Plus modems.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-3  
(3 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S41  
Dial-Line Rate. Register determines the modem’s data rate and modulation  
scheme for operation on dial lines.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial Line  
Register has the following values:  
1 = 14,400 (V.32bis)  
2 = 12,000(V.32bis)  
3 = 9600 (V.32bis)  
4 = 7200 (V.32bis)  
5 = 4800 (V.32bis)  
6 = 2400 (V.22bis)  
7 = 1200 (V.22)  
8 = 1200 (212A)  
10 = 0–300 (V.21)  
11 = 0–300 (103J)  
12 = 1200/75 (V.23)  
13 = 75/1200 (V.23)  
18 = 600/75 (V.23)  
19 = 75/600 (V.23)  
20 = 19,200 (V.32 terbo)  
21 = 16,800 (V.32 terbo)  
22 = 33,600  
23 = 31,200  
24 = 28,800 (V.34)  
25 = 26,400 (V.34)  
26 = 24,000 (V.34)  
27 = 21,600 (V.34)  
28 = 19,200 (V.34)  
29 = 16,800 (V.34)  
30 = 14,400 (V.34)  
31 = 12,000 (V.34)  
32 = 9600 (V.34)  
33 = 7200 (V.34)  
34 = 4800 (V.34)  
35 = 2400 (V.34)  
The factory setting is 28,800 (V.34).  
S43  
V.32bis Train. Register controls the modem’s train time for V.32bis/V.32 mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Long  
1 = Short  
The factory setting is Long.  
5-18  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-3  
(4 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S44  
Leased-Line Rate. Register determines the modem’s data rate and modulation  
scheme for operation on either 2-wire or 4-wire leased lines in either Answer  
or Originate mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Register has the following values:  
1 = 14,400 (V.32bis)  
2 = 12,000 (V.32bis)  
3 = 9600 (V.32)  
4 = 7200 (V.32bis)  
5 = 4800(V.32)  
6 = 2400 (V.22bis)  
11 = 14,400 (V.33)  
12 = 12,000 (V.33)  
13 = 9600 (V.29)  
14 = 7200 (V.29)  
15 = 4800 (V.29)  
16 = 4800 (V.27bis)  
17 = 2400 (V.27bis)  
18 = 19,200 (V.32 terbo)  
19 = 16,800 (V.32 terbo)  
20 = 19,200 (TMp)  
21 = 14,400 (TMp)  
22 = 9600 (TMp)  
23 = 7200 (TMp)  
24 = 4800 (TMp)  
25 = 2400 (TMp)  
26 = 33,600  
27 = 31,200  
28 = 28,800 (V.34)  
29 = 26,400 (V.34)  
30 = 24,000 (V.34)  
31 = 21,600 (V.34)  
32 = 19,200 (V.34)  
33 = 16,800 (V.34)  
34 = 14,400 (V.34)  
35 = 12,000 (V.34)  
36 = 9600 (V.34)  
37 = 7200 (V.34)  
38 = 4800 (V.34)  
39 = 2400 (V.34)  
The factory setting is 28,800 (V.34).  
2
S45  
Leased TX Level . Register determines the modem’s transmit power output  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
level over leased lines.  
Enter a value from 0 to –15 dBm. The factory setting is 0 dBm.  
2
The range of allowable values is 0 through 15 in North America, and 1 through 15 in other countries. The default is  
country dependent.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-3  
(5 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S46  
Auto Dial Backup. Register determines if the modem performs an automatic  
dial backup if the leased lines fail.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
S47  
Auto Dial Standby. Register determines if the modem performs an automatic  
dial standby if in Dial Backup mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = 15 minutes  
2 = 1 hour  
3 = 4 hours  
4 = Test(2min)  
5 = Adv 15min  
6 = Adv 30min  
7 = Adv 1 hr  
8 = Adv2minTest  
The factory setting is Disable.  
S48  
Leased-Line Carrier On Level. Register determines if the modem disconnects  
if the carrier signal on leased lines falls below –26 dBm or –43 dBm.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = 43 dBm  
1 = –26 dBm  
2 = –33 dBm  
The factory setting is country dependent (usually 43 dBm). In France, the  
factory setting is –26 dBm in 4-wire operation and –33 dBm in 2-wire  
operation.  
S49  
S51  
Buffer Disconnect Delay. Register determines how long the modem continues  
to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is commanded to  
disconnect by a locally attached DTE.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
Enter a value from 0–255 seconds. (A value of 0 disables this register.) The  
factory setting is 10 seconds.  
DTE RL (CT140). Register determines if the modem performs a remote digital  
loopback if it receives a CT140 signal from the DTE.  
Configure\Edit\  
Tests  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
5-20  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-3  
(6 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S52  
DTE LL (CT141). Register determines if the modem performs a local analog  
loopback if it receives a CT141 signal from the DTE.  
Configure\Edit\  
Tests  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
S53  
S54  
S55  
S56  
V.54 Address. Identifies the address of the modem to be placed in a loopback  
test.  
Configure\Edit\  
Tests  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1–34 = Modem address  
The factory setting is Disable.  
V.54 Device Type. Identifies where the modem is physically located in the  
network.  
Configure\Edit\  
Tests  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Peripheral  
1 = Intermediate  
The factory setting is Peripheral.  
Access From Remote. Register determines if a modem’s DCP can be  
accessed by a remote modem.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
Remote Access Password. Register allows entry of the first pair (leftmost) of  
digits of a remote access password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid. For  
example, if the remote access password is 12345678, then S56 = 1 and 2.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
S57  
S58  
S59  
Remote Access Password. Register allows entry of the second pair of digits of  
a remote access password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Remote Access Password. Register allows entry of the third pair of digits of a  
remote access password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Remote Access Password. Register allows entry of the fourth pair (rightmost)  
of digits of a remote access password. Any value from 00 to 99 is valid.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-3  
(7 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S61  
CT111 Rate Control. Register determines if CT111 Rate is disabled, set for  
Fallback 1 or Fallback 2.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
CT111 Rate allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA-232-D  
interface. This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate  
Control signal. It is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode.  
For proper operation, disable the V.32bis Autorate and V.32bis Automode  
configuration options.  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Fallback  
2 = Fallback 2  
The factory setting is Disable.  
S62  
S63  
S64  
V.25bis Coding. Register identifies to the modem the type of coding used by  
the DTE while in V.25bis mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = ASCII  
1 = EBCDIC  
The factory setting is ASCII.  
V.25bis Idle Character. Register identifies to the modem the type of idle fill  
used by the DTE while in V.25bis mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Mark  
1 = Flag  
The factory setting is Mark.  
V.25bis New Line Character. Register identifies to the modem the type of line  
terminator used by the DTE while in V.25bis mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Carriage Return and Line Feed  
1 = Carriage Return  
2 = Line Feed  
The factory setting is carriage return and line feed (CR + LF).  
S65  
Line Current Disconnect. Register determines if the modem disconnects if an  
8-millisecond or 90-millisecond interruption in loop current occurs.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable (8msec)  
1 = Enable (90msec)  
2 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable (8msec).  
5-22  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-3  
(8 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S66  
NMS Call Messages. Register determines if the modem sends information  
regarding status (Call Progress) and/or sends summarized call statistics (Call  
Connect) to the 6700 Series Network Management System (NMS).  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Call Connect & Progress  
1 = Disable  
2 = Call Connect Only  
3 = Call Progress Only  
The factory setting is Call Connect & Progress.  
S67  
S69  
Directory Location 1 Callback. Register determines if the modem uses the  
single number callback function.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
Make Busy Via DTR. Register determines if the modem goes off-hook (busy)  
when DTR is OFF.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
S70  
S71  
V.27bis Train. Register controls the train time for V.27bis operation.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Short  
1 = Long  
The factory setting is Short.  
XTXC Clamps TXC. Register allows the modem’s TXC output to be clamped  
off when TX Clock Source is configured for External.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
S72  
RTS Antistreaming. Register determines the antistreaming operation of the  
modem.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = 10 sec  
2 = 30 sec  
3 = 1 min  
4 = 2 min  
5 = 3 min  
6 = 5 min  
The factory setting is Disable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-3  
(9 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S74  
Network Position Identification. Register identifies each modem as either a  
control or tributary modem.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Tributary  
1 = Control  
The factory setting is Tributary.  
S75  
S76  
Network Management Address. Register determines the modem’s network  
address. This address is used when accessing the modem from the 6700  
Series NMS.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial  
Enter a value from 0 (network address 001) to 255 (network address 256).  
The factory setting is 0.  
V.32bis Autorate (Dial Line). Register determines if Autorating is used on dial  
lines when connected in V.32bis mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
S78  
V.32bis Automode (Dial Line). Register allows the modem (when operating on  
dial lines) to automatically detect and connect to the remote modem’s  
modulation scheme.  
Configure\Edit\  
Dial Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
S82  
S84  
V.32bis Autorate (Leased Line). Register determines if Autorating is used on  
leased lines when connected in V.32bis mode.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased Line  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
AT Command Mode. Register determines how the modem responds to valid  
and invalid AT commands.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Normal  
1 = No ERROR  
2 = No Strap or ERROR  
The factory setting is Normal.  
5-24  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-3  
(10 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S85  
Fast Disconnect. Register allows the modem to disconnect immediately after  
receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic  
control panel.  
Configure\Edit\  
Line Dialer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
S88  
S89  
Straps When Disconnected. Register determines whether or not configuration  
options in the Active (Saved) configuration area are reloaded to Active  
(Operating) when a disconnect occurs.  
Configure\Edit\  
Misc  
Register has the following values:  
0 or 231 = No Change  
1 or 232 = Reload  
The factory setting is No Change.  
V.42 Automatic Request for Retransmission (ARQ) Window Size Increase.  
Register allows the ARQ window size to be set to a value from six frames to  
fifteen frames.  
For best performance, this register should remain at its default setting of six  
frames (ATS89 = 0). The only reason to change it is for satellite delays.  
Register has the following values:  
0 = six frames  
1 = seven frames  
2 = eight frames  
3 = nine frames  
4 = ten frames  
5 = eleven frames  
6 = twelve frames  
7 = thirteen frames  
8 = fourteen frames  
9 = fifteen frames  
The factory setting is 0 (six frames).  
This command only applies when the modem connects using V.42bis data  
compression or V.42 error control. If the modem is configured for Direct mode,  
MNP mode, Buffer mode, or Synchronous operation, this command is ignored.  
This command does not have a front panel equivalent.  
S90  
DTE Rate = VF. Register allows the DTE’s data rate to be equal to the VF  
(telephone line) data rate. If Enabled, the data rate between the DTE and  
modem is the same as the modem’s VF data rate. As a result, when the  
modem is in Data mode, the speed of the data passed between the modem  
and DTE occurs at the VF data rate.  
Configure\Edit\  
DTE Interface  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table 5-3  
(11 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S91  
S92  
S93  
Cellular Enhancement. Register allows the modem to use non-standard  
techniques to enhance V.42 operation for cellular applications. It is still  
compatible, however, with modems which do not have the cellular  
enhancement implemented or enabled.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
V.29 Train On Data. When enabled, the modem receiver can train based upon  
the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant modem. This  
function is necessary for a remote (tributary) modem in a V.29 multipoint  
network and is recommended for a control modem as well.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
V.29 Retrain. When enabled, the modem transmits a training sequence  
whenever it receives one. This configuration option should normally be  
disabled for control modems.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
S94  
S95  
V29 Link Configuration. Selects point-to-point or multipoint operation.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased  
Register has the following values:  
0 = PointToPoint  
1
= Multipoint  
The factory setting is PointToPoint.  
Trellis Multipoint (TMp) Train Time. Defines the length of time energy is sent  
from the tributary modem to the control modem. More severe line conditions  
require longer time selections.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased  
Register has the following values:  
0 = 10 milliseconds  
1 = 20 milliseconds  
2 = 50 milliseconds  
3 = 100 milliseconds  
4 = 200 milliseconds  
5 = 300 milliseconds  
The factory setting is 0 (10 milliseconds).  
5-26  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Command Set and S-Registers  
Table 5-3  
(12 of 12)  
392xPlus S-Registers  
DCP LCD  
Command  
Sequence  
S-Register  
Description  
S96  
Trellis Multipoint (TMp) Tx Preemphasis. Provides amplification for  
Configure\Edit\  
frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line  
attenuation.  
Leased  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
The factory setting is Enable.  
S97  
S98  
Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size. Register limits the modem’s buffer size to  
a maximum of 20 characters.  
Configure\Edit\  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
Special Standby. Supports automatic dial standby when a third modem is used  
for dial backup.  
Configure\Edit\  
Leased  
Register has the following values:  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
The factory setting is Disable.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dial Access Security  
6
Chapter 6, Dial Access Security, is not available for viewing online because it contains  
security-sensitive information. Dial Access Security information is available in the COMSPHERE  
392xPlus Modems Models 3920Plus and 3921Plus Installation and Operation Manual, Document  
No. 3920-A2-GN31-30.  
To order product documentation contact your sales representative.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu Tree  
A
Overview  
Pages A-2 and A-3 provide a menu tree for the 392xPlus modems.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Displays current status of modem along with  
data rate and error control mode.  
“Status”  
to next page  
Status  
Configure  
PList  
(Tributary  
only)  
Display  
Clear  
Change  
Add  
Acquire  
Ld EditArea frm:  
Active  
Delete  
Skip  
Activ (Operating)  
Customer1  
Customer2  
Factory  
Active (Saved)  
Sync_Dial  
Async_Dial  
Sync_Leased  
Async_Leased  
TMp  
UNIX_Dial  
Port Select  
(Multiport Mode)  
Choose Mode  
Choose Mode  
Service_Log  
Record  
DeviceHS  
Identity  
V.34  
Options  
Trib  
Control  
Answer Originate  
VF  
Backup  
DTE  
Major  
Minor  
Status  
Dial  
Thresh  
Security  
Port1  
Port2  
Port3  
Port4  
Ser#  
TxRate  
RxRate  
SymbolRate  
TxLevel  
AsymRate  
Mod#  
FRev  
HPt#  
FPt#  
Country  
Display  
Clear  
LSD  
DTR  
DSR  
Tst  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
Line = Pri 4W APL  
Line = Pri 2W APL  
Line = Bkup 2W APL  
Line = Dial Backup  
Display Clear  
Line = Dial ONL  
Line = No Sync  
Y
SigQual  
RcvLevel  
Sig/Noise  
NrEchLvl  
FarEchLv  
FarEchDel  
EchoFreqOff  
Choose Function  
Edit StrapGroup  
Save  
Phase Hts  
Impul Hts  
DropOuts  
Retrains  
Phas Jtr  
NonLinear  
FreqOffset  
Gain Hts  
Customer1  
(Singleport  
mode & Async  
only)  
Active (Saved)  
Customer2  
(Singleport  
ode only)  
(Singleport  
ode only)  
m
m
DTE_Interface  
Leased_Line  
Test  
Line_Dialer  
Security  
MIsc  
Dial_Line  
V42/MNP/Buffer  
DTE_Dialer  
(Mux  
Enabled only)  
MUX  
Copy  
Port1  
Port2*  
Port3*  
Port4*  
Async  
Rate*  
EIA  
*Not shown when the Digital Bridge configuration option is enabled.  
A-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Menu Tree  
(Singleport  
mode only)  
from previous page  
Y
z
z
Control  
SubHS  
Call_Setup  
Remote  
Tlk/Data  
(Dial  
Backup  
only)  
Test  
Security  
Y
Choose Address  
(TMp Control only)  
Answer Y  
Change_Directory  
Dial  
Y
Dial_Standby Y  
Disconnect  
or  
Choose Password  
(TMp only)  
Y
Return_to_Dial  
Directory Locations 1 – 24  
(Not i  
n
TMp Trib)  
Secondary  
Prim (data blckd)  
Y
Y
Self  
Rem_Digital_Loop  
Pattern  
(ExitRem  
instead of Remote  
using Remote mode)  
appears  
when  
Y
Y
Abort  
Loc_Analog_Loop  
Loc_Digital_Loop  
Y
Y
Set_Access_Ctrl  
Reset_Security  
(Admin Password?)  
Set_Orig_Secur  
EditPassWdTable  
Set_Answer_Sec  
Set_Admin_PsWd  
(3921Plus  
only)  
Make_Busy  
or  
Download_Code  
(DownloadSoftware)  
Data_Stream  
RemoveMakeBusy  
Speaker  
Reset  
VF_Thresh_Update  
Service_Line  
EIA_LEDs  
or  
Does not appear in TMp Control  
mode.  
DiscServiceLine  
z
Y
Does not appear in Remote mode.  
(Self, Loc_Digital_Loop, and  
Pattern appear if the secondary  
channel is used.  
Rem_Digital_Loop does not appear  
i
n T p mode.)  
M
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
Troubleshooting  
B
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Overview  
This appendix points out basic problems that can occur when operating a 392xPlus modem. Use  
Tables B-1 through B-6 to check out these problems. If you are having data communication  
difficulties, such as periodic character loss, random errors, or constant format errors, use the  
loopback tests described in the est section of Chapter 4. With these tests you can usually isolate  
T
the fault in your system by using the process of elimination. If problems continue to occur,  
contact your service representative.  
Table B-1  
Modem Health  
Symptom  
Action  
The modem did not pass the  
power-up self-test.  
Contact your service representative.  
The power LED does not light or the  
LCD does not display information.  
Make sure the modem’s ON/OFF switch is in the ON position.  
Make sure the power supply is connected to the dc power receptacle on the  
modem.  
If the Power LED and/or LCD do not operate, contact your service  
representative.  
A problem is suspected after the  
power-up self-test.  
Perform a self-test via the modem’s DCP or type AT&T9 if using AT commands.  
Perform a local analog loopback with a Pattern test. If the modem consistently  
registers errors, contact your service representative.  
If the modem passes the above tests and a problem still exists, then the  
problem is probably not with your modem.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-1  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table B-2  
Leased-Line Operation  
Symptom  
Action  
The modems do not train-up on  
leased lines.  
Verify that the correct cabling is used for your application. Refer to Chapter 2,  
Modem Installation.  
Verify that one modem is configured for Answer mode and the other is  
configured for Originate mode. (For TMp operation one modem must be  
configured as a control modem and the other as a tributary modem.)  
Verify that both modems are using the same modulation scheme.  
Verify that both modems are configured for the appropriate leased-line mode.  
For example, if you have a 4-wire leased line, then the modems must be  
configured for 4-wire operation.  
Table B-3  
Dial Backup Operation  
Symptom  
Action  
The dial backup line is present, but  
the modems cannot connect.  
Verify that the correct telephone number for the remote modem is stored in  
directory location 1.  
Verify that both modems have the Auto Dial Backup configuration option set to  
Enable. Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 4.  
Call the answering modem with a handset and verify that the modem’s answer  
tone is transmitted.  
The modem does not switch back to  
leased-line operation.  
Verify that the Auto Dial Standby configuration option is enabled. Refer to  
Leased Line in Chapter 4.  
B-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
Troubleshooting  
Table B-4  
Modem — DTE Connection  
Symptom  
Action  
The modem does not accept or echo  
back AT commands.  
Verify that the cable between the Async port of the DTE and the modem is a  
standard RS-232 cable. (Null modem cables, also known as crossover cables,  
do not work in this application.)  
Verify that the Command Character Echo configuration option is enabled. Refer  
to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4.  
Verify that the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT. Refer to DTE  
Dialer in Chapter 4.  
Verify that the Result Codes configuration option is enabled. Refer to DTE  
Dialer in Chapter 4.  
Reload the Async Dial factory configuration area to guarantee that all  
configuration options are returned to their proper setting.  
Make sure that all AT commands are terminated with a carriage return.  
Verify that the Carriage Return Character configuration option matches what is  
used by the DTE. Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4.  
Verify that the DTE has a valid character format. Valid format consists of 8 data  
bits with no parity or 7 data bits with even, odd, mark or space parity.  
Verify that the DTE’s data rate is supported by the modem. Refer to the Async  
DTE Rate configuration option in the DTE Interface section of Chapter 4.  
If using a PC, verify that the modem is attached to the correct communications  
port.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-3  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table B-5  
(1 of 2)  
Modem — VF Connection  
Symptom  
Action  
The modem does not receive a dial  
tone.  
Attach a telephone directly to the telephone line to verify that a dial tone exists.  
Make sure the VF line is connected to the modem’s rear jack labeled DIAL.  
The modem does not go off-hook  
and answer an incoming call.  
Verify that the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is set to a value  
other than 0 (disable). Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 4.  
Verify that the DTE is providing DTR to the modem.  
If the DTE does not provide DTR to the modem, verify that the modem’s DTR  
Action configuration option is set for Ignore. Refer to DTE Interface in  
Chapter 4.  
Verify that all cables are attached to the correct connectors on the rear of the  
modem.  
The modem goes off-hook, answers,  
but does not connect.  
Perform a Local Analog Loopback test and verify that data entered at the DTE  
is echoed back to the DTE.  
Verify that the originating modem is compatible with your receiving modem.  
Verify that the originating modem recognizes your modem’s answer tone.  
Verify that the originating modem supports your modem’s modulation schemes.  
The 392xPlus modem recognizes CCITT V.34, V.32bis, V.32, V.22bis, V.22,  
V.21, Bell 212A, and Bell 103J. The 392xPlus modem does not support other  
vendors’ proprietary modulation schemes.  
Force your modem to operate at the same modulation scheme as the  
originating modem to see if they connect.  
The Originate Mode does not  
function properly.  
Verify that the modem’s DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to the  
correct setting: either AT, DTR Dialing, V.25bis Async, V.25bis Bisync, or  
V.25bis HDLC. Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4.  
The modem does not go off-hook  
and begin dialing.  
If using AT Dialing, refer to Table B-4, Modem — DTE Connection.  
If using DTR Dialing, verify the telephone number stored in directory location 1,  
and verify that the DTE is raising DTR from Off to ON to initiate a dial.  
If using V.25bis Async, verify that the correct character format is set to 7 data  
bits with even parity and 1 stop bit, and the carriage return and line feed are  
used as command terminators.  
If using V.25bis Bisync, verify that the correct character format uses two  
synchronous control characters and a start-of-text control character before the  
text block, and an end-of-text control character after the text block.  
If using V.25bis HDLC, verify that the character format uses flag, address, and  
control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag  
after the text block.  
The modem dials but does not  
connect.  
If the modem is operating behind a PBX, determine if a 9 and comma are  
needed before the telephone number  
.
Verify whether Tone or Pulse dialing is needed.  
Verify that both modems are configured the same in regard to Error Control. Try  
calling in Buffer mode.  
If both modems use V.32bis or V.32 modulation, try setting the modem’s V.32bis  
Train configuration option to Long.  
B-4  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
Troubleshooting  
Table B-5  
(2 of 2)  
Modem — VF Connection  
Symptom  
Action  
Intermittent disconnects, high error  
rates, or excessive retransmissions  
occur.  
Perform an End-to-End test. Refer to Pattern located in the Test Branch section  
of Chapter 3.  
The modem establishes and then  
disconnects the call.  
You may have a poor VF connection. Try dialing again.  
The remote modem may have encountered an error control (EC) disconnect. If  
the modems cannot negotiate EC, then a disconnect occurs.  
The remote modem may be in a forced Error Control mode (disconnect if there  
is no error control). Reconfigure your modem to V.42/MNP or Buffer and try  
again.  
Check the LCD to determine the reason for the disconnect.  
Perform a Local Analog Loopback test.  
High error rates occur when running  
a local loopback or self-test.  
Incoming rings can cause data errors during a loopback test. Abort the test,  
disconnect the modular VF cord, and restart the test.  
Table B-6  
Online Operation  
Symptom  
Action  
The data is scrambled.  
Verify that the character format (data bits, parity, and stop bits) is set to the  
same value in both modems.  
Data is missing during a transfer.  
Verify that you are using the same method of flow control for both the modem  
and the DTE.  
If using XON/XOFF flow control, verify that the modem’s parity matches the  
DTE’s parity.  
Table B-7  
Mux Operation  
Symptom  
Action  
The MUX configuration option does  
not appear under DTE Interface.  
The Dial Access Security feature is enabled. Verify that both the Answer and  
Originate security options are disabled. Refer to sections Set Answer Sec and  
Set Orig Sec in Chapter 6.  
The Dial Line Rate or LeasedLine Rate configuration option is set to an invalid  
modulation. Refer to the Dial Line or Leased Line configuration option in the  
Multiport Mode section of Chapter 4 for the valid rates.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
 
Pin Assignments  
C
Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Overview  
This appendix lists EIA-232-D and VF TELCO pin assignments and provides information about  
auxiliary cables which are not supplied.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
EIA-232-D Pin Assignments  
Table C-1 lists the EIA-232-D pin assignments for the modem.  
Table C-1  
EIA-232-D Pin Assignments  
EIA  
Circuit  
Signal  
Source  
Pin  
Name  
CCITT  
Circuit Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AA  
101  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
102  
109  
Shield  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
BA  
BB  
CA  
CB  
CC  
AB  
CF  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DCE  
DCE  
Transmit Data  
Receive Data  
Request-to-Send  
Clear-to-Send  
Data Set Ready  
Signal Ground  
Line Signal Detect  
LSD  
+12V  
DCE  
Reserved for test purposes (may be used to drive one  
RS-232 load)  
10  
–12V  
Reserved for test purposes (may be used to drive one  
RS-232 load)  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
CT112  
CI  
Unassigned  
112  
DCE  
Data Signal Rate Select  
Reserved for future function  
Reserved for future function  
Transmit Clock  
TXC  
DB  
114  
DCE  
Reserved for future function  
Receive Clock  
RXC  
CT141  
DTR  
CT140  
RI  
DD  
LL  
115  
141  
108  
140  
125  
111  
113  
142  
DCE  
DTE  
DTE  
DTE  
DCE  
DTE  
DTE  
DCE  
Local Loopback  
CD  
RL  
CE  
CH  
DA  
TM  
Data Terminal Ready  
Remote Loopback  
Ring Indicator  
CT111  
XTXC  
TEST  
Data Rate Selector  
External Clock  
Test Mode  
C-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
Pin Assignments  
VF Connector Pin Assignments  
Table C-2 lists the connector pin assignments for Model 3920Plus modular jacks as well as the  
pin assignments for the TELCO jacks. (See Figure C-1.)  
Table C-2  
VF Connector Pin Assignments  
Type of Telco Jack  
Pin  
Leased  
Dial  
6-Pin  
Leased  
RJ11  
JM8  
1
2
4-Wire: TX  
2-Wire: TX/RX  
Ring 1  
4-Wire: TX  
Tip 1  
2-Wire: TX/RX  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ring  
Tip  
Ring  
Tip  
Ring  
Tip  
4-Wire: RX  
4-Wire: RX  
Tip  
Ring  
Figure C-1. VF Pin Orientation  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied  
To add an external telephone to your modem, use an external “Y” cable to connect the phone  
line to both the modem and the telephone (Figure C-2).  
Figure C-2. Wiring Diagram — “Y” Cable for External Telephone  
C-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pin Assignments  
For 2-wire leased-line connections to a JM8 network interface, use an 8-position to 6-position  
crossover cable (Figure C-3) according to the following FCC requirements:  
“The RJ series of jacks should not be used for connecting data equipment to nonswitched  
private line networks — specifically, the service equivalents of the pre-divestiture Series 3002  
(Category II, Tariff #260) service. There is a substantial difference in transmit levels  
permitted in the private line service and those permitted in the public switched network. The  
industry standard is now an 8-pin keyed modular jack known as the USOC JM8 (Bellcor  
echnical Reference: TR-EOP-000242, Issue 1, released May 1985.) When ordering the  
installation of the USOC JM8, specify the appropriate wiring options:  
e
T
2-wire operations  
4-wire operations w/o TEK leads  
4-wire operations with TEK leads  
TEK leads are for loopback purposes.  
A 50-pin version is being considered for multiple line connections.”  
8-POSITION  
PLUG PIN NO.  
6-POSITION  
PLUG PIN NO.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
6
7
8
Figure C-3. Wiring Diagram — 8-Position to 6-Position Crossover Cable  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
To connect a Model 3920Plus port to another modem’s EIA-232-D interface, use a 25-pin  
crossover cable (Figure C-4).  
25-POSITION  
PLUG PIN NO.  
25-POSITION  
PLUG PIN NO.  
1
1
TXD  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
2
3
2
3
RXD  
RTS  
4
5
4
5
6
7
8
6
7
8
DSR  
SG  
DSR  
SG  
LSD  
LSD  
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
RXC  
RXC  
DTR  
DTR  
CT140  
CT140  
XTXC  
XTXC  
CT142  
(TEST)  
CT142  
(TEST)  
Figure C-4. Wiring Diagram — 25-Pin Crossover Cable  
C-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CCITT V.25bis Dialing  
Command and Responses  
D
Call Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Call Failure Indication (CFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Overview  
This appendix describes V.25bis dialing commands and responses. CCITT V.25bis is an  
international dialing protocol that permits direct and stored number dialing using DTEs in either  
Asynchronous, bisynchronous, or HDLC operating mode. The 392xPlus modems support  
V.25bis request and answer commands. As commands are entered from the DTE, the 392xPlus  
modems issue a response to the DTE which indicates if the call failed or connected, or if the  
command is valid or invalid.  
The following sections discuss those V.25bis commands supported by the 392xPlus modems and  
the response to those commands. Tables D-1 and D-2 list the V.25bis commands and response  
messages.  
NOTE  
The 392xPlus modem must be configured for V.25bis dialing.  
Refer to DTE Dialer Type configuration option in Chapter 4,  
DCP Configuration.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Call Request Commands  
Call Request commands are issued from the DTE to the modem and are responsible for initiating  
dial calls. Call Request commands include Call Request with Number Provided (CRN) and Call  
Request with Stored Memory Address Provided (CRS).  
Call Request with Number Provided (CRN)  
The CRN command dials the telephone number entered from the DTE. CRN is similar to the  
ATD command.  
The CRN command format is:  
CRN  
n
Where:  
n is the telephone number to be dialed.  
Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided (CRS)  
The CRS command dials the telephone number stored in the request directory location. CRS is  
similar to the ATDS command.  
The CRS command format is:  
CRS  
x
Where:  
x is directory location 1–24.  
The modem responds to the command with either a VAL (valid) or INV (invalid) response  
followed by a call progress report such as connect (CNX) or failure (CFI).  
Call Response  
A
Call Response indicates if the command was accepted by the modem. Call Response includes  
Call Failure Indication (CFI) and Call Connecting (CNX).  
Call Failure Indication (CFI)  
The CFI response is issued to the DTE if the modem fails a CRN or CRS command. CFI is  
similar to the AT result codes BUSY, NO ANSWER, NO CARRIER, NO DIALTONE, and  
ERROR.  
The CFI response format is:  
CFIxx  
Where:  
xx is  
ET Engaged tone.  
NS Number not stored.  
CB Local DCE busy.  
RT Time-out on ring tone.  
AB Abort call on time-out.  
NT Answer tone not detected.  
FC Forbidden call.  
D-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CCITT V.25bis Dialing  
ET is similar to the Call Failure Messages Busy Signal and Trunk Busy and the result code  
BUSY.  
NS is similar to the Common Operational Message Invalid Number and the result code ERROR.  
CB is similar to the Call Failure Messages Dial Line in Use and No Dial-Test and the result code  
ERROR.  
RT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Answer Tone and the result code NO CARRIER.  
AB is similar to the Call Failure Messages No Dial Tone and No Dial-DTR and the result code  
NO DIALTONE and ERROR.  
NT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Quiet Answer and the result code NO ANSWER.  
Call Connecting (CNX)  
The CNX response informs the DTE that the modem has connected to the remote modem. CNX  
is similar to the AT result code CONNECT.  
The CNX response format is CNX.  
Delayed Call Indicator  
The DLC response is issued to the DTE if the modem is not currently allowed to call the  
number. DLC is similar to the AT result code DELAYED.  
The DLC response format is:  
DLCn  
Where:  
n is the delay (in minutes) before the number can be called.  
Call Answer Commands  
Call Answer commands disable or enable the modem’s AutoAnswer function. These commands  
are issued from the DTE. Call Answer commands include Incoming Call (INC), Disregard  
Incoming Call (DIC) and Connect Incoming Call (CIC).  
Incoming Call (INC)  
The INC response informs the DTE that the modem has detected a ring tone. At this point, the  
DTE can issue the DIC command to disable the modem from answering the call. INC is similar  
to the AT result code RING.  
Disregard Incoming Call (DIC)  
The DIC command prevents the modem from answering an incoming call. This command is  
only valid once the DTE receives an incoming call (INC) response from the modem. A DIC  
must be issued within 5 seconds after receiving an INC.  
The DIC command format is DIC.  
If DIC is issued within 5 seconds, the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE. If DIC is  
issued after 5 seconds, INV is returned.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Connect Incoming Call (CIC)  
The CIC command forces the modem to cancel any DIC commands and answer an incoming  
call. This command is only valid when the DTE issues a DIC command. CIC must be issued  
within 10 seconds after sending a DIC. CIC is similar to the ATA command.  
The CIC command format is CIC.  
If CIC is issued within 10 seconds, the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE. If CIC is  
issued after 10 seconds, INV is returned.  
Program Normal (PRN)  
The Program Normal (PRN) command allows the DTE to enter and store a telephone number to  
a specific directory location. PRN is similar to the AT&Z command.  
The PRN command format is:  
PRNx;n  
Where:  
x is the directory location 1–24  
n is the telephone number.  
Request List of Delayed Numbers (RLD)  
The Request List of Delayed Numbers (RLD) command displays telephone numbers that are  
currently delayed as a result of failed call attempts. All the numbers currently delayed are  
displayed, irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location.  
The RLD command format is RLD.  
Request List of Forbidden Numbers (RLF)  
The Request List of Forbidden Numbers (RLF) command displays telephone numbers that are  
forbidden as a result of failed call attempts. All the numbers forbidden are displayed, irrespective  
of whether they belong to a directory location.  
The RLF command format is RLF.  
D-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CCITT V.25bis Dialing  
Request List of Stored Numbers (RLN)  
The Request List of Stored Numbers (RLN) command displays telephone numbers stored in the  
modem’s directory location. If the RLN command is entered without specifying a directory  
location, then all directory locations and telephone numbers appear. If a directory location is  
entered, then only that telephone number appears.  
The RLN command format is:  
RLN  
which displays all directory locations,  
or  
RLNx  
Where:  
x is a directory location.  
List Delayed Numbers Response (LSD)  
LSD is a response to an LSD command issued by DTE.  
LSDx;n;d  
Where:  
x is a sequence number (not a directory location).  
n is the telephone number.  
d
is the delay in minutes  
List Forbidden Numbers Response (LSF)  
The LSF response format is :  
LSFx;n  
Where:  
x is a sequence number (not a directory location).  
n is the telephone number.  
List Stored Number Response (LSN)  
LSN is a response to an RLN command issued by the DTE. If a directory location is specified,  
then the telephone number for that location appears. If no directory location is specified, then all  
telephone numbers stored in memory appear.  
The LSN response format is:  
LSNx;n  
Where:  
x is the directory location  
n is the telephone number.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Command Response  
A
Command Response indicates that the command entered was a valid or invalid entry.  
Command Response includes Valid (VAL) and Invalid (INV).  
Valid (VAL)  
The  
VAL response indicates that the modem has accepted the V.25bis command issued by the  
DTE. VAL is similar to the AT result code OK.  
Invalid (INV)  
The INV response indicates that the modem has received an incorrect V.25bis command from  
the DTE. INV is similar to the AT result code ERROR.  
The INV response format is:  
INVxx  
Where:  
xx is  
CU command unknown.  
MS message syntax error  
PS parameter syntax error.  
PV parameter value error.  
.
Table D-1 lists V.25bis commands supported by the 392xPlus modems.  
Table D-1  
(1 of 2)  
V.25bis Commands  
AT Command/  
S-Register Equivalent  
V.25bis Command  
Description  
Call Request Commands  
CRN  
CRS  
Call Request with Number Provided  
ATD  
Call Request with Memory Address  
Call Answer Commands  
Incoming Call Indication  
Disregard Incoming Call  
Connect Incoming Call  
Program Command  
ATDS  
INC  
DIC  
CIC  
RING  
NONE  
ATA  
PRN  
Program Normal  
AT&Z  
D-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CCITT V.25bis Dialing  
Table D-1  
(2 of 2)  
V.25bis Commands  
AT Command/  
S-Register Equivalent  
V.25bis Command  
Description  
List Request  
RLD  
RLF  
RLN  
Request to List Delayed Numbers  
NONE  
Request to List Forbidden Numbers  
Request to List Stored Numbers  
List Response  
NONE  
NONE  
LSD  
LSF  
LSN  
List Delayed Numbers  
NONE  
NONE  
NONE  
List Forbidden Numbers  
List Stored Numbers  
Table D-2 lists V.25bis response messages supported by the 392xPlus modems.  
Table D-2  
V.25bis Response Messages  
AT Command/  
Result Code Equivalent  
V.25bis Command  
Description  
Call Response  
CFI  
Call Failure Indication  
BUSY, NO ANSWER, NO  
CARRIER, NO DIAL TONE,  
ERROR  
CNX  
LSN  
Call Connecting Indication  
List Response  
CONNECT  
List Stored Number  
Command Response  
NONE  
VAL  
INV  
Valid Command  
OK  
Invalid Command  
ERROR  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-7  
 
ASCII Character Table  
E
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Overview  
Table E-1 in this appendix provides the ASCII character table.  
Table E-1  
(1 of 4)  
ASCII Characters  
Hexadecimal  
ASCII Value  
Decimal  
ASCII Value  
Control  
Character  
Key  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
016  
017  
018  
019  
020  
021  
022  
NUL  
SCH  
STX  
EXT  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
CTRL-@  
CTRL-A  
CTRL-B  
CTRL-C  
CTRL-D  
CTRL-E  
CTRL-F  
CTRL-G  
CTRL-H  
CTRL-I  
HT  
LF  
CTRL-J  
CTRL-K  
CTRL-L  
CTRL-M  
CTRL-N  
CTRL-O  
CTRL-P  
CTRL-Q  
CTRL-R  
CTRL-S  
CTRL-T  
CTRL-U  
CTRL-V  
VT  
FF  
CR  
SO  
SI  
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-1  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table E-1  
(2 of 4)  
ASCII Characters  
Hexadecimal  
ASCII Value  
Decimal  
Control  
Character  
Key  
ASCII Value  
023  
024  
025  
026  
027  
028  
029  
030  
031  
032  
033  
034  
035  
036  
037  
038  
039  
040  
041  
042  
043  
044  
045  
046  
047  
048  
049  
050  
051  
052  
053  
054  
055  
056  
057  
058  
059  
060  
061  
17  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
CTRL-W  
18  
CTRL-X  
19  
CTRL-Y  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
SUM  
ESC  
FS  
CTRL-Z  
CTRL-[  
CTRL-/  
GS  
CTRL-]  
RS  
CTRL-|Ax  
US  
CTRL-_  
20  
spacebar  
21  
!
22  
23  
#
$
%
&
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
(
29  
)
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
*
+
,
-
.
/
30  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
;
<
=
E-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
ASCII Character Table  
Table E-1  
(3 of 4)  
ASCII Characters  
Hexadecimal  
ASCII Value  
Decimal  
Control  
Character  
Key  
ASCII Value  
062  
063  
064  
065  
066  
067  
068  
069  
070  
071  
072  
073  
074  
075  
076  
077  
078  
079  
080  
081  
082  
083  
084  
085  
086  
087  
088  
089  
090  
091  
092  
093  
094  
095  
096  
097  
098  
099  
100  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
-
a
b
c
d
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-3  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table E-1  
(4 of 4)  
ASCII Characters  
Hexadecimal  
ASCII Value  
Decimal  
Control  
Character  
Key  
ASCII Value  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
111  
o
112  
p
113  
q
114  
r
115  
s
116  
t
117  
u
118  
v
119  
w
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
x
y
z
{
|
}
-
delete  
E-4  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Default Configuration Options  
F
Overview  
Table F-1 lists the six sets of default (preset) configuration options, labeled Sync Leased, Async  
Leased, TMp (Trellis Multipoint), Async Dial, Sync Dial, and UNIX Dial. These six sets contain  
the most commonly used configuration options for modems installed into these hardware  
environments. For information on setting the default configuration options, refer to the Overview  
section in Chapter 4.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table F-1  
(1 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
DTE Interface  
(Multiport mode)  
MUX  
Sub-group  
MUX Mode  
TDM/MSD  
TDM/MSD  
Internal  
(TDM/MSD –  
trib)  
(DTE Bridge –  
control)  
Disable  
Disable  
TDM/MSD  
Tx Clock Source  
Backup Tx Clock  
Internal  
Internal  
(RXC_Loop –  
trib)  
(Internal –  
control )  
Internal †  
Internal †  
Internal †  
Internal †  
Internal  
Internal  
Internal  
(RXC_Loop –  
trib)  
(Internal –  
control )  
Source  
F
CT111 Rate  
Disable  
Host  
Disable  
Host  
Disable  
Host  
Disable  
A
Disable  
A
Disable  
Host  
Control  
F
MSD Port  
Host A  
Host A  
Control  
F
Port Rate  
Sub-group  
Modem MSD  
F
Disable  
Disable  
(Disable Control) Disable  
or (Enable Trib)  
A
Disable  
A
Disable  
Rate at 33.6 K  
Rate at 28.8 K  
Rate at 24.0 K  
Rate at 19.2 K  
Rate at 16.8 K  
33600 Port1 or  
33600 Port1 or  
33600 Port1 or  
33600 Port1 or  
33600 Port1 or  
33600 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
28800 Port1 or  
28800 Port1 or  
28800 Port1 or  
28800 Port1 or  
28800 Port1 or  
28800 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
24000 Port1 or  
24000 Port1 or  
24000 Port1 or  
24000 Port1 or  
24000 Port1 or  
24000 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
19200 Port1 or  
19200 Port1 or  
19200 Port1 or  
19200 Port1 or  
19200 Port1 or  
19200 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
16800 Port1 or  
16800 Port1 or  
16800 Port1 or  
16800 Port1 or  
16800 Port1 or  
16800 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
Not applicable when Async/Sync mode is set to Async.  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is disabled.  
A
F-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
 
Default Configuration Options  
Table F-1  
(2 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
Port Rate  
Sub-group  
(Cont’d)  
Rate at 14.4 K  
Rate at 12.0 K  
Rate at 9600  
Rate at 7200  
Rate at 4800  
Rate at 2400  
14400 Port1 or  
14400 Port1 or  
14400 Port1 or  
14400 Port1 or  
14400 Port1 or  
14400 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
12000 Port1 or  
12000 Port1 or  
12000 Port1 or  
12000 Port1 or  
12000 Port1 or  
12000 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
9600 Port1 or  
9600 Port1 or  
9600 Port1 or  
9600 Port1 or  
9600 Port1 or  
9600 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
7200 Port1 or  
7200 Port1 or  
7200 Port1 or  
7200 Port1 or  
7200 Port1 or  
7200 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
4800 Port1 or  
4800 Port1 or  
4800 Port1 or  
4800 Port1 or  
4800 Port1 or  
4800 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
2400 Port1 or  
2400 Port1 or  
2400 Port1 or  
2400 Port1 or  
2400 Port1 or  
2400 Port1 or  
Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2, Disable (Ports 2,  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
A
3, 4)  
Port Async  
Sub-group  
Async/Sync Mode  
Async DTE Rate  
Asyn # Data Bits  
Asyn #Stop Bits  
Async Overspeed  
Sync  
Async  
= Sync  
8
Sync  
Async A  
= Sync  
8 A  
Async A  
Sync  
= Sync ††  
8 ††  
= Sync ††  
8 ††  
= Sync A  
= Sync ††  
8 ††  
8
A
A
1 ††  
1
1 ††  
1 A  
1
1 ††  
1% ††  
1%  
1% ††  
1% A  
1%  
A
1% ††  
Port EIA  
Sub-group  
DTR Action  
DSR Control  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
A
Ignore  
A
Standard RS232  
Standard RS232  
Standard RS232  
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Forced On  
A
Forced On  
A
RTS Action  
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 (Standard  
RS232 – trib)  
Ignore  
A
Ignore  
A
(Ignore –  
control)  
RTS Antistream  
F
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
A
Disable  
A
Disable  
†† Not applicable when Async/Sync mode is set to Sync.  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is disabled.  
A
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-3  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table F-1  
(3 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
Port EIA  
Sub-group  
(Cont’d)  
CTS Control  
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Forced On  
A
Wink When  
Disc A  
Standard RS232  
RTS/CTS Delay  
LSD Control  
0
0
0
0
A
0
A
0
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard  
Wink When  
Standard RS232  
RS232  
A
Disc A  
XTXC Clamps  
TXC F  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
A
Enable  
A
Enable  
CT111 Control  
F
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Internal  
Disable  
1
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Internal  
Disable  
1
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Internal  
Disable  
1
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Internal  
Disable  
A
A
A
A
A
A
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Internal  
Disable  
A
A
A
A
A
A
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Internal  
Disable  
1
Rcv Remote Loop  
DTE RL (CT140)  
DTE LL (CT141)  
Port Tx Clock  
Extend Main Ch.  
Upstream Port  
F
1
A
1
A
DTE Interface  
(Singleport mode)  
Async/Sync Mode  
Async DTE Rate  
Asyn # Data Bits  
Async Parity Bit  
Asyn # Stop Bits  
DTR Action  
Sync  
Async  
19200  
8
Sync  
Async  
19200  
8
Async  
19200  
8
Sync  
19200 ††  
8 ††  
19200 ††  
8 ††  
19200 ††  
8 ††  
None ††  
1 ††  
None  
1
None ††  
1 ††  
None  
1
None  
1
None ††  
1 ††  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Standard RS232  
Standard RS232  
Standard RS232  
DSR Control  
Standard RS232 Forced On  
Standard RS232 Ignore  
Standard RS232 Forced On  
Forced On  
Ignore  
RTS Action  
(Standard  
RS232 – trib)  
(Ignore –  
Ignore  
control)  
F
RTS Antistream  
F
10 sec  
10 sec  
10 sec F  
10 sec  
10 sec  
10 sec  
CTS Control  
RTS/CTS Delay  
LSD Control  
Standard RS232 Forced On  
Standard RS232 Forced On  
Wink When Disc Standard RS232  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Standard RS232 Wink When Disc Standard RS232  
†† Not applicable when Async/Sync mode is set to Sync.  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is disabled.  
A
F-4  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Default Configuration Options  
Table F-1  
(4 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
DTE Interface  
(Singleport mode Cont’d)  
Tx Clock Source  
Internal  
Internal  
Enable  
Internal †  
Internal †  
Enable  
(RXC_Loop –  
trib)  
(Internal –  
control )  
Internal †  
Internal †  
Internal  
Backup Tx Clock  
(RXC_Loop  
trib)  
Internal †  
Enable  
Internal †  
Enable  
Internal  
Enable  
Source  
F
(Internal –  
control )  
XTXC Clamps  
Enable  
TXC F  
CT111 Rate Control Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
1
Disable  
Disable ††  
Disable  
1
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable ††  
Disable  
1
DTE Rate = VF  
Extend Main Ch.  
Disable ††  
Disable  
1
Disable  
A
Disable  
A
Upstream Port  
DTE Dialer l  
DTE Dialer Type  
AT Escape Char  
F
1
A
1
A
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
AT  
AT  
Disable  
043  
F
043  
F
043  
F
043  
1 sec  
043  
1 sec  
043  
F
Escape Guard  
Time  
1 sec F  
1 sec F  
1 sec F  
1 sec F  
Break Forces  
Escape  
Disable  
F
Disable  
F
Disable  
F
Disable  
Enable  
013  
Disable  
Enable  
013  
Disable  
F
Command  
Character Echo  
Enable  
F
Enable  
F
Enable  
F
Enable  
F
Carriage Return  
Character  
013  
008  
F
F
F
013  
008  
010  
F
F
F
013  
008  
010  
F
F
F
013  
008  
010  
F
F
F
Backspace  
Character  
008  
008  
Linefeed Character 010  
010  
010  
Result Codes  
Enable  
F
F
Enable  
F
F
Enable  
F
F
Enable  
Enable in  
Originate  
Enable  
F
F
Extended Result  
Codes  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
ā† Not applicable when Async/Sync mode is set to Async.  
†† Not applicable when Async/Sync mode is set to Sync.  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
l
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-5  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table F-1  
(5 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
DTE Dialer l(Cont’d)  
Result Codes  
Format  
Words F  
Words F  
Words F  
Words  
Words  
Words F  
A
Mode  
T Command  
Normal  
F
Normal  
ASCII  
Mark  
F
Normal  
ASCII  
Mark  
F
Normal  
ASCII  
Mark  
Normal  
ASCII  
Mark  
Normal  
ASCII  
Mark  
F
V.25bis  
Coding  
ASCII  
Mark  
F
V.25bis Idle  
Fill  
F
V.25bis New Line  
CR+LF  
CR+LF  
CR+LF  
CR+LF  
CR+LF  
CR+LF  
Char  
F
Line Dialer  
Auto Answer Ring  
Count  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Dialer Type  
Tone  
Enable  
2
Tone  
Tone  
Tone  
Tone  
Tone  
Dial Tone Detect  
Enable  
2
Enable  
2
Enable  
2
Enable  
2
Enable  
2
Blind Dial Pause  
Busy Tone Detect  
“,” Pause Time  
F
Enable  
2 sec  
Enable  
2 sec  
45 sec  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
2 sec  
45 sec  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
2 sec  
45 sec  
Disable  
Enable  
2 sec  
45 sec  
Disable  
Enable  
2 sec  
45 sec  
Enable  
Enable  
No Answer Timeout 45 sec  
Fast Disconnect  
Disable  
Line Current  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disconnect F  
(>8 sec)  
Enable  
(>8 sec)  
(>8 sec)  
(>8 sec)  
(>8 sec)  
(>8 sec)  
Long Space  
Disconnect  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
2 sec  
Enable  
2 sec  
Disable  
No Carrier  
Disconnect  
2 sec  
2 sec  
2 sec  
2 sec  
No Data  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disconnect  
Auto Make Busy F Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Make Busy Via  
Disable  
DTR l  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
l
F-6  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Default Configuration Options  
Table F-1  
(6 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
Dial Line  
Dial Modulation  
Dial Line Rate  
Automode F l  
Autorate  
V.34  
V.34  
V.34  
V.34  
V.34  
V.34  
28800 (V34)  
Enable  
28800 (V34)  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
28800 (V34)  
Enable  
28800 (V34)  
Enable  
28800 (V34)  
Enable  
28800 (V34)  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
V32bis Override  
Dial Tx Level  
F
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Permissive  
(–9 dBm)  
Permissive  
(–9 dBm)  
Permissive  
(–9 dBm)  
Permissive  
(–9 dBm)  
Permissive  
(–9 dBm)  
Permissive  
(–9 dBm)  
V.22bis Guard  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Tone F l  
Train Time  
Long  
Long  
Long  
Long  
Long  
Long  
Asymmetric  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Rate  
F
Lease Line  
Lease Modulation  
Leased Line Rate  
V.34  
V.34  
TMp  
V
.34  
F
V
.34  
F
V
.34  
F
28800 (V34)  
28800 (V34)  
(19200 – control) 28800 (V34)  
or (14400 – trib)  
F
28800 (V34)  
F
28800 (V34)  
F
Leased Mode  
(4-wire Ans) or  
(4-wire Orig)  
(4-wire Ans) or  
(4-wire Orig)  
(4-wire Orig –  
trib) or (4-wire  
Ans – control)  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Autorate  
Enable  
Disable  
0
Enable  
Disable  
0
Enable  
Disable  
0
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
V32bis Override  
Leased Tx Level  
Asymmetric Rate  
F
0
F
0
F
0
F
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
10 min  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
10 min  
F
Auto Dial Backup  
Auto Dial Standby  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
10 min  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
10 min  
F
F
F
F
F
F
Disable  
Disable  
10 min  
Disable  
Disable  
Special Standby  
Dial Standby Time  
Carrier On Level  
F
F
10 min  
F
F
43 dBm  
43 dBm  
(–26 dBm –  
Control) or  
43 dBm  
F
43 dBm  
F
43 dBm  
F
(43 dBm – trib)  
F
l
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
F-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table F-1  
(7 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
Lease Line (Cont’d)  
Short  
Disable  
Short  
Short  
Short  
F
Short  
F
Short  
F
V.27bis Train Fl  
V.29 Train On  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
F
Disable  
F
Data Fl  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
F
Enable  
F
Enable  
F
V.29 Retrain Fl  
V
.29 Link  
Point-To-Point  
Point-To-Point  
Point-To-Point  
Point-To-  
Point-To-  
Point-To-  
Point  
F
Configuration  
l
Point  
F
Point  
F
TMp Train Time  
50  
F
50  
50  
F
50  
F
50  
F
50  
F
TMp Tx  
Preemphasis  
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
F
Enable  
Disable  
LeaseLookback  
Dual Lease Line  
F
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Backup Line  
Check F  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
l
F-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Configuration Options  
Table F-1  
(8 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
V.42 / MNP / Buffer l ††  
Error Control Mode Direct  
Direct  
Direct  
V.42/MNP/Buffer V.42/MNP/Buffer Direct  
V.42bis  
Compression  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
013  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
013  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
013  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
013  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
013  
F
F
MNP5  
Compression  
Enable  
Disable  
013  
EC Negotiate  
Buffer  
F
EC Fallback  
Character  
F
Flow Control of  
CTS to DTE  
CTS to DTE  
CTS to DTE  
CTS to DTE  
CTS to DTE  
CTS to DTE  
DTE F  
Flow Control of  
RTS to Modem  
RTS to Modem  
RTS to Modem  
RTS to Modem  
RTS to Modem  
RTS to Modem  
Modem  
F
XON/XOFF  
Passthrough  
Disable  
Disable  
Keep Data  
Data First  
10 sec  
Disable  
Disable  
Keep Data  
Data First  
10 sec  
Disable  
Disable  
Keep Data  
Data First  
10 sec  
Disable  
Disable  
Keep Data  
Data First  
10 sec  
Disable  
Disable  
Keep Data  
Data First  
10 sec  
Disable  
Disable  
Keep Data  
Data First  
10 sec  
F
Modem to Modem  
Flow Control  
F
Break Buffer  
Control  
F
Send Break  
Control  
F
Buffer Disconnect  
Delay F  
Maximum Frame  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
Size F  
Cellular  
Enhancement  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
F
Reduced Async  
Buffer Size  
F
†† Not applicable when Async/Sync mode is set to Sync.  
F
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
l
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-9  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Table F-1  
(9 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
Test  
DTE RL  
(CT140) l F  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
DTE LL  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
(CT141)  
l
Test Timeout  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Receive Remote  
Loopback l F  
V.54 Address  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
V.54 Device  
Peripheral  
Peripheral  
Peripheral  
Peripheral  
Peripheral  
Peripheral  
Type F  
Misc  
Straps When  
Disconnect  
No Change  
No Change  
No Change  
No Change  
No Change  
No Change  
Speaker Control  
Speaker Volume  
Access from  
On Until Carrier  
Medium  
On Until Carrier  
Medium  
On Until Carrier  
Medium  
On Until Carrier  
Medium  
On Until Carrier  
Medium  
On Until Carrier  
Medium  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Remote  
J
Remote Access  
Password J  
00000000  
Disable  
00000000  
Disable  
00000000  
Disable  
00000000  
Disable  
00000000  
Disable  
00000000  
Disable  
Directory Location  
No. 1 Callback  
NMS Call  
Messages J  
Call Connect &  
Progress  
Call Connect &  
Progress  
Call Connect &  
Progress  
Call Connect &  
Progress  
Call Connect &  
Progress  
Call Connect &  
Progress  
Network Position  
J
(Trib – 3920) or  
(Trib – 3920) or  
(Trib – tmp trib)  
(Trib – 3920) or  
(Trib – 3920) or  
(Trib – 3920) or  
(Control – 3921) (Control – 3921) or (Control – tmp (Control – 3921) (Control – 3921) (Control – 3921)  
control)  
Network  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
256  
Management  
Address J  
Diagnostic  
Connection  
(Modem  
(Modem  
(Disable – trib)  
or (NMS(CC) –  
control)  
(Modem  
(Modem  
(Modem  
(DC) – 3920) or  
(NMS(CC) –  
3921)  
(DC) – 3920) or  
(NMS(CC) –  
3921)  
(DC) – 3920) or  
(NMS(CC) –  
3921)  
(DC) – 3920) or  
(NMS(CC) –  
3921)  
(DC) – 3920) or  
(NMS(CC) –  
3921)  
Link Delay (Sec)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
l
J
Refer to Chapter 4, DCP Configuration, for additional information.  
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
Not changed by loading factory default configuration options.  
F-10  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Default Configuration Options  
Table F-1  
(10 of 10)  
Factory Default Configuration Options  
Sync Leased  
Default  
Settings  
Async Leased  
Default  
TMp  
Default  
Settings  
Async Dial  
Default  
Settings  
UNIX Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Sync Dial  
Default  
Settings  
Configuration  
Option  
Settings  
Security l  
Entry  
Wait Time  
20 sec  
20 sec  
20 sec  
20 sec  
20 sec  
20 sec  
VF Prompt Type  
2nd Dial Tone  
1
2nd Dial Tone  
1
2nd Dial Tone  
1
2nd Dial Tone  
1
2nd Dial Tone  
1
2nd Dial Tone  
1
DTE Password  
Tries  
DTE Password  
Termination  
Character  
013  
008  
013  
008  
013  
008  
013  
008  
013  
008  
013  
008  
DTE Password  
Backspace  
Character  
Get User Id  
NMS  
Disable  
000  
Disable  
000  
Disable  
000  
Disable  
000  
Disable  
000  
Disable  
000  
Reporting  
J
Answer Security  
No Answer  
Security  
No Answer  
Security  
No Answer  
Security  
No Answer  
Security  
No Answer  
Security  
No Answer  
Security  
Mode  
J
Originate Security  
No Originate  
Security  
No Originate  
Security  
No Originate  
Security  
No Originate  
Security  
No Originate  
Security  
No Originate  
Security  
Mode  
J
l
J
Not applicable when MUX Mode is enabled.  
Not changed by loading factory default configuration options.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-11  
Sample Configurations  
G
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1  
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3  
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5  
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7  
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11  
Carrier with Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-12  
Point-to-Point MSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-18  
Overview  
This appendix provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 392xPlus modems. Following  
each diagram, the appropriate configuration options, cables, and sample line rates are listed.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Point-to-Point  
Figure G-1 shows a sample configuration for point-to-point applications.  
28800(V34)  
TX  
28800(V34)  
TX  
9600  
DTE  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
(Sync)  
Leased  
9600  
DTE  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
3920Plus  
3920Plus  
A
B
4800  
(Sync)  
DTE  
4800  
(Sync)  
Cable 2  
Cable 2  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable  
1
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Figure G-1. Sample Configuration — Point-to-Point  
Configuration Options  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
G-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
     
Sample Configurations  
Sample Port Rate Table  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
28.8K 9600  
24.0K 9600  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 9600  
14.4K 9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
4800  
4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
12.0K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-3  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Extended Point-to-Point  
Figure G-2 shows a sample configuration for extended point-to-point applications.  
28800(V34)  
TX  
28800(V34)  
TX  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
DTE  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
(Sync)  
Leased  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
DTE  
3920Plus A  
3920Plus  
B
(Sync)  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 2  
Cable 2  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 3  
4800(V32b)  
TX  
4800(V32b)  
TX  
Leased  
4800  
DTE  
3910  
3910  
A
B
(Sync)  
Cable 2  
Cable  
1
Cable 2  
Figure G-2. Sample Configuration — Extended Point-to-Point  
Configuration Options  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
Rate  
Set to RXC_Loop.  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
Set Port 4 to External.  
Port TXC Source  
G-4  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
     
Sample Configurations  
3910 A  
3910 B  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
LeasedLine Rate  
Set to External.  
Set to 4800(V32b).  
Autorate (Leased Line) Set to Disable.  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
LeasedLine Rate  
Set to RXC_Loop.  
Set to 4800(V32b).  
Autorate (Leased Line) Set to Disable.  
Sample Port Rate Table  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
28.8K 9600  
24.0K 9600  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 9600  
14.4K 9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
4800  
4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
12.0K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 3  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 818-2759-0111 or an equivalent customer-supplied,  
EIA-232-D/V.24 crossover cable with DB-25-P (plug) connectors on both ends to  
attach to the modems. (See Appendix C for pin assignments.)  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-5  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Extended Multipoint  
Figure G-3 shows a sample configuration for extended multipoint applications.  
28800(V34)  
TX  
28800(V34)  
TX  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
DTE  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
(Sync)  
Leased  
1
2
3
4
1
2
DTE  
3920Plus  
3920Plus  
A
B 3  
(Sync)  
4
DTE  
(Sync)  
*
Cable 2  
Cable 2  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable  
1
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 3  
4800(TMp)  
TX  
4800(TMp)  
TX  
Leased  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Addr = 1  
3910  
3910  
A
B
Cable 2  
Cable 1  
Cable 2  
4800(TMp)  
TX  
DTE  
(Sync)  
4800  
3910  
C
* This FEP Port is  
Running the Multipoint  
Application  
Addr = 2  
Cable 2  
Cable 1  
Figure G-3. Sample Configuration — Extended Multipoint  
G-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Configurations  
Configuration Options  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
Rate  
Set to RXC_Loop.  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
Set Port 4 to External.  
Port TXC Source  
3910 A  
Use TMp (Control) default configuration options with the following exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
LeasedLine Rate  
Set to External.  
Set to 4800(TMp).  
Autorate (Leased Line) Set to Disable.  
3910 B  
3910 C  
Use TMp (Trib) default configuration options with the following exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
LeasedLine Rate  
Set to RXC_Loop.  
Set to 4800(TMp).  
Use TMp (Trib) default configuration options with the following exceptions:  
TX Clock Source  
LeasedLine Rate  
Set to RXC_Loop.  
Set to 4800(TMp).  
Autorate (Leased Line) Set to Disable.  
Sample Port Rate Table  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
28.8K 9600  
24.0K 9600  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 9600  
14.4K 9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
4800  
4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
12.0K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
G-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 3  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 818-2759-0111 or an equivalent customer-supplied,  
EIA-232-D/V.24 crossover cable with DB-25-P (plug) connectors on both ends to  
attach to the modems. (See Appendix C for pin assignments.)  
Point-to-Point with Automatic Dial Backup  
Figure G-4 shows a sample configuration for point-to-point applications with automatic dial  
backup.  
9600  
DTE  
(Sync)  
9600  
Dial  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 4  
Cable 4  
9600  
4800  
DTE  
(Sync)  
9600  
4800  
DTE  
(Sync)  
28800(V34)  
TX  
28800(V34)  
TX  
Leased  
DTE  
(Sync)  
3920Plus  
3920Plus  
DTE  
(Sync)  
B
A
4800  
4800  
DTE  
(Sync)  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 2  
Cable 2  
Cable 1  
Cable  
1
Figure G-4. Sample Configuration — Point-to-Point with Automatic Dial Backup  
G-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Configurations  
Configuration Options  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Auto Dial Back  
Rate  
Set to Enable.  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Auto Dial Back  
Rate  
Set to Enable.  
Refer to Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
Sample Port Rate Table  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
4800  
Port 4  
28.8K 9600  
24.0K 9600  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 9600  
14.4K 9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
12.0K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1.  
Cable 2  
Cable 4  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 125-0067-0031 (a 6-position, 4-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled DIAL.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-9  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Point-to-Point with Network Management  
Figure G-5 shows a sample configuration for point-to-point applications with network  
management.  
28800(V34)  
TX  
28800(V34)  
TX  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
DTE  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
(Sync)  
Leased  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
DTE  
3920Plus  
3920Plus  
A
B
(Sync)  
NMS  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 2  
3600-  
F3-  
300  
Cable 2  
DTE  
Hubbing  
Device  
CC  
IN  
(Sync)  
Cable  
1
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 5  
Adapter  
NMS  
(6700  
or  
6800)  
(002-0025-0031)  
Figure G-5. Sample Configuration — Point-to-Point with Network Management  
Configuration Options  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
Diag Connection  
Set to NMS(CC).  
Set to Control.  
Set to 1.  
NetworkPosition  
NetMngmtAddress  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
G-10  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
Sample Configurations  
Sample Port Rate Table  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
28.8K 9600  
24.0K 9600  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 9600  
14.4K 9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
4800  
4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
12.0K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 5  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 835-1224-1011 (10 feet), part number 125-0040-0031 (12 feet),  
part number 835-1224-2511 (25 feet), part number 835-1224-5011 (50 feet), or an  
equivalent pin-to-pin, 6-position, 6-wire modular cord. The maximum cable  
length is 50 feet.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-11  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Carrier with Network Management  
Figure G-6 shows a sample configuration for COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier applications with  
network management.  
28800(V34)  
TX  
28800(V34)  
TX  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
DTE  
9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
(Sync)  
Leased  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
DTE  
3921Plus  
3920Plus  
(Sync)  
4
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 2  
SDU  
Circuit  
Card  
Cable 2  
DTE  
CC  
IN  
(Sync)  
Cable  
1
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
Cable 1  
COMSPHERE  
3000 Series Carrier  
DTE  
(Sync)  
Cable 5  
Adapter  
NMS  
(6700  
or  
6800)  
(002-0025-0031)  
Figure G-6. Sample Configuration — Carrier with Network Management  
G-12  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sample Configurations  
Configuration Options  
3921Plus  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
Diag Connection  
NetMngmtAddress  
Set to NMS(CC).  
Set to 1.  
3920Plus  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Rate  
Refer to the Sample Port Rate table in this section.  
Sample Port Rate Table  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
4800  
Port 4  
28.8K 9600  
24.0K 9600  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 9600  
14.4K 9600  
9600  
4800  
4800  
4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
Disable Disable 4800  
12.0K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable 4800  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 5  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 835-1224-1011 (10 feet), part number 125-0040-0031 (12 feet),  
part number 835-1224-2511 (25 feet), part number 835-1224-5011 (50 feet), or an  
equivalent pin-to-pin, 6-position, 6-wire modular cord. The maximum cable  
length is 50 feet.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-13  
   
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Extended Diagnostics  
Figure G-7 shows a sample configuration for extended diagnostics.  
Figure G-7. Sample Configuration  
Extended Diagnostics  
Configuration Options  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
NetworkPosition  
Diag Connection  
NetMngmtAddress  
Set to Control.  
Set to NMS(CC).  
Set to 1.  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
Tx Clock Source  
Diag Connection  
Port Tx Source  
Set to RXC.  
Set to Modem(DC).  
Set Port 1 to External.  
G-14  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
     
Sample Configurations  
3920Plus C  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
Tx Clock Source  
Set to External.  
Set Port 1 to Enable.  
Set to Port 1.  
Extended Channel  
Upstream Port #  
Diag Connection  
NetworkPosition  
Set to Modem(DC).  
Set to Control.  
3920Plus  
D, F  
Use Sync Leased (Originate) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
3910 H  
Tx Clock Source  
Set to RXC_Loop.  
3920Plus E  
3910 G  
Use Sync Leased (Answer) default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem(DC).  
NetworkPosition  
Set to Control.  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 3  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 818-2759-0111 or an equivalent customer-supplied,  
EIA-232-D/V.24 crossover cable with DB-25-P (plug) connectors on both ends to  
attach to the modems. (See Appendix C for pin assignments.)  
Cable 6  
Cable 7  
Use part number 125-0040-0031 (a 6-position, 6-wire modular cord). Attach this  
to the CCIN/DCOUT port of the 3600 Hubbing device.  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord). Attach this  
to the CCIN/DCOUT port of one 3600 Hubbing device and to the CCOUT/DCIN  
port of the second device.  
Adapter  
871A  
Use part number 002-0026-0031 (Feature number 4400-F1-590).  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-15  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Digital Bridging  
Figure G-8 shows a sample for Digital Bridging.  
Figure G-8. Sample Configuration  
Digital Bridge  
3920Plus A  
Use TMp Control Template default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
MUX Mode  
Set to DTE Bridge.  
3920Plus  
B, C  
Use Sync Dial template default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
MUX Mode  
Set to DTE Bridge.  
Set to Control.  
NetworkPosition  
Diag Connection  
Tx Clock Source  
LSD Control  
Set to NMS(CC).  
Set to Port 1.  
Set to Sim_Cntl_Car.  
Set to Ignore.  
DTR Action  
3910Plus D  
Use Sync Dial template default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
NetworkPosition  
Diag Connection  
Tx Clock Source  
LSD Control  
Set to Control.  
Set to NMS(CC).  
Set to External.  
Set to Sim_Cntl_Car.  
G-16  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
Sample Configurations  
3920Plus  
E, G  
Use TMp Tributary template default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:  
Port2 MSD  
Set to Enable.  
RTS Action  
Set to Sim_Cntl_Car.  
Set to Enable.  
Auto Dial Back  
Auto Dial Standby  
Dial Line Rate  
Set to Adv 15min.  
Set to 14400(V32).  
3920Plus F  
Use TMp Tributary template default configuration options with the following  
exceptions:.  
RTS Action  
Set to Sim_Cntl_Car.  
Set to Enable.  
Auto Dial Back  
Auto Dial Standby  
Dial Line Rate  
Set to Adv 15min.  
Set to 14400(V32).  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 3  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 818-2759-0111 or an equivalent customer-supplied,  
EIA-232-D/V.24 crossover cable with DB-25-P (plug) connectors on both ends to  
attach to the modems. (See Appendix C for pin assignments.)  
Cable 4  
Use part number 125-0067-0031 (a 6-position, 4-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled DIAL.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-17  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Point-to-Point MSD  
Figure G-9 shows a sample configuration for point-to-point MSD.  
Figure G-9. Sample Configuration — Point-to-Point MSD  
3920Plus A  
Use Sync Lease Answer Template default configuration options with the  
following exception:  
Rate  
Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
3920Plus B  
Use Sync Lease Originate Template default configuration options with the  
following exception:  
MSD Control  
Rate  
Set Ports 1, 2, and 3 to Enable.  
Refer to the Sample Port Rate Table in this section.  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Cable 2  
Cable 3  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
Use part number 818-2759-0111 or an equivalent customer-supplied,  
EIA-232-D/V.24 crossover cable with DB-25-P (plug) connectors on both ends to  
attach to the modems. (See Appendix C for pin assignments.)  
G-18  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
     
Sample Configurations  
Sample Port Rate Table: Point-to-Point MSD 3920Plus A  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
28.8K 19200  
24.0K 14400  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 4800  
14.4K 4800  
12.0K 2400  
Disable Disable 9600  
Disable Disable 9600  
Disable Disable 9600  
Disable Disable 9600  
Disable Disable 9600  
Disable Disable 9600  
9.6K Disable Disable Disable 9600  
7.2K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
4.8K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
2.4K Disable Disable Disable Disable  
Sample Port Rate Table: Point-to-Point MSD 3920Plus B  
Port  
Rate  
Port  
1
Port 2  
Port 3  
Port 4  
28.8K 19200  
24.0K 14400  
19.2K 9600  
16.8K 4800  
14.4K 4800  
12.0K 2400  
Disable Disable 9600  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9.6K Disable N/A  
7.2K Disable N/A  
4.8K Disable N/A  
2.4K Disable N/A  
9600  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-19  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
Multipoint MSD  
Figure G-10 shows a sample configuration for multipoint MSD.  
Figure G-10. Sample Configuration — Multipoint MSD  
3920Plus A  
Use TMp Control Template default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
NetworkPosition  
Set to Control.  
3920Plus  
B, C, D  
Use TMp Control Template default configuration options with the following  
exception:  
MSD Control  
Set Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 to Enable.  
G-20  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
   
Sample Configurations  
Cables  
Cable 1  
Cable 2  
Use a standard, customer-supplied, EIA-232-D/V.24 cable with a DB-25-P (plug)  
connector at one end to attach to the modem. Attach this to the connector labeled  
DTE1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Use part number 125-0053-1431 (an 8-position, 8-wire modular cord that is  
supplied with the modem). Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-21  
 
Equipment List  
H
Feature/  
Part Number  
Equipment  
Model 3920Plus  
Model 3921Plus  
3920-A1-XXX  
3921-B1-XXX  
6-position, 4-wire modular cord, 7-foot length  
8-position, 8-wire modular cord, 14-foot length  
Universal Power Supply  
125-0067-0031  
125-0053-1431  
327-0074-XXXX  
3600-F3-300  
3600 Hubbing Device  
EIA-323-D/V.24 Crossover Cable  
6-position, 6-wire modular cord  
8-position, 8-wire modular cord  
871A Adapter  
818-2759-0111  
125-0040-0031  
125-0053-1431  
002-0026-0031  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
H-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
Active (Operating)  
A configuration area containing configuration options currently in use by the modem.  
Any time a power cycle occurs or a reset is performed or a save is issued using the DCP  
,
this area is updated with the contents of Active (Saved).  
Active (Saved)  
ADp  
A nonvolatile configuration area containing the most recently saved configuration  
options.  
Advanced Diagnostic protocol. An enhanced diagnostic communication protocol used  
with the 6800 Series NMS and with certain DCP diagnostic functions.  
analog loop  
analog signal  
Answer mode  
ASCII  
See local analog loop.  
A signal, such as a voice, that varies continuously  
.
The modem is in a state where it is ready to receive an incoming call.  
This code (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is a 7-bit code which  
establishes compatibility between data services. ASCII is the standard for data  
transmission over telephone lines. The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters  
(nondisplayed) and 96 displayed characters. Refer to Appendix E.  
asynchronous  
transmission  
A data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission start bit at the beginning of a  
character (five to eight bits) and one or more stop bits at the end.  
AT command set  
A group of commands, issued from an asynchronous DTE, that allow control of the  
modem while in Command mode. All commands must begin with the characters AT and  
end with a carriage return.  
AT prefix  
A prefix issued before every AT command (except A/ and +++) which identifies the  
DTE’s data rate, parity, and character length.  
autobaud  
The modem automatically determines the asynchronous DTE data rate when using AT  
commands.  
automatic answer  
A capability to respond to a call received over a dial line.  
automatic dial backup  
When leased-line operation fails, this function forces the modem to dial the telephone  
number stored in directory location 1.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
automatic dial standby  
When operating in Dial Backup mode, this function forces the modem to periodically  
check the quality of the leased line. If the leased line is found to be at normal operating  
condition, the modem disconnects from the dial network and continues normal operation  
over the leased-line network.  
automatic rate control  
backbone network  
Modems adjust their signaling rate based on current line conditions.  
The primary route from a control modem to its first tributary when the communications  
network contains extended control modems.  
backplane  
A common bus at the rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier connecting each  
circuit card slot to the SDCP and/or SDU. It also distributes low-voltage ac power to  
each slot.  
baud  
A unit of signaling speed that is equal to the number of symbols per second. This is not  
necessarily the same as bits per second, although the terms are frequently interchanged.  
Bisync  
Binary Synchronous Communications. An IBMr communications protocol that has  
become an industry standard. It uses a defined set of control characters and  
control-character sequences for synchronized transmission of binary-coded data between  
stations in a data communications system.  
bit  
A contraction of binary digit. A bit, which is the smallest unit of information, represents  
the choice between a one or a zero (sometimes called mark or space).  
bps  
Bits per second. Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data  
connection.  
broadcast  
buffer  
A method of transmission. The simultaneous transmission to two or more  
communicating devices.  
A storage device used to compensate for differences in the data flow rate when  
transmitting data from one device to another.  
byte  
A sequence of successive bits (usually eight) handled as a unit in data transmission.  
carrier  
The rack mounting that contains 17 slots: 1 control slot for an SDU and 16 modem slots.  
See data carrier.  
carrier-mount  
CCITT  
A modem that is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and  
used at central-site operations.  
An advisory committee (Consultative Committee on International Telephone and  
Telegraph) established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards  
and policies.  
channel  
A path for electrical transmission between two or more points. Also called a circuit, line,  
link, path, or facility.  
character  
A letter, figure, number, punctuation, or other symbol.  
character echo  
A way to check the accuracy of data transmission by sending to the monitor (displaying)  
all the characters being transmitted.  
Glossary-2  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
circuit pack lock  
command mode  
compandor  
A screw lock tab installed over a circuit cards latch release tab to prevent the unit from  
being removed without a tool. It is used on SDUs, modems, and filler panels.  
One of two modem operating modes. When in Command mode, the modem accepts  
commands instead of transmitting or receiving data.  
A combination of a compressor at one point in a communication path for reducing the  
volume range of signals, followed by an expandor at another point for restoring the  
original volume range. Usually its purpose is to improve the ratio of the signal to the  
interference in the path between the compressor and expandor.  
configuration area  
One of five areas within the Configure branch containing modem settings. Configuration  
areas include Active (Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1, Customer 2, and Factory.  
configuration option  
Modem software that sets specific operating parameters for the modem. Sometimes  
referred to as straps.  
connector  
An outlet on equipment and cables that provides a connection.  
constant carrier mode  
Control Channel (CC)  
control modem  
The modem transmits a carrier signal constantly, regardless of RTS.  
The diagnostic interface between a network management system and a network device.  
A control modem polls downstream tributary modems across the analog channel.  
controlled carrier mode  
The modem’s transmitter turns on and off in response to RTS. This mode is used by  
multipoint tributary modems.  
Customer 1  
Customer 2  
DAA  
A user-defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a  
specific application.  
A user-defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a  
specific application.  
Data Access Arrangement. Hardware that acts as a protective interface between the  
telephone circuit and the modem. It performs such functions as ring detection, DC  
isolation, and surge protection to protect the circuit from being disturbed by a modem  
malfunction. The 392xPlus modems contain three dip switches that allow the DAA  
hardware to be configured for use in different countries.  
data bank  
An area within the modem used to store the modems firmware. There are two data  
banks in the 392xPlus modem.  
data carrier  
data compression  
A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains  
information to be transmitted.  
The elimination of empty fields, redundancies, and gaps in order to reduce storage  
capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted. Anything that is eliminated is  
restored after the data is received.  
data mode  
One of two modem operating modes. When in Data mode, the modem transmits and  
receives data instead of accepting commands.  
DB-25 connector  
A 25-pin connector that is used to connect a cable which enables communication  
between two devices.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Glossary-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
dBm  
DCE  
A decibel referenced to one milliwatt. This unit measures relative signal power.  
The equipment (Data Communications Equipment or Data Circuit Terminating  
Equipment) that provides the functions required to establish, maintain, and end a  
connection. This equipment also provides the signal conversion required for  
communication between the DTE and the telephone line.  
DCP  
Diagnostic Control Panel. The face of the modem that continuously provides status  
information about the modem’s operation and allows an operator to manage its operation.  
This is a generic term used for both the standalone and carrier-mounted models. See  
SDCP.  
demodulation  
The process of recovering data from a modulated carrier wave.  
Device Health and Status. A detailed account of device alarms.  
DevHS  
Diagnostic Channel (DC)  
The diagnostic interface between two network devices, used to extend the NMS  
diagnostics to downstream devices.  
dial command modifiers  
dial line  
A modifier used in the dial string that instructs the modem how to process a dialed  
telephone number.  
A communications circuit that is established by a switched circuit connection in the dial  
network.  
dial network  
Dial Standby  
See PSTN.  
A function available when the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode, allowing the  
modem to switch back to lease-line operation while still maintaining the dial-line  
connection.  
dial string  
A series of characters that consists of numbers and modifiers used to dial a telephone  
number.  
digital bridging  
directory location  
Provides the capability of dial backup in a multipoint configuration by bridging the  
signal on the digital side of the front end panel.  
Nonvolatile memory that stores up to ten telephone numbers. Each directory location can  
have up to 40 characters entered.  
DOC  
Canadian Department of Communication.  
download  
A process that transfers modem firmware from a locally attached PC to a modem or  
allows the cloning of firmware from a local modem to a remote modem.  
downstream modem  
DTE  
A device connected “farther” from the host computer.  
The equipment (Data Terminal Equipment), such as a computer or terminal, that  
provides data in the form of digital signals.  
edit area  
A temporary work area used to view and change configuration options from the DCP.  
The edit area can be loaded from one of five configuration option areas, Active  
(Operating), Active (Saved), Customer 1, Customer 2, or Factory.  
Glossary-4  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
EIA  
Electronic Industries Association. This organization provides standards for the data  
communications industry.  
EIA-232-D  
EIA RS-366-A  
An Electronic Industries Association’s standard defining the 25-position interface  
between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment.  
An Electronic Industries Association’s standard defining the 25-position interface  
between data terminal equipment and data communications automatic calling equipment.  
error control  
An algorithm used to correct data transmission errors.  
escape sequence  
Default setting is +++. This sequence lets you switch your modem from Data mode to  
Command mode.  
extended circuit  
See extended network.  
extended network  
The extension of a circuit where the tributary DCE is connected to a downstream  
(extended) control DCE.  
extended result codes  
An asynchronous message (in either numbers or words) that includes VF data rate and  
error control information the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to  
execute a command.  
fallback  
FCC  
Retraining at a lower rate or speed.  
Federal Communications Commission. Board of Commissioners that regulates all  
interstate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate from the United  
States.  
FEC  
FEP  
Forward Error Correction. A method of error control for data transmission where the  
receiving device can detect and correct a character or block of code containing a  
predetermined number of erroneous bits.  
Front-End Processor. A communications computer associated with a host computer that  
manages the routing of data through the network.  
full-duplex  
Simultaneous, two-way communications.  
function key  
Any one of three keys on the DCP that allows you to select or increment an LCD entry.  
Function keys are labeled F1, F2, and F3.  
half-duplex  
Two-way data communications allowed in only one direction at a time.  
handshaking  
The exchange of predetermined codes and signals (tones) to establish a connection  
between two modems.  
HDLC  
host  
High-Level Data Link Control. A communications protocol defined by the International  
Standards Organization (ISO).  
A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of  
the network.  
Hz  
A unit of frequency (Hertz) that equals one cycle per second.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Glossary-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
idle  
A state in which the modem’s operating parameters can be modified or commands can be  
issued to the modem using either AT commands or the DCP.  
JM8  
A jack used for leased-line networks. Pins 1 and 2 are the transmit pair and Pins 7 and 8  
are the receive pair.  
keypad  
LCD  
A set of seven keys surrounding the DCP’s LCD. These keys are used to select  
configuration options and to maneuver through the DCP menu.  
Liquid Crystal Display. A thin sandwich of two sealed glass plates containing liquid  
crystal material. When voltage is applied, the amount of light able to pass through the  
glass plates is altered so that messages may be “written” on the display  
.
leased line  
LED  
A private telephone line connection exclusively for the user. No dialing is necessary  
.
Light Emitting Diode. A light or status indicator on the DCP that glows in response to  
the presence of a certain condition (e.g., an alarm).  
local analog loopback  
long space disconnect  
The modem’s transmit VF signal is looped to its receiver.  
A disconnect can occur if the modem receives an extended space from a remote modem;  
for example, when a remote modem is commanded to disconnect, it transmits a  
continuous space to the local modem before disconnecting.  
loopback test  
menu tree  
Any test that verifies a device’s integrity by connecting the device’s output to the  
device’s input, then checking the received signal for errors.  
The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top-Level menu and extending  
down to various modem functions.  
mixed inbound rates  
MNP  
In a multipoint network, several different data rates from tributary modems’ transmitters  
communicating with one control modem.  
This protocol (Microcom Networking Protocol) detects and corrects data errors caused  
by telephone line noise and signal distortion. MNP5 includes data compression.  
modem  
(Modulator/DEModulator). A device that transforms signals from digital to analog form  
and vice versa.  
modulation  
MSD  
The process of varying some characteristics (usually amplitude, frequency, and/or phase)  
of a carrier wave to form data transmissions.  
Modem Sharing Device. Allows from 2 to 4 physical ports to share a communication  
channel.  
multiplexer (mux)  
A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of multiple independent data  
streams into a single high-speed data stream.  
multipoint line  
Multiport mode  
A circuit connecting one control modem with one or more tributary modems.  
Multiport mode operates only in multiport modems. It is determined by your modem  
model and the selected MUX mode configuration option. Multiport mode is in effect  
when the MUX mode configuration option is set to TDM/MSD or DTE_Bridge. It  
supports from one to four ports depending on how the modem is further configured.  
Glossary-6  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
network  
A communications circuit.  
network management  
address  
The customer-assigned diagnostic address of a modem.  
NIM  
Network Interface Module. The interface provided, up to two per carrier, for the public  
switched telephone network (PSTN).  
non-linear distortion  
NMS  
VF line distortion which is usually associated with pulse-code modulation (PCM)  
compandor noise on the phone line.  
Network Management System. A set of diagnostic and configuration management tools  
for a data communication network, consisting of software programs and dedicated  
computer hardware.  
off-hook  
A telephone or modem is being used.  
on-hook  
A telephone or modem is not being used.  
Originate mode  
The modem is in a state where it is ready to transmit a call. In a dial network, it is the  
modem that makes the call. In a leased-line network, it is one of two sides of the network  
that is selected to be the originating modem.  
parity  
PBX  
A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of  
one.  
Telephone switching equipment (Private Branch Exchange) dedicated to one customer. A  
PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network.  
permissive interface  
phase jitter  
A dial modem operating mode characterized by a fixed output power level of –9 dBm.  
A rapid or repeated shifting of the relative phase of a signal resulting in unwanted  
distortion.  
physical address  
The diagnostic address of a control modem derived from its location in the carrier: its  
carrier and slot number.  
point-to-point line  
poll list  
A line or circuit connecting two stations.  
A list containing the network management addresses of downstream modems.  
A test that checks most hardware components when the modem is powered-on.  
A three-digit code indicating the modem’s highest VF data rate.  
The rules for timing, format, error control, and flow control during data transmission.  
power-up self-test  
product code  
protocol  
PSTN  
Public Switched Telephone Network. A network shared among many users who can use  
telephones to establish connections between two points. Also known as dial network.  
Quick Configuration  
display  
An informative display screen available from the modems Top-Level display. It provides  
such information as network position (control or tributary), network management  
address, DTE mode (Asynchronous or Synchronous), Line mode (Leased Answer,  
Leased Originate, or Dial), and the modulation scheme used by the modem.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Glossary-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
register  
A part of the modem’s memory that contains values that determine the modems  
operating characteristics.  
Remote  
A branch of the Top-Level menu that permits access to the DCP of another modem.  
remote loopback  
A test that sends a signal to the remote modem to test the local modem, the remote  
modem, and the circuit between them.  
result code  
Return to Dial  
RJ11  
An asynchronous message (in either numbers or words) that the modem sends to the  
DTE after executing or trying to execute a command.  
A function available when in Dial Backup mode that allows the modem to switch to  
dial-line operation when currently on leased lines.  
A type of 6-position jack normally used with permissive dial networks and telephone  
sets.  
RJ21  
A type of 50-position jack normally used with permissive dial networks providing the  
appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines.  
SDCP  
Shared Diagnostic Control Panel. An optional user interface that attaches to the front of a  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier. Its functionality is very similar to that of the DCP.  
Installed in one COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier, it controls and monitors modems in  
all the carriers in the cabinet. A single SDCP can control up to 8 carriers, with a total of  
128 modems.  
SDU  
Shared Diagnostic Unit. A circuit card that plugs into a dedicated slot in the  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier to provide the SDCP and network management  
interfaces to the modems in the carrier. It translates the network management protocol to  
the devices in the carrier and routes incoming messages to the appropriate slots.  
secondary channel  
Select key  
A data transmission channel with a lower signaling rate than the primary channel. It is  
mostly used for modem diagnostics.  
An SDCP key that allows the selection of a specific card slot in the COMSPHERE 3000  
Series Carrier.  
serial transmission  
Singleport mode  
A way of transmitting data in which bits are sent sequentially one at a time.  
A Model 392xPlus operational mode is available in both the singleport and multiport  
modem. Singleport mode only supports one port. For the multiport modem, it is in effect  
when the MUX mode configuration option is set to Disable. Singleport mode is the only  
operational mode for the singleport modem.  
S-Registers  
SubHS  
Registers that contain information affecting the modem parameters. All S-Registers must  
be preceded by the AT prefix.  
Sub-Network Health and Status. A display of alarm occurrences in downstream modems.  
synchronous transmission Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals. Characters are sent at a fixed  
rate. This type of transmission is more efficient than asynchronous transmission.  
Glossary-8  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
TDM  
Time Division Multiplexer. A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of  
multiple independent data streams into a single high-speed data stream by  
simultaneously sampling the independent data streams and combining these samples to  
form the high-speed stream.  
TMp  
Trellis Multipoint. Paradyne’s proprietary high speed, fast poll multipoint modulation  
scheme.  
Top-Level menu  
The very top of the menu tree that displays modem status and all Top-Level menu  
branches.  
training  
A process where two modems try to establish a connection over the VF line.  
trellis-coded modulation  
A modulation scheme developed by Paradyne which uses Forward Error Correction for  
multipoint and high-speed point-to-point applications.  
tributary modem  
Tributary modems in a network receive data from the control modem, as well as from the  
network management system in the network.  
UL  
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.  
UNIX Dial  
A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used  
in a UNIXr dial network.  
upstream modem  
USOC  
A device connected “closer” to the host computer.  
Universal Service Ordering Codes.  
V.22  
A CCITT standard for modems operating full-duplex over dial networks at 1200 bps.  
V.22bis  
A CCITT standard for modems operating full-duplex over leased lines or dial networks  
at 2400 bps.  
V.27bis  
V.29  
A CCITT standard for modems operating over leased lines at 2400 or 4800 bps.  
A CCITT standard for modems operating over leased lines at 4800, 7200, or 9600 bps.  
V.32  
A CCITT standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous  
data over leased lines or dial networks at 4800 or 9600 bps.  
V.32bis  
V.32 terbo  
V.34  
A CCITT standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous  
data over leased lines or dial networks at 4800, 7200, 9600, 12,000, or 14,400 bps.  
A modulation that adds the 19,200 bps and 16,800 bps data rates to the V.32bis data  
rates. It is a Paradyne proprietary modulation, not a CCITT standard.  
A CCITT standard for modems operating full-duplex with asynchronous or synchronous  
data over leased lines or dial networks at 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800,  
14,400, 12,000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps.  
V.42  
A CCITT standard for error control protocol.  
V.42bis  
V.54  
A CCITT standard for data compression.  
A CCITT standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Glossary-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
VF  
Voice Frequency. The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound  
(usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz). This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal.  
XOFF  
XON  
A character that tells the DTE or modem to stop transmitting data.  
A character that tells the DTE or modem to start or resume transmitting data.  
Glossary-10  
November 1996  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
C
Abort (test), 3-55  
cables, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6  
ac power requirements, 1-13  
Active (Operating) configurations, 4-1  
Active (Saved) configurations, 4-1  
address, network management, 3-31, 4-29, 4-68  
analog loopback test, 3-57–3-58  
answer access security, 6-2–6-4  
answering a call  
auto-answer, 3-74, 4-19, 4-46  
manual answer, 3-68, 3-75, 4-19, 4-46  
Applications, 1-8  
connecting, 2-3  
Call Setup branch, 3-10, 3-65–3-73  
Canadian government requirements, 1-12  
carrier-mounted  
multiport modem, 1-2  
singleport modem, 1-2  
Clone Remote, 3-42–3-49  
compandor, 3-22  
compatibility, 1-13  
COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier  
Model 3921Plus installation and removal, 2-6–2-12  
network interface module (NIM), 2-2, 3-41  
service line, 3-41–3-42  
COMSPHERE 6700 Series NMS, 1-1  
configuration options  
digital bridge, 1-9  
dual-leased backup, 1-9  
MSD (Modem Sharing Device), 1-9  
multipoint operation, 1-8  
multiport backup, 1-10  
V.34 modulation, 1-9  
approvals, 1-13  
defaults, 2-11–2-12, 4-2, F-2–F-7  
quick display, 3-15  
ASCII characters table, E-1–E-4  
asynchronous character format, 4-13, 4-34  
asynchronous operation, 2-11, 4-2, 4-13, 4-33  
AT commands  
samples, G-1  
tables, Security, 6-13–6-14  
Configuration Tables, 4-8  
multiport mode, 4-8  
command list, 5-5–5-14  
singleport mode, 4-8  
configuration option, 4-41  
operating modes, 5-1  
Configure branch, 3-10, 4-1, 4-3–4-7  
editing and saving, 4-4  
result codes, 5-3–5-4  
using commands, 5-1–5-2  
automatic rate control, 4-24, 4-54  
Control branch, 3-10, 3-35–3-54  
country code, 3-23  
Customer 1 configurations, 4-1  
Customer 2 configurations, 4-1  
B
back panel connectors, 2-4  
backup  
dial, 2-5–2-6, 3-41–3-42, 3-65, 3-68–3-69, B-2  
leased, 1-9–1-10, 2-5–2-6, 3-65  
status, 3-26  
Bell  
103J, 4-50  
212A, 4-50  
Bisync, 4-41, D-1  
busy control, 3-40–3-41  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
D
F
data access arrangement, 1-2  
data compression, 4-59  
data rates. See rates  
faceplate, 1-5, 1-6, 3-3  
factory default configurations, 2-11, 4-2, F-2–F-7  
features, 1-7–1-8  
DATAKIT, 4-16, 4-38, 4-41  
DataStream, 3-37  
firmware part number (FPt #), 3-23  
firmware revision level (FRev), 3-23  
firmware upgrades/download, 3-42–3-49  
flow control, 4-60, 4-61  
front panel. See diagnostic control panel  
function keys, 3-7, 3-9, 4-7  
default configuration options, 2-11–2-12, 4-2, F-2–F-7  
diagnostic control panel (DCP)  
configurations. See configuration options  
description, 1-5–1-6, 3-2–3-3  
menu tree, 3-9, 3-10, A-1–A-3  
messages, 3-11–3-16, 3-18–3-19, 3-27–3-28  
operation, 2-12, 3-7–3-9, 4-4–4-7, 6-7  
status indicators (LEDs), 3-3–3-6  
diagnostic tests. See Test branch  
dial  
G
H
government requirements  
Canada, 1-12  
access security. See Security  
answering a call  
United States, 1-11–1-12  
auto-answer, 3-74, 4-19, 4-46  
manual answer, 3-68, 3-75, 4-19, 4-46  
backup, 2-5–2-6, 3-41–3-42, 3-65, 3-68–3-69, B-2  
command modifiers, 3-72, 5-6  
DCP controlled, 3-65–3-73  
handshaking sequence, 3-74, 3-75  
hang up, 3-67  
manual dial. See Talk/Data  
network connection, B-4–B-5  
stored telephone number, 3-70–3-73, 5-13  
Dial Line configuration options group, 4-22, 4-50  
digital bridge, 1-9, 1-10  
hardware part number (HPt #), 3-23  
HDLC, 4-41, D-1  
Health and Status definitions, 3-18–3-19, 3-27–3-28  
sample configuration, G-16  
digital loopback, 3-58–3-59, 3-60–3-61  
dimensions, 1-14  
directory, telephone number, 3-70–3-73  
disconnecting a call, 3-67  
I
Identity, 3-23  
indicators, status (LEDs), 3-3–3-6  
installation  
Download Software, 3-42–3-49  
DTE  
Model 3920Plus, 2-3–2-12  
Model 3921Plus, 2-6–2-10  
connection, 2-4–2-6, B-3  
status, 3-3–3-6, 3-24  
DTE Bridge. See digital bridging  
DTE Dialer configuration options group, 4-41  
DTE Interface configuration options group, 4-10, 4-33  
dual leased-line operation. See backup, leased  
K
L
keypad, 3-8–3-9  
E
EIA-232-D  
cable connection, 2-4–2-6, B-3  
pin assignments, C-2  
status, 3-3–3-6, 3-24  
end-to-end pattern test, 3-62  
environment, 1-13  
equipment  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
description, 3-2, 3-7–3-8  
menu structure, 3-10  
messages, 3-11–3-16, 3-18–3-19, 3-27–3-28  
leased backup operation. See backup, leased  
Leased Line configuration options group, 4-24, 4-53  
leased-line connection, 2-5–2-6  
leased-line operation, 4-24–4-26, 4-53–4-57, B-2  
LEDs (status indicators), 3-3–3-6  
line connection  
customer supplied, 2-2  
list, 2-1–2-2  
error control, 4-58  
escape character ( + + + ), 4-42, 5-2, 5-16  
dial, 2-5–2-6  
leased, 2-5–2-6  
Line Dialer configuration options group, 4-19, 4-46  
Index-2  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
Index  
Load Number (LN), 1-12  
loopback  
N
O
network interface module (NIM), 2-2, 3-41  
network management address, 3-31, 4-29, 4-68  
network management system connection, 2-6  
local analog, 3-57–3-58  
local digital, 3-60–3-61  
remote digital, 3-58–3-59  
M
operating modes  
Make Busy, 3-40–3-41  
manual dial. See Talk/Data  
menu  
structure, 3-10  
tree, A-1–A-3  
messages  
AT commands, 5-1  
Talk/Data, 3-10, 3-73–3-75  
operational messages, 3-11–3-16  
Options, Status branch, 3-28  
options, strap. See configuration options  
originate access security, 6-2, 6-15, 6-16  
LCD, 3-11–3-16, 3-18–3-19, 3-27–3-28  
result codes, 5-3–5-4  
Misc configuration options group, 4-28, 4-66  
mixed inbound rates, 4-53  
Model 3920Plus  
standalone multiport, 1-2  
standalone singleport, 1-2  
Model 3921Plus  
P
part numbers, 3-23  
passwords  
administrative, 6-5–6-6  
remote access, 3-76, 3-78, 3-79, 4-4–4-7, 4-28, 4-67  
security, 6-2–6-4, 6-15–6-16  
carrier-mounted mulitport, 1-4  
carrier-mounted singleport, 1-4  
Model 392xPlus, 1-2  
pattern test, 3-61–3-63  
phone. See telephone, external  
phone numbers. See telephone numbers  
pin assignments, C-2  
PList (Poll List) branch, 3-10, 3-30–3-35  
power consumption, 1-14  
power supply connection, 2-5–2-6  
power-up self-test, 2-11  
public switched telephone network (PSTN). See dial  
pulse-code modulation, 3-22  
features, 1-7  
menu structure, 3-9  
operational modes, 1-7  
model number (Mod #), 3-23  
modifiers, dial string, 3-72, 5-6  
modulation (dial line configuration option), 4-22, 4-24,  
4-50, 4-53  
modulation schemes  
dial line, 1-13, 4-22, 4-50, 5-18  
leased line, 1-13, 4-24, 4-53, 5-19  
MSD (Modem Sharing Device), 1-9  
multiplexer (TDM). See MUX mode  
multipoint operation, 1-8–1-10  
multiport, backup, 1-10  
Multiport mode, 1-10, 4-8  
configuration options  
Q
R
quick configuration display, 1-10, 3-15  
Dial Line, 4-22–4-23  
DTE Interface, 4-10–4-18  
Leased Line, 4-24–4-26  
Line Dialer, 4-19–4-21  
Misc, 4-28–4-32  
rates  
automatic control, 4-24, 4-54  
dial line, 1-14, 4-22, 4-50, 5-18  
leased line, 1-14, 4-24, 4-53, 5-19  
rear connector plate, 1-6  
rear panel connectors, C-2  
Record, Status branch, 3-28–3-30  
Remote  
Test, 4-27  
multiport modem, 1-2, 1-7  
model 3921Plus, 1-4  
MUX mode, 1-7, 1-9, 4-10  
DTE Bridge, 4-10  
mux disabled, 1-7  
mux enabled, 1-7  
TDM/MSD, 1-9, 4-10  
access password, 3-76, 3-78, 3-79, 4-4–4-7, 4-28,  
4-67  
branch, 3-10, 3-76–3-80  
remote digital loopback test, 3-58–3-59  
requirements  
ac power, 1-13  
government, 1-11–1-12  
3920-A2-GN31-30  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index-3  
COMSPHERE 392xPlus Modems  
reset control, 3-37  
result codes  
T
Talk/Data  
branch, 3-10, 3-73–3-75  
enable/disable, 4-43, 5-7  
extended, 4-43, 5-8  
telephone, external, 3-73, C-4  
TDM/MSD, 1-2, 1-7, 1-10, 4-10  
technical specifications, 1-13–1-14  
telephone, external, 3-73, C-4  
telephone numbers  
list, 5-3–5-4  
numeric or word, 4-44, 5-7  
ringer equivalence number (REN), 1-11  
display, 3-66  
storage, 3-71  
Test branch, 3-10, 3-54–3-63  
Abort, 3-55  
S
S-Register list, 5-15–5-28  
Security  
Local Analog Loopback, 3-57–3-58  
Local Digital Loopback, 3-60–3-61  
Pattern, 3-61–3-63  
access messages, 3-14  
branch, 3-10, 6-4–6-13  
configuration options, 6-13–6-14  
database tables, 6-2, 6-3, 6-16–6-17  
passwords, 6-2–6-4, 6-15–6-16  
Security configuration options group, 4-68  
Select key, 2-9, 3-8, 3-9  
self-test, 3-56  
Remote Digital Loopback, 3-58–3-59  
Self, 3-56  
Test configuration options group, 4-27  
test configuration options group, 4-64  
time division multiplexer. See multiplexer  
TMp default configurations. See default configuration  
options  
self-test, 2-11  
serial number (Ser #), 3-23  
service line, 3-41–3-42  
Service Log, Status branch, 3-29–3-30  
shared diagnostic control panel (SDCP), 1-4, 3-3  
Singleport mode, 4-31  
top-level menu messages, 3-11–3-16  
Trellis Multipoint (TMp), 3-45  
Troubleshooting, B-1–B-5  
configuration options  
Dial Line, 4-50–4-52  
DTE Dialer, 4-41–4-45  
DTE Interface, 4-33–4-40  
Leased Line, 4-53–4-57  
Line Dialer, 4-46–4-49  
Misc, 4-66–4-68  
Security, 4-68  
Test, 4-64–4-65  
U
V
United States government requirements, 1-11–1-12  
UNIX dial, 2-11, 4-2, 4-33  
V.42/MNP/Buffer, 4-58–4-63  
singleport modem, 1-2, 1-7  
model 3921Plus, 1-4  
V.25bis dialing commands and response, D-1–D-8  
V.34, modulation, 1-9, 1-10  
V.34 modulation, 3-25  
soft straps. See configuration options  
software download, 3-42–3-49  
speaker, 3-36  
specifications, technical, 1-13–1-14  
standalone  
dial line, 5-17  
leased lines, 1-10, 5-17  
quick display, 3-15  
V.42 error control, 4-58  
V.42/MNP/Buffer configuration options group, 4-58  
V.42bis data compression, 4-59  
VF, 5-3, 5-9  
multiport modem, 1-2  
singleport modem,, 1-2  
Status branch, 3-10, 3-17–3-30  
status indicators (LEDs), 3-3–3-6  
straps. See configuration options  
SubHS (Sub-Network Health and Status) branch, 3-10,  
3-64–3-65  
connection, 2-5–2-6, B-4–B-5  
data rate, 5-25  
interface requirements, 1-14  
parameters, 1-7, 3-51  
pin assignments, C-3  
rates, 5-17  
synchronous operation, 2-11, 4-2, 4-13, 4-33  
status, 3-20–3-23  
VF Thresholds, update, 3-51–3-54  
W
weight, 1-14  
Index-4  
November 1996  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3920-A2-GN31-30  

Multiquip Mixer EM 900S User Manual
Multiquip Trash Compactor QP4TH User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone S60 v5 User Manual
Omega Vehicle Security Thermometer DP97 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX SR703E User Manual
Oregon Scientific Radar Detector BAR608HGA User Manual
P3 International Portable Radio E 9300 User Manual
Palm Welder m550 User Manual
Palsonic Portable DVD Player TFTV100A User Manual
Panasonic Car Stereo System CQ C1321NW User Manual